BS 800

BS-800/BS-820 Chemistry Analyzer
Service Manual
(Volume 1)
2010-2012 Shenzhen Mindray Bio-medical Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights
Reserved.
For this Service Manual, the issued Date is 2012-01 (Version: 2.0).
i
Intellectual Property Statement
SHENZHEN MINDRAY BIO-MEDICAL ELECTRONICS CO., LTD.
(hereinafter called Mindray) owns the intellectual property rights to this Mindray
product and this manual. This manual may refer to information protected by
copyrights or patents and does not convey any license under the patent rights of
Mindray, nor the rights of others. Mindray does not assume any liability arising out
of any infringements of patents or other rights of third parties.
Mindray intends to maintain the contents of this manual as confidential information.
Disclosure of the information in this manual in any manner whatsoever without the
written permission of Mindray is strictly forbidden.
Release, amendment, reproduction, distribution, rent, adaption and translation of
this manual in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Mindray is
strictly forbidden.
, , , , , are the
registered trademarks or trademarks owned by Mindray in China and other countries.
All other trademarks that appear in this manual are used only for editorial purposes
without the intention of improperly using them. They are the property of their
respective owners.
ii
Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party
Contents of this manual are subject to changes without prior notice.
All information contained in this manual is believed to be correct. Mindray shall not
be liable for errors contained herein nor for incidental or consequential damages in
connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this manual.
Mindray is responsible for safety, reliability and performance of this product only in
the condition that:
all installation operations, expansions, changes, modifications and repairs of this
product are conducted by Mindray authorized personnel;
the electrical installation of the relevant room complies with the applicable
national and local requirements;
the product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.
Upon request, Mindray may provide, with compensation, necessary circuit diagrams,
calibration illustration list and other information to help qualified technician to
maintain and repair some parts, which Mindray may define as user serviceable.
Note
This equipment is to be operated only by medical professionals trained and
authorized by Mindray or Mindray-authorized distributors.
Warning
It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment to carry
out a reasonable service/maintenance plan. Neglect of this may result in machine
breakdown or injury of human health.
iii
Warranty
THIS WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER
WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Exemptions
Mindray's obligation or liability under this warranty does not include any
transportation or other charges or liability for direct, indirect or consequential
damages or delay resulting from the improper use or application of the product or
the use of parts or accessories not approved by Mindray or repairs by people other
than Mindray authorized personnel.
This warranty shall not extend to:

any Mindray product which has been subjected to misuse, negligence or
accident;
any Mindray product from which Mindray's original serial number tag or product
identification markings have been altered or removed;
any product of any other manufacturer.
iv
Return Policy
Return Procedure
In the event that it becomes necessary to return this product or part of this product
to Mindray, the following procedure should be followed:
1 Obtain return authorization: Contact the Mindray Service Department and
obtain a Customer Service Authorization (Mindray) number. The Mindray
number must appear on the outside of the shipping container. Returned
shipments will not be accepted if the Mindray number is not clearly visible.
Please provide the model number, serial number, and a brief description of the
reason for return.
2 Freight policy: The customer is responsible for freight charges when this
product is shipped to Mindray for service (this includes customs charges).
3 Return address: Please send the part(s) or equipment to the address offered by
Customer Service department
Company Contact
Manufacturer: Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd.
Address: Mindray Building, Keji 12th Road South, Hi-tech Industrial
Park, Nanshan, ShenZhen 518057, P.R.China,
Tel: +86 755 26582479 26582888
Fax: +86 755 26582934 26582500
v
vi
Table of Contents
Intellectual Property Statement............................................................................................................... ii

Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party ............................................................................................ iii
Warranty .................................................................................................................................................... iv
Exemptions ................................................................................................................................. iv
Return Policy.............................................................................................................................................. v
Return Procedure ........................................................................................................................ v
Company Contact........................................................................................................................ v
1 System Description 1-1
1.1 Overview...........................................................................................................................................1-2
1.2 Components of Analyzing Unit....................................................................................................1-3
1.3 Functions ..........................................................................................................................................1-5
2 System Performance and Workflow 2-1
2.1 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................2-2
2.1.1 Common ..........................................................................................................................2-2
2.1.2 Specifications for Sample System .................................................................................2-3
2.1.3 Specifications for Reagent System................................................................................2-4
2.1.4 Specifications of Reaction System ...............................................................................2-5
2.1.5 Specifications of Operation ..........................................................................................2-6
2.2 Workflows.........................................................................................................................................2-8
2.2.1 Common Workflows ......................................................................................................2-8
2.2.2 Workflow Descriptions ..................................................................................................2-8
2.2.3 Measuring Points.............................................................................................................2-9
3 Installation 3-1
3.1 Overview...........................................................................................................................................3-2
3.2 Before Installation ...........................................................................................................................3-3
3.2.1 Environment Check .......................................................................................................3-3
3.2.2 System Configuration .....................................................................................................3-3
3.3 Installation Requirements ...............................................................................................................3-4
3.3.1 Space and Accessibility Requirements .........................................................................3-4
I
3.3.2 Power Supply and Noise ................................................................................................3-4
3.3.3 Water Supply and Drainage ...........................................................................................3-4
3.4 Computer Configuration (for International Customers) ...........................................................3-6
3.4.1 CPU...................................................................................................................................3-6
3.4.2 RAM..................................................................................................................................3-6
3.4.3 Network Adapter ............................................................................................................3-6
3.4.4 Serial Port.........................................................................................................................3-6
3.4.5 Hard Disk Defragment ..................................................................................................3-6
3.4.6 Remove Screen Saver and System Standby .................................................................3-7
3.4.7 Screen Display Properties..............................................................................................3-8
3.4.8 Auto Awake Setup...........................................................................................................3-9
3.5 Installation steps ............................................................................................................................3-13
3.5.1 Unpacking ......................................................................................................................3-13
3.5.2 Installation......................................................................................................................3-14
3.5.3 Fluidic Connection .......................................................................................................3-17
3.5.4 Connection of Chemistry Analyzer ...........................................................................3-20
3.5.5 Installation of Hub (optional).....................................................................................3-20
3.5.6 Installation of Data Management Software..............................................................3-21
3.5.7 Powering On..................................................................................................................3-23
3.5.8 Fluidic Prime..................................................................................................................3-26
3.5.9 Initial Maintenance Logs..............................................................................................3-30
3.5.10 Startup Initialization ...................................................................................................3-30
3.5.11 Parameter Import and Chemistry Configuration...................................................3-32
3.5.12 Activation and Installation of ISE Electrodes (optional).....................................3-34
3.5.13 Installation and Upgrading of Operating Software...............................................3-37
4 Overview of Modules and Units 4-1
4.1 Shells Assembly................................................................................................................................4-2
4.1.1 Functions..........................................................................................................................4-2
4.1.2 Locations and FRU Details ...........................................................................................4-2
4.1.3 Removing and Reinstalling Front & Back Shielding Covers ....................................4-4
4.1.4 Removing and Reinstalling Side Plates ........................................................................4-4
4.1.5 Removing and Reinstalling Front Panel.......................................................................4-5
4.1.6 Removing and Reinstalling Reagent Carousel Cover.................................................4-5
4.1.7 Replacement of Air Spring............................................................................................4-6
4.1.8 Replacement of Lock Catch..........................................................................................4-6
4.2 Reaction Carousel Assembly..........................................................................................................4-7
4.2.1 Functions..........................................................................................................................4-7
4.2.2 Locations and FRU details ............................................................................................4-8
4.2.3 Replacement of Reaction Carousel Body Cables.......................................................4-9
4.2.4 Replacement of Metal Plate for Cuvette ...................................................................4-12
4.2.5 Replacement of Carousel Home Sensor and Encoder Sensor Cables .................4-13
II
4.2.6 Replacement of High-speed Motor ...........................................................................4-15
4.2.7 Replacement of Slip Ring Cables ...............................................................................4-16
4.2.8 Replacement of Reaction Cuvette..............................................................................4-18
4.3 Reagent Carousel Assembly .........................................................................................................4-19
4.3.1 Module Functions.........................................................................................................4-19
4.3.2 Locations and FRU details ..........................................................................................4-19
4.3.3 Replacement of Inner Ring of Reagent Carousel Body .........................................4-20
4.3.4 Replacement of Outer Ring of Reagent Carousel Body ........................................4-22
4.3.5 Replacement of Reagent bottle Base .........................................................................4-23
4.3.6 Replacement of Reagent Chamber Assembly ..........................................................4-24
4.3.7 Replacement of Reagent Refrigeration Temperature Sensor Cables ....................4-26
4.3.8 Replacement of Carousel Cover Sensor Cables .......................................................4-28
4.4 Sample Carousel Assembly...........................................................................................................4-31
4.4.3 Replacement of Outer Sample Carousel Body and Cuvette Holder Base 2 ........4-33
4.4.4 Replacement of Inner Sample Carousel Body, 16 Cuvette Holder and 13 Cuvette
Holder Adapter.......................................................................................................................4-34
4.4.5 Replacement of Sample Carousel Motor Assembly ................................................4-35
4.4.6 Replacement of Encoder Sensor and Carousel Home Sensor Cables .................4-37
4.5 Syringe Assembly...........................................................................................................................4-41
4.5.3 Replacement of Sample Syringe 250l and Reagent Syringe 1ml .........................4-41
4.5.4 Replacement of Sample/Reagent Syringe Drive Modules .....................................4-43
4.5.5 Replacement of Syringe 42 Step Motor Assembly ..................................................4-45
4.5.6 Replacement of Clog Detection T-Piece...................................................................4-47
4.6 Mixer Assembly..............................................................................................................................4-49
4.6.2 Locations and FRU Details .........................................................................................4-49
4.6.3 Replacement of Mixers ................................................................................................4-50
4.6.4 Replacement of Mixer Motor Assembly ...................................................................4-50
4.6.5 Replacement of Mixer Rotation Speed Optical Coupler Conversion Board.......4-52
4.6.6 Replacement of Mixer Transmission Assembly.......................................................4-54
4.6.7 Replacement of 3-probe/mixer Horizontal Motor Assembly...............................4-55
4.6.8 Replacement of Synchronous Cog Belt (Endless Belt, 84-tooth, S3M, 6mm Wide)4-56
4.6.9 Replacement of Mixer Drive Assembly ....................................................................4-57
4.6.10 Replacement of Synchronous Pulley .P16MXL6.4DF .........................................4-59
4.6.11 Replacement of Synchronous Belt .B175MXL6.4.................................................4-60
4.6.12 Replacement of Mixer Vertical Motor Assembly ..................................................4-61
4.6.13 Replacement of Mixer Rotary/Vertical Sensor Cables .........................................4-62
III
4.6.14 Replacement of Mixer Phase-1 Wash Well .............................................................4-62
4.7 Sample Probe Assembly ...............................................................................................................4-66
4.7.3 Replacement of Sample Probe Assembly, Anticollision Spring, and Sample Probe
Arm Assembly ........................................................................................................................4-67
4.7.4 Replacement of 3-Probe/Mixer Horizontal Motor Assembly and Synchronous
Cog Belt (84-tooth, S3M) ......................................................................................................4-69
4.7.5 Replacement of Sample Probe Drive Assembly ......................................................4-70
4.7.6 Replacement of Synchronous Pulley .P16MXL6.4DF ...........................................4-72
4.7.7 Replacement of Synchronous Belt .B175MXL6.4...................................................4-73
4.7.8 Replacement of 59 Step Motor Assembly ................................................................4-74
4.7.9 Replacement of Cables of Probe Rotary Sensor, Obstruct Detection Sensor, and
Vertical Sensor ........................................................................................................................4-74
4.8 Probe R1 Assembly .......................................................................................................................4-76
4.8.3 Replacement of Reagent Probe Assembly, Anticollision Spring, and Probe R1
Arm Assembly ........................................................................................................................4-77
4.8.4 Replacement of 3-Probe/Mixer Motor Assembly and Synchronous Cog Belt
(84-tooth, S3M).......................................................................................................................4-79
4.8.5 Replacement of Probe R1 Drive Assembly..............................................................4-81
Vertical Sensor ........................................................................................................................4-85
4.9 Probe R2 Assembly .......................................................................................................................4-86
Arm Assembly ........................................................................................................................4-87
(84-tooth, S3M).......................................................................................................................4-89
Vertical Sensor ........................................................................................................................4-95
4.10 Bar Code Reader..........................................................................................................................4-96
4.10.1 Tools .............................................................................................................................4-96
4.10.2 Maintenance of Sample Bar Code Assembly .........................................................4-96
4.10.3 Replacement of Sample Bar Code Reader..............................................................4-98
IV
4.10.4 Maintenance of Reagent Bar Code Assembly......................................................4-103
4.10.5 Replacement of Reagent Bar Code Reader...........................................................4-106
4.10.6 Replacement of Antifogging Temperature Switch Cables .................................4-108
4.10.7 Replacement of Antifogging Heater Cables.........................................................4-113
4.11 Photoelectric Unit......................................................................................................................4-118
4.11.1 Functions ...................................................................................................................4-118
4.11.2 Components and Structure .....................................................................................4-118
4.11.3 Assembly Locations and Replacement Solutions.................................................4-121
4.11.4 Adjustment of Photometer.....................................................................................4-130
4.12 ISE Module (Optional).............................................................................................................4-140
4.12.1 Functions ...................................................................................................................4-140
4.12.2 Components of ISE Unit........................................................................................4-140
4.12.3 Troubleshooting of ISE Tube ................................................................................4-145
4.12.4 ISE Buffer Resorption Volume Confirmation and Alignment..........................4-148
4.12.5 Electrodes O-shape Washer (801-BA80-00185-00) Check................................4-149
4.12.6 Removing and Reinstalling ISE Module (801-BA80-00168-00) ........................4-150
4.12.7 Removing and Reinstalling SIC Assembly ............................................................4-154
4.12.8 Removing and Reinstalling SIC ..............................................................................4-155
4.12.9 Removing and Reinstalling Solenoid Valve...........................................................4-157
4.12.10 Removing and Reinstalling Degassing Membrane (801-BA80-00213-00) .....4-159
4.12.11 Removing and Reinstalling CPU Board (801-BA80-00214-00) .......................4-159
4.12.12 Removing and Reinstalling Syringe Washer (801-BA80-00184-00).................4-161
4.12.13 Removing and Reinstalling Temperature Stabilizer (801-BA80-00215-00)....4-163
4.12.14 Removing and Reinstalling Motor (801-BA80-00199-00) of Temperature
Stabilizer Unit........................................................................................................................4-164
4.13 Refrigeration Unit......................................................................................................................4-167
4.13.1 Locations and FRU Details .....................................................................................4-167
4.13.2 Replacement of Refrigerant ....................................................................................4-169
4.13.3 Removing/Installation of Reagent Refrigeration Module..................................4-174
4.13.4 Removing/Installation of Refrigeration Circulating Pump................................4-176
4.13.5 Removing/Installation of Refrigeration Fans ......................................................4-178
4.13.6 Removing/Installation of Refrigeration Temperature Sensors .........................4-180
5 Hardware Circuits5-1
5.1 Overview...........................................................................................................................................5-2
5.2 Safety Precautions............................................................................................................................5-3
5.3 Summary of PCBAs........................................................................................................................5-4
5.4 Locations of the PCBAs.................................................................................................................5-8
5.5 Removing PCBAs ..........................................................................................................................5-10
5.6 Functions of PCBAs.....................................................................................................................5-11
5.6.1 Main Control Board......................................................................................................5-11
5.6.2 Wash Temperature Control Board .............................................................................5-16
5.6.3 BA80 Sample Control Drive Board............................................................................5-23
V
5.6.4 BA80 Reagent Control Drive Board ..........................................................................5-29
5.6.5 AC Drive Board.............................................................................................................5-35
5.6.6 Reagent Refrigeration Board .......................................................................................5-39
5.6.7 Five-Probe/Mixer Conversion Board ........................................................................5-46
5.6.8 External Air Pump Drive Board.................................................................................5-49
5.6.9 Communication Conversion Board ...........................................................................5-50
5.6.10 Reaction Carousel Temperature Collection Board.................................................5-51
5.6.11 Cleaning Fluid Temperature Collection Board.......................................................5-55
5.6.12 AD Collection Board .................................................................................................5-57
5.6.13 Preamplifier Board......................................................................................................5-61
5.6.14 Level Sense Board.......................................................................................................5-64
5.6.15 Pressure Detection Board..........................................................................................5-67
5.6.16 Clog Detection Board ................................................................................................5-71
5.6.17 Water Quality Detection Board ................................................................................5-75
5.7 Power Supply System ....................................................................................................................5-77
5.7.1 Description of Power Supply System ........................................................................5-77
5.7.2 Performance Indices.....................................................................................................5-78
5.7.3 Functional Diagram......................................................................................................5-79
5.7.4 BA40 Power Supply Assembly....................................................................................5-80
5.7.5 12V/30A Power Supply Board ...................................................................................5-88
5.7.6 24V/6A Power Supply Board .....................................................................................5-90
5.7.7 Analog Power Supply Conversion Board ..................................................................5-92
5.7.8 DC Power Supply Conversion Board ........................................................................5-93
5.7.9 Tips for Troubleshooting Power Supply System......................................................5-96
5.8 Wiring Diagrams............................................................................................................................5-97
6 Hydropneumatic System6-1
6.1 Overview...........................................................................................................................................6-2
6.2 Hydropneumatic Diagram..............................................................................................................6-3
6.3 Principles of Hydropneumatic System.........................................................................................6-5
6.3.1 Sampling Unit..................................................................................................................6-5
6.3.2 Cuvette Wash Unit..........................................................................................................6-6
6.3.3 Water Supply Unit...........................................................................................................6-7
6.3.4 Waste Unit........................................................................................................................6-8
6.3.5 ISE Hydropneumatic Unit.............................................................................................6-9
6.3.6 Other...............................................................................................................................6-10
6.4 Removing and Installation of Hydropneumatic Components ...............................................6-11
6.4.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................6-11
6.4.2 Sampling Unit................................................................................................................6-12
6.4.3 Cuvette Wash Unit........................................................................................................6-13
6.4.4 Water Supply Unit.........................................................................................................6-20
6.4.5 Waste Unit......................................................................................................................6-23
VI
6.4.6 ISE Hydropneumatic Unit...........................................................................................6-26
6.5 List of Hydropneumatic Materials..............................................................................................6-28
6.5.1 Pumps .............................................................................................................................6-28
6.5.2 Solenoid Valves .............................................................................................................6-28
6.5.3 Connectors.....................................................................................................................6-29
6.5.4 Tubes...............................................................................................................................6-32
7 Alignment and Maintenance 7-1
7.1 Basic Operations..............................................................................................................................7-2
7.1.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................7-2
7.2 Alignment Procedure ......................................................................................................................7-4
7.2.1 Photoelectric Unit...........................................................................................................7-4
7.2.2 Reaction Carousel Unit ..................................................................................................7-8
7.2.3 Sample Carousel Unit.....................................................................................................7-9
7.2.4 Reagent Carousel Unit..................................................................................................7-10
7.2.5 Probe and Mixer Units .................................................................................................7-11
7.2.6 Bar Code Units..............................................................................................................7-15
7.2.7 Hydropneumatic Unit ..................................................................................................7-18
7.2.8 Pyrology Unit ................................................................................................................7-21
8 Alarms and Troubleshooting8-1
9 Scheduled Maintenance List 9-1
9.1 Clean Cooling Fans and Radiators ................................................................................................9-3
9.1.1 When to do ......................................................................................................................9-3
9.1.2 Tool ...................................................................................................................................9-3
9.1.3 Maintenance steps...........................................................................................................9-6
9.1.4 Test and check .................................................................................................................9-8
9.2 Maintain reagent refrigeration circulating filter...........................................................................9-9
9.2.1 When to do ......................................................................................................................9-9
9.2.2 Tool ...................................................................................................................................9-9
9.2.4 Test and confirmation ....................................................................................................9-9
9.3 Check the refrigerant in the reagent circulation system...........................................................9-11
9.3.1 When to do ....................................................................................................................9-11
9.3.2 Maintenance tools and materials.................................................................................9-11
9.3.3 Maintenance steps.........................................................................................................9-11
9.3.4 Test and confirmation ..................................................................................................9-12
9.4 Clean the lens of the optical module..........................................................................................9-13
9.4.1 When to do ....................................................................................................................9-13
9.4.2 Maintenance tools.........................................................................................................9-13
9.5 Replacement of the wearing parts of waste pump (P07) ........................................................9-15
9.5.1 When to do ....................................................................................................................9-15
VII
9.5.3 Required materialFRU.........................................................................................9-15
9.5.5 Test and check ...............................................................................................................9-20
9.6 Replacement of the wearing parts of primary vacuum pump(P08) ......................................9-21
9.6.1 When to do ....................................................................................................................9-21
9.6.3 Required Material(FRU)...............................................................................................9-21
9.6.5 Test and check ...............................................................................................................9-25
9.7 Replacement of the auto wash transfer pipe .............................................................................9-26
9.7.1 When to do ....................................................................................................................9-26
9.8 Replacement of the concentrated wash solution filter ............................................................9-28
9.8.1 When to do ....................................................................................................................9-28
9.8.5 Test and check ...............................................................................................................9-30
9.9 Maintenance the water supply filter ............................................................................................9-31
9.9.1 When to do ....................................................................................................................9-31
VIII
1 System Description
1-1
1.1 Overview
The BS-800/BS-820 is a fully automated and computer-controlled chemistry analyzer
designed for the in vitro determination of clinical chemistries in serum, plasma, urine,
and cerebrospinal fluid (CSF) samples.BS-800/BS-820 consists of the analyzing unit
and operation unit.
Figure 1.1 Overview of the instrument
1-2
1.2 Components of Analyzing Unit
BS-800/BS-820 has a throughput of 800 tests per hour for single- or double- reagent
analysis, and its maximum throughput is 1200 tests per hour with ISE module. The
working period is 4.5 seconds. This instrument is composed of the following
components: one reaction carousel, two coaxial sample carousels, two coaxial reagent
carousels, two reagent probes, one sample probes, two mixing stations and one
automatic cuvette wash station, one photometric detection system and one ISE
module (optional).The photometric system, which is composed of gratings and
diode array, performs photometric measurement to the reaction cuvettes that hold
sample/reagent mixture. After testing, an eight-phase automatic cuvette washing will
be completed by the automatic cuvette wash station.
1-3
Figure 1.2 Layout of analyzers operation panel
1. Pressure gauges for vacuum, deionized water and diluted wash solution pump; 2.
Outer sample carousel; 3. Inner sample carousel; 4. Reagent mixer; 5. Cuvette wash
station; 6. Reaction carousel; 7. Sample mixer; 8. Probe R2; 9. Sample probe; 10.
Probe R1; 11. Inner reagent carousel; 12. Outer reagent carousel; 13. ISE module; 14.
Water tank; 15. ISE buffer; 16. Concentrated wash solution tank; 17. Diluted wash
solution tank; 18. Syringes for three probes
Figure 1.3 Overall structure of analyzer
1-4
1.3 Functions
The following content describes the main procedures of the analyzer.
1. Reset the system, initialize all the mechanical units and wash the exterior and
interior of the three probes and the mixers;
2. Perform 8-phase automatic washing for each reaction cuvette, and after phase 6,
water blank is analyzed automatically;
3. Rotate the reagent carousel to the first specified reagent position, and lower the
first reagent probe to aspirate the reagent;
4. Rotate reaction cuvette to the reagent addition position after completing 8-phase
washing; then rotate reagent probe with R1 added to the reaction carousel and
dispense R1 into the reaction cuvette;
5. Incubate the first reagent in the reaction cuvette for several periods;
6. Rotate the sample carousel to the specified sample addition position, and lower
the sample probe into the sample carousel to aspirate a specified amount of
sample;
7. Rotate the reaction cuvette with R1 added to the sample addition position, and
rotate the sample probe with sample aspirated to the reaction carousel and
dispense samples into the reaction cuvette;
8. Rotate the reaction cuvette with samples added to the sample mixing position for
mixing;
9. For double-reagent tests, rotate the reagent carousel to the second specified
reagent position after a fixed period, and lower the reagent probe into the
reagent carousel to aspirate reagents;
10. Rotate the reaction cuvette to the second reagent addition position, then rotate
reagent probe with R2 added to the reaction carousel and lower it into the
reaction cuvette to dispense R2;
11. With R2 added, the reaction cuvette will rotate to the reagent mixing position
for stirring;
12. During each period, the reaction cuvette receives photometric measurement
(absorbance reading taking) when passing by the photometric unit;
1-5
13. Triple-/quadruple-reagent analysis is similar to single-/double-reagent analysis
stated above; (As for triple- or quadruple-reagent tests, the reaction cuvette with
R2 dispensed will not be washed when passing by the wash unit.)
14. The reaction cuvettes in which reaction is finished will be washed automatically
when they pass by the cuvette wash station.
Table 1.1 Main functions of each unit

Unit Name Descriptions
Sample probe Perform aspiration and dispensing for all biochemistry and ISE
testings
The first and the 140 positions are available for loading samples.
second sample The two carousels are coaxial; 90 positions for the outer two
carousels rings of the outer carousel and 50 positions for the inner two
rings of the inner carousel.
The inner ring of the inner carousel provides a refrigerating
environment.
All the positions in the two rings of the outer carousel and the
outer rings of inner carousel support bar code scanning.
A fixed position for intensive washing solution for the sample
probe is available which can hold 62ml reagent bottle.
Probe R1 Perform aspiration and dispensing of R1 and R3 for all
biochemistry testings
Probe R2 Perform aspiration and dispensing of R2 and R4 for all
biochemistry testings
The first and the The two carousels are coaxial designed for loading testing
second reagent reagents and intensive washing solution. There are 70 R1/R3
carousels reagent positions in the outer ring, and 50 R2/R4 reagent
positions in the inner ring. The inner and outer rings are driven
separately.
All the positions support built-in reagent bar code reader.
Both 20ml and 62ml reagent bottles are supported. 70ml
reagent bottles (for HITACHI) are also supported.
The reagent carousel provides a refrigerating environment
which is constant within 2C-8C for 24 hours a day.
Reaction carousel 165 positions and reaction testing container are available
Sample and Two mix units; each has three mixers; each mixer will be
reagent mix unit washed twice with water
Photometric unit Reversed optics; Support 12 wavelength: 340, 380, 412, 450,
505, 546, 570, 605, 660, 700, 740, 800nm
Automatic wash Eight-phase automatic washing for each reaction cuvette
ISE module Realize the function of ISE measurement
(optional)
1-6
2 System Performance and Workflow
2-1
2.1 Technical Specifications
2.1.1 Common
System
Random, multi-channel, multi-test
System Structure
Analyzer and computer
Sample type
Serum, urine, plasma
Maximum concurrent tests
49 double-reagent tests/68 single-reagent tests
Throughput
800 tests/hour,
Maximum: 1,200 tests/hour (with ISE module)
Analytical method
Endpoint, Kinetic and Fixed-time measurements; support
single-/double-/triple-/quadruple-reagent tests, and single-/double-wavelength tests
Reaction time
The longest reaction time for single-reagent is 9 minutes, and 5 minutes for
double-reagent.
Reaction temperature
370.3C
Test scope
Clinical chemistries, Immunoassays, Therapeutic Drug Monitoring (TDM)
Predilution
Dilution ratio: 2~200; dilution is done in reaction cuvette.
Operation mode
System and tests are configured via the operating software; test one by one; profiles
and calculation tests are allowed.
Calibration math model
Single-point linear, two-point linear, multi-point linear; Logit-Log 4P; Logit-Log 5P;
spline curve, exponential function; polynomial expression; parabola.
Control
Westgard rules, Cumulative sum check, Twin plot
Data processing
Store and output various data and diagrams and calculate among different tests.
2-2
Dimensions
lbh: 1580 mm850 mm920 mm
Weight
425kg
STAT samples
Emergent samples can be analyzed at any time with highest priority.
Networking
Allow to connect with LIS (Laboratory Information Management System).
2.1.2 Specifications for Sample System

Sample loading
Samples are loaded via sample carousel.
Sample cuvette type
The first and the second rings of the sample carousel (from the outer to the
inner) are compatible with the following sample containers:
Microtube: Hitachi 1237mm and Beckman 1425mm
Primary tube or plastic tube: 1268.5mm, 1299mm, 12.775mm,
12.7100mm, 1375mm, 1395mm, 13100mm
Besides containers mentioned above, the third ring of the sample carousel (from
the outer to the inner) is also compatible with the following sample containers:
16.5X 92mm, 16X 75mm, 16X 100mm
The fourth ring of the sample carousel (from the outer to the inner) is
compatible with the following sample containers:
Microtube: Hitachi 1237mm and Beckman 1425mm
Primary tube or plastic tube: 1268.5mm, 12.775mm, 13 X 75mm
Sample Inventory
Hitachi sample container (1237mm): the sample volume 100l; Beckman
microtube (1425mm, 0.5ml): the sample volume 50l; Beckman microtube
(1425mm, 2ml), the sample volume 150l.
For primary tube or plastic tube, the sample should be kept 8mm higher than the
unacceptable sample level height.
Sample carousel
The common sample carousels are the two coaxial carousels, and each carousel has
two rings; the inner ring of the inner carousel provides a refrigerating environment;
rings of the outer carousel and the outer ring of the inner carousel support bar code
scanning.
Sample positions on sample carousel
140 sample positions are available; 90 positions for the outer two rings of the outer
carousel and 50 positions for the inner two rings of the inner carousel. Standard,
2-3
control, STAT and dilution positions are included.
STAT samples
Emergent samples can be analyzed at any time with highest priority.
Sample volume
1.5l ~ 35l, with an increment of 0.1l
ISE sample: 22l
Sample probe
One sample probe available, featuring level sense, horizontal/vertical bump detection,
clog detection and level tracking.
Sample probe wash
Wash the exterior and interior of the probe; carryover contamination rate < 0.1%.
Sample input mode (bar code)
Name Value
Symbology Codabar, ITF, code128, code39, UPC/EAN, Code93
Minimum bar code 0.19mm
density
Data bits 3~27
Format and content User defined
Maximum width 55mm
Maximum height 10mm
Maximum inclination 5C
angle
Print quality No less than Class C according to the ANSI MH10.8M Print
Quality Specification.
Width and narrowness 2.5:1 to 3.0:1
2.1.3 Specifications for Reagent System

Reagent loading
R1 and R3 are placed in the outer ring of reagent carousel, and R2 and R4 are placed
in the inner ring.
Reagent bar code
Code128 is supported; bar code density: 0.19mm; Width and narrowness: 2.5:1.
Name Value
Symbology Codabar, ITF, code128, code39, UPC/EAN, Code93
Minimum bar code density 0.25mm
Data bits 3~27
Format and content User defined
Maximum width 55mm
Maximum height 10mm
2-4
Name Value
Maximum inclination angle 5C
Print quality Class A (ANSI MH10.8M)
Width and narrowness 2.5:1 to 3.0:1
Reagent refrigeration
Refrigeration temperature: 2~8C
Reagent addition approach
Reagent addition, level sense and remaining volume check are performed precisely by
syringes.
Supported reagent types
R1, R2, R3 and R4.
Reagent volume
15l ~300l, with increment of 0.5l.
Reagent carousel
The common reagent carousels are the two coaxial carousels, and the inner and outer
rings are driven separately; all the positions support built-in bar code scanning.
The number and volume of reagent bottle
There are 70 R1/R3 positions in the outer ring and 50 R2/R4 positions in the inner
ring. Each reagent position can hold Mindray 20ml, 62ml reagent bottles and Hitachi
70ml bottles.
Reagent probe
Two separate reagent probes are available, featuring level sense, horizontal/vertical
bump detection.
Reagent probe wash
Wash the exterior and interior of the probe; carryover contamination rate < 0.1%.
Reagent inventory
Bottle specification 20ml 62ml
Dead volume 2ml 3.5ml
Prevention of cross contamination
User defined; wash the exterior and interior of the reagent probe; wash the probe
intensively.
2.1.4 Specifications of Reaction System

Optical pathlength of reaction cuvette
5mm
Specification and material of reaction cuvette
5mm5mm29mm; made of permanent glass
2-5
Number of reaction cuvettes
165
Mixing procedure
There are two mix assemblies for reagent and sample, and each assembly has three
mixers. The mixers will start to work after adding the sample, R2, R3 and R4.
Reactant volume
100~360l
Photometric system
Reversed optics of holographic concave flat-field gratings; Photodiode detects each
wavelength.
Range of wavelengths
12 wavelengths: 340, 380, 412, 450, 505, 546, 570, 605, 660, 700, 740 and 800nm.
Light source
12V/20W tungsten-halogen lamp; direct lighting.
Gratings type
Reversed optics of holographic concave flat-field gratings
Wavelength accuracy
2nm
Minimum reaction volume
100l
Photometric measurement method
Photodiode
Concurrent wavelengths for each test
One or two wavelengths
Absorbance range
0-3.4A, optical path: 10mm
Resolution of photometer
0.0001OD
2.1.5 Specifications of Operation

Monitor
ELO 17-inch, touchscreen
Operating system
Windows XP (professional/home) SP1 or later; compatible with Vista
Communication interface
RS232; compatible with TCP/IP
2-6
Printer
The system supports three types of printer, which include inkjet printer, laser (black
and white) printer and stylus printer.
Data input
Keyboard; mouse; 17-inch touchscreen; bar code reader; RMS (communicating
through the TCP/IP interface of static IP address); LIS: HL7, ASTM1394
(communicating through the TCP/IP or serial interface of static IP address)
Data output
Monitor, printer, RMS (communicating through the TCP/IP interface of static IP
address), LIS
Data storage
Hard disk; USB
2-7
2.2 Workflows
2.2.1 Common Workflows
Figure 2.1 Analysis workflows
2.2.2 Workflow Descriptions

Sequential actions of sample probe in each period
Lower into the sample cuvette -> aspirate sample -> raise to home position
vertically -> rotate to reaction carousel -> lower into the reaction carousel ->
dispense sample -> raise to the specified height for washing -> rotate to wash
reservoir -> start to wash -> rotate to the sample rack or the sample carousel -> go
to next period
Sequential actions of probe R1 in each period

Lower into the reagent bottle -> aspirate reagent -> raise to home position
vertically -> rotate to reaction carousel -> lower into the reaction carousel -> deliver
reagent -> raise to the specified height for washing -> rotate to wash reservoir ->
start to wash -> rotate to the reagent carousel -> go to next period
Sequential actions of probe R2 in each period

Lower into the reagent bottle -> aspirate reagent -> raise to home position
vertically -> rotate to reaction carousel -> lower into the reaction carousel -> deliver
reagent -> raise to the specified height for washing -> rotate to wash reservoir ->
start to wash -> rotate to the reagent carousel -> go to next period
Sequential actions of reagent and sample mixers in each period

Both sample and reagent mix module has three mixers which perform phase-I wash,
phase-II wash and mix actions separately in each period. Two periods are required by
each mixer to complete washing. The mixer will start to work after the reaction
carousel stops.
2-8
The sequence is: Lower into the reaction carousel/wash reservoir -> clean during
mixing -> raise to the upper position of the reaction carousel/wash reservoir ->
rotate the mixer to washing/mixing position.
Sequential actions of reaction carousel

BS-800 chemistry analyzer provides 165 positions for reaction cuvettes; 4.5 seconds
for one cycle; one stop after one rotation. In one cycle (4.5 seconds), the carousel will
stop after 41 cuvettes rotated counterclockwise, complete adding samples, R1 and
R2.Altogether, four cycles are required for 164 reaction cuvettes; the cuvettes will
rotate one by one clockwise.
2.2.3 Measuring Points

Add R1
Add sample
Stir sample
Add R2
Stir R2
8-phase washing About

About 4 min About 5 min
1 min
End
1 5 9 1 3 17 21 25 29 31 44 46 95 97 159
Measuring points for single-/double-reagent
Figure 2.2 Measuring points for single-/double-reagent
Add R1
Add sample
Stir sample
Add R2 Add R3
Stir R2 Stir R3 Add R4
Stir R4
8-phase washing 1min 3.5min 7.5min 1min 3.5min 5min
Stop washing End
1 5 9 1 3 17 21 25 2931 44 46 95 97 166 194 196 211 260 262 331
Measuring points for triple-/quadruple-reagents
Figure 2.3 Measuring points for triple-/quadruple-reagents
2-9
2-10
3 Installation
3-1
3.1 Overview
This chapter mainly describes the working environment, installation procedures and
some precautions of BS-800/BS-820 to guide the installation.
3-2
3.2 Before Installation
3.2.1 Environment Check
Altitude: -400-4,000. (An external air pump is required when the instrument is
used at a an altitude over 2,000m, and the maximum altitude is 4,000m)
(106kPa-63.2kPa).
The system is for indoor use only.
The bearing platform (or ground) should be level (with gradient less than
1/200).
The bearing platform (or ground) should be able to support at least 450Kg
weight.
The installation site should be well ventilated.
The installation site should be free of dust.
The installation side should not be in direct sun.
The installation site should be kept away from a heat or draft source.
The installation site should be free of corrosive gas and flammable gas.
The bearing platform (of ground) should be free of vibration.
The installation site should be kept away from large noise and power supply
interference.
Keep the system away from brush-type motors and electrical contact device that
is frequently switched on and off.
Do not use such devices as mobile phones and radio transmitter near the system.
Operating temperature: 15C-30C with fluctuation <2C/H.
Relative humidity: 35%-85%, without condensation.
Provide air conditioning equipment if the room temperature does not meet the
requirements.
Install the equipment near the sewer for convenient discharging of waste liquids.
Dimensions before packing: 1580mm(length)850mm(depth)920mm(height)
Dimensions after packing: 710mm(length)1,080mm(depth)1,400mm(height)
3.2.2 System Configuration

BS-800/BS-820 chemistry analyzer
Accessory kit packing list
ISE accessory kit packing list (for ISE module only)
Optional or standard external equipment (monitor, computer, and printer)
Optional external module (air pump, water supply module, remote maintenance
system, and hub)
3-3
3.3 Installation Requirements
3.3.1 Space and Accessibility Requirements
Wall
Min: 500
Max: 3000
Min: 500
Operation Unit
850
Analyzing Unit
Front
1580
Min: 500
Min: 500 Unit: mm
Figure 3.1 System clearances
3.3.2 Power Supply and Noise

Power supply: 220V: 220-240V~ 50Hz, 220/230V~ 60Hz; 110V: 110/115V~
60Hz. Voltage fluctuation: +/-10%. Line frequency: +/-3Hz. Three-wire power
cord with good grounding performance.
The instrument should be powered by a properly-grounded power supply no
less than 5000VA, and the mains socket used to connect the instrument should
have its load no less than 16A.
Keep the instrument at least 2.5m away from the mains socket.
If you are going to use a UPS to power the instrument, make sure that the UPS
can provide power supply greater than or equal to 5000VA/3500W.
WARNING
Make sure the power socket is grounded correctly. Improper grounding may lead
to electric shock or equipment damage.
Check if the power sockets outputs voltage meeting the specified requirements
and has a proper fuse installed.
3.3.3 Water Supply and Drainage

Water quality: meeting requirements of CLSI type II with specific resistance no
less than 1 (M.cm@25C) and with silicate less than 0.1mg/L.
Water supply pressure: 49-392kPa. Use a water supply module if the water unit
does not meet the requirements of water supply pressure.
3-4
Flow: no less than 60L/H for continuous flow, and 2L/M for transient peak
flow.
Water temperature: 5-32C.
When the instrument uses water supplied by a water unit,
Make sure that the tube connecting the water unit outlet with the instrument
inlet is no longer than 10m.
The water tube provided with the instrument is ID12mm OD18mm PVC
tube, which should be installed by the water unit supplier.
The water unit outlet tube has internal diameter no less than 7mm in order to
prevent insufficient water supply or too high water supply pressure.
When the instrument uses water supplied by a water supply module(optional),
Lay the water supply module between the deionized water tank and the
instrument.
Make sure that the tube connecting the deionized water tank with the
instrument inlet is no longer than 10m.
Choose a deionized water tank (with cap) with capacity of 80-120L.
Lay the water supply module on the ground.
Make the instrument discharge low-concentration waste to the sewer, and ensure
the low-concentration waste tube is 2-10m long.
Set the high-concentration waste tank on the ground and make sure that the
high-concentration waste tube is about 2m long.
Make sure that the low-concentration waste outlet is no less than 50mm wide.
Make sure that the low-concentration waste outlet is no higher than 1.2m.
BIOHAZARD
Dispose of the waste liquid according to the local regulations.
CAUTION
The supplied water must meet the requirements of CLSI type II; otherwise
insufficiently purified water may result in misleading test results.
3-5
3.4 Computer Configuration (for International
Customers)
3.4.1 CPU
At least Intel Dual Core, 8400 @ 3.0GHz
3.4.2 RAM
At least 2GB for each RAM
3.4.3 Network Adapter

The computer is connected to the chemistry analyzer through a network adapter. If
you are going to connect the computer with the LIS or Internet, you should prepare
another network adapter (Intel gigabit network adapter)
3.4.4 Serial Port

The computer should provide an RS232 serial port, which is used to connect it with
the chemistry analyzer.
3.4.5 Hard Disk Defragment

Install the operating system in the C drive and the operating software of the
instrument in the D drive. Make sure that the C drive is over 30G and D drives over
100G, and the disk file system is of NTFS format. Deselect the two options at the
bottom of the disk properties window: Compress drive to save disk space and
Allow Indexing Service to index this disk for fast file searching.
3-6
Operating system
The operating system installed on the computer must be an activated or free version
of Microsoft Windows XP Professional or Windows 7 Professional. If you need one,
contact us to purchase a Window XP Pro Embedded or a or Windows 7
Professional.
The default login user of the computer must belong to the Administrators group and
has permissions of the administrator.
Application software
Except for the operating system, other application software must not be installed or
reserved on the computer. If the anti-virus application has been installed, then
remove the automatic scheduled scanning and add BS800 and BSLOG to the trust
list.
3.4.6 Remove Screen Saver and System Standby

To remove the screen saver and system standby, click the right mouse button on the
desktop, select Properties to display the Display Properties window. Select
None in the Screen saver pull-down list box, and then select the Power button to
go to the Power Options Properties window. Perform the settings as shown in
the figures below.
Select the Hibernate page, and then deselect the Enable hibernation checkbox.
3-7
3.4.7 Screen Display Properties
Set the screen resolution as 1280*1024 pixels and color quality as Highest (32 bit).
Disable automatic synchronization with Internet time server

Double click the time icon on the lower-right corner of the task bar. The Date and
Time Properties window is displayed.
Select the Internet Time tab, and then deselect the checkbox in front of
Automatically synchronize with an Internet time server.
3-8
Turn off automatic updates
Turn off the automatic updates on the Automatic Updates window.
3.4.8 Auto Awake Setup

Definition of auto awake:
If the analyzer is started while the computer and power supply have been switched
off, the computer and operating software can be woken up through the auto awake
time settings, and the analyzer is initialized automatically when the operating software
is run. To set up auto awake time, select Instrument F1 Sleep/Awake Auto
Awake Setup. The following window is displayed.
3-9
Auto awake setup:
If the user is going to use the auto awake/shutdown function of the instrument,
connect the analyzer with the computer through the network interface, and perform
necessary settings for BIOS and network adapters. The BIOS and network adapter
hardware settings vary from computers of different brands and models, which
however have same setup options. Perform necessary settings by referring to the user
manuals of BIOS and network adapters.
Settings of Windows XP:

Take Lenovo ThinkCentre M8000t computer as an example. The computer has an
integrated network adapter and an independent network adapter. Both of the two
network adapters support wake on LAN. To enable wake on LAN, the two adapters
are different in BIOS and network adapter hardware settings.
Integrated network adapter: Intel(R) 82567LM-3 Gigabit Network Connection
Independent network adapter: Realtek RTL8169/8110 Family Gigabit Ethernet NIC
BIOS setup step 1: Select Power -> Automatic Power On to enable automatic
power on.
3-10
BIOS setup step 2: Set Wake on LAN as Primary.
Integrated network adapter setup step 1: Set the wake link to compulsive.
Integrated network adapter setup step 2: Set Enable PME to Enabled.
Integrated network adapter setup step 3: Set Wake-on-Lan Capabilities to Pattern
Match & Magic Pack.
Independent network adapter setup step 1: Enable Shutdown Wake-on-Lan.
Independent network adapter setup step 2: Set the Wake-on-Lan mode.
Independent network adapter setup step 3: Set the WOL & Shutdown Link Speed.
To use Wake-on-Lan based on the independent network adapter, you should disable
3-11
the integrated network adapter in BIOS settings. Wake-on-Lan cannot be enabled
simultaneously on the integrated and independent network adapters.
To disable the integrated network adapter in BIOS:
Devices - > Network Setup - > Onboard Ethernet Controller = Disabled
Settings of Windows 7:
Take Lenovo ThinkCentre M8300t computer as an example. The computer has an
integrated network adapter and an independent network adapter. Only the integrated
network adapter supports remote waking up of the analyzer.
Integrated network adapter: Intel(R) 82579LM Gigabit Network Connection
1 BIOS setup:
Select Power - Wake, and perform the following settings:

Wake on LAN Primary
PCI Modem Ring Detect: Disabled
Serial Port Ring Detect: Disabled
PCI Wake Up: Disabled
Wake Up on Alarm: Disabled
2 Setup of integrated network adapter:
3 To disable the independent network adapter, select My Computer - Properties -

Hardware - Device Manager, and then disable the independent network adapter.
4 Use a network cable to connect the analyzer with the computer through their
network interfaces.
5 Select Utility- System Setup - Instrument F1 - Sleep/Awake, set up the auto

awake time, and then shut down the computer. Please note not to disconnect
power supply from the computer and analyzer.
6 When the auto awake time is reached, the computer will start automatically and
run the operating software.
After you finish the settings as instructed above, the auto awake function of the
instrument can be used.
3-12
3.5 Installation steps
3.5.1 Unpacking
1 Before unpacking, check the packing list and see if the following items are
included: chemistry analyzer, accessory kit, high-concentration waste tank, wash
solution, ISE module (accessory kit), water supply module (optional), remote
maintenance system (RMS), and hub (optional).
2 The chemistry analyzer is about 465kg. Unload it from the truck with a forklift.
3 Use an adjustable wrench to loosen the retaining screws on the upper cover and
slope cover of the package, remove the two covers and keep 3m space in front
of the slope cover (1.4m for the slope cover and 1.6m for the instrument).
Slope cover
Figure 3.2 Before and after removing instrument package
3-13
Figure 3.3 Screw down anchors and screw up retaining screws
Remove the mounting plate, and then screw up the anchors carefully.
Figure 3.4 Remove chemistry analyzer from package

4 Remove the two strengthening ribs from the slope board and then place it on
the pallet.
Strengthening
rib
3.5.2 Installation
Set the chemistry analyzer in an appropriate place and then finish the following
installation.
3-14
Figure 3.5 Install the 3 probes and 6 mixers
Figure 3.6 Connect tubes, chemistry analyzer and computer
Install probes
1 Insert the probe downwards into the hole on the probe arm while aligning the
screw hole on the probe plate to the rod inside the arm.
2 Install the washer in the tube connector. To replace the washer, remove the old
one from the tube connector and install the new one. Connect the tube
connector to the probe and then tighten it.
3 Fix the earthing wire of the probe to the earthing terminal inside the arm;
connect the probe connector to the liquid level detection board.
4 Sleeve the spring on the rod and tighten the retaining screw. Pay attention to the
spring direction and make the thread opening face downwards.
5 Pinch the probe by the part near the probe arm. Push the probe upwards and
then release it to check if the spring works well. If it does, proceed to the next
step. If not, check if the spring is clamped or fixed too tightly.
6 After installation, power on the chemistry analyzer, and then check if the No.D2
LED indicator on the circuit board inside the probe arm is lit. If it is, it indicates
that the level detection system works normally.
3-15
7 Install the probe arm cover properly until you hear a click.
8 Pinch the probe by the part near the probe arm. Push the probe upwards and
then release it to check if the spring works well. If it does, proceed to the next
step. If not, it indicates that the arm cover is not installed correctly. Reinstall the
arm cover and check the spring until it can move freely.
9 Perform the installation according to the figure below.
Keep the
Washer washer
steady
Retaining screw
and spring Earthing
wire
Level detection
board connector
Figure 3.7 Installation of 3 probes
3-16
Install mixers
Install the mixer by inserting it from the top of the arm. Rotate the mixer to make it
better contact the hole on the arm. See the figure below.
Figure 3.8 Install mixers
3.5.3 Fluidic Connection

Connect Chemistry Analyzer with Water Unit
Max. of 1200mm
Figure 3.9 Connect Chemistry Analyzer with Water Unit

1 Use the PVC tube in the accessory kit to connect the chemistry analyzer with
the water unit. Install the water inlet filter between the water unit outlet and the
analyzer inlet and make sure that the filter will not be influenced by external
force and is convenient for replacement.
2 The arrow on the filter shell indicates the water flow. Make sure that the arrow
points at the analyzer inlet. Do not perform any operations on the air vent of
3-17
the filter.
3 To prevent leaks, fix all tubes and connectors properly with the tube clamps in
the accessory kit.
4 Ensure that the water inlet tube between the water unit and the analyzer is less
than 10m long. When installing the tube, prevent it from being bent, twisted, or
pressed, and keep it away from any sharp-edged objects or others that may
scratch the tube.
5 If the tube is not installed correctly, remove it from the water unit and the
analyzer, cut off the part that has contacted the connectors, and then reinstall
the tube properly.
Connect Chemistry Analyzer with Water Supply Module (optional)
Chemistry analyzer
DI water tank
Fixed by tube
clamps
1 2
Water supply
3 4 inlet filter
5 6 7: Water inlet
DI water inlet 7 8 9 8: Air vent

Inlet filter
9: Water outlet
Water supply module
Figure 3.10 Connect Chemistry Analyzer with Water Supply Module (optional)
1 Use the PVC tube in the accessory kit to connect the chemistry analyzer with
the water supply module. Install the water supply module between the deionized
water tank and the analyzer inlet. Install the water inlet filter between the water
supply module outlet and the analyzer inlet, and make sure that the filter will not
be influenced by external force and is convenient for replacement.
2 Install the water supply module filter at the end of the inlet tube and then place
the tube at the bottom of the deionized water tank.
3 The arrow on the filter shell indicates the water flow. Make sure that the arrow
points at the analyzer inlet. Do not perform any operations on the air vent of
the filter.
3-18
the accessory kit.
5 Ensure that the water inlet tube between the deionized water tank and the
analyzer is less than 10m long. When installing the tube, prevent it from being
bent, twisted, or pressed, and keep it away from any sharp-edged objects or
others that may scratch the tube.
6 If the tube is not installed correctly, remove it from the water unit and the
analyzer, cut off the part that has contacted the connectors, and then reinstall
the tube properly.
Connect Chemistry Analyzer with Waste Drainage Facilities
Chemistry analyzer
Maximum of 1200mm
High-conc waste sensor

High-conc waste
Water unit
1 2
3 4
Low-conc waste DI water
5 6
Inlet filter
High-conc waste tank
Drain outlet
Figure 3.11 Connect Chemistry Analyzer with Waste Drainage Facilities
1 Circuit the high-/low-concentration waste tubes independently.
2 Connect the high-concentration waste tube and sensor to the high-concentration

waste tank, and ensure the tube is about 2m long.
3 Insert the low-concentration waste tube into the sewer, and make sure that the
tube is about 2-10m long.
4 Make sure that the low-concentration waste outlet is no less than 50mm wide
and less than 1.2m high.
5 Ensure that the waste tube outlet is higher than the liquid level in the sewer in
order to prevent bubbles overflow.
6 Enclose the low-concentration waste outlet to eliminate noise and prevent
3-19
bubbles overflow.
the accessory kit.
8 When installing the tubes, prevent them from being bent, twisted, or pressed,
and keep them away from any sharp-edged objects or others that may scratch
the tubes.
9 Ensure that all electric connectors are higher than and away from fluidic parts
and prevent fluidic connectors from facing electric components.
3.5.4 Connection of Chemistry Analyzer

1 Prepare new concentrated wash solution and ISE buffer solution (in case that
the ISE module is configured), and then place them in the front cabinet of the
analyzer. Make sure the two solutions are capped properly.
ISE buffer Concentrated

solution wash solution
2 If you are using an UPS, install it and make it properly grounded.
3 Connect the analyzer, computer, printer, monitor, water unit (or water supply
module), power cord and data cable. Do not switch on the power before
finishing all connections.
4 Connect computers with the analyzer through the serial port and network port.
If the computer is connected with the analyzer through the serial port, choose
the port COM1 for the computer. Use the network cable to connect the
operating software computer with the data management software computer.
3.5.5 Installation of Hub (optional)

1 Connect the hub with the network cables, WAN port to the local area network
and LAN port to the computer.
2 Run the Internet Explorer and then enter http://192.168.1.1 in the address box.
3-20
Enter the username and password of administrator: admin.
3 Choose setup guide and perform the settings according to the guide.
4 Select dynamic address.
5 Enter the IP address of the local area network, through which you may visit and
configure the hub. You are allowed to change the IP address, and you should
ensure that it is in the same network segment as the hub.
6 Set the DHCP service and assign IP address for the computer. Make sure that
the computers ID address is in the same network segment as the hub.
3.5.6 Installation of Data Management Software

Instructions
Do not install the data management software and BS-800 application program
on the same computer.
Hardware requirements: Dual Core CPU 2.0G; 2G RAM; 250G hard disk;
17-inch screen. These are the lowest configurations of a computer to install the
data management software.
OS supported: Windows XP SP3
If Microsoft SQL Server 2005 or Microsoft SQL Server 2008 has already been
installed on the computer, please uninstall it first.
It will take 30 minutes to complete the whole installation procedure. The
computer will be restarted once during the installation and then it will continue
with the installation automatically.
The available space of the installation disk should be greater than 10G.
Resolution: 1280*1024 or above. The report input interface may not be fully
displayed with a lower resolution.
Do not install the data management software together with other LIS software
or any other types of data management software on one computer.
Connect the analyzer computer and the data management software computer.
Exit Windows firewall on data management software computer or add the
network port used by the data management software in the firewall exceptions.
Installation steps
The data management software installation pack includes three parts: .Net
Framework 3.5, database 2005, and data management software. If the first two have
existed on your computer, the system will skip them automatically and directly install
the data management software.
1 Double click the Setup.exe file in the installation file folder.
2 Install .Net Framework 3.5.
Select Next.
3-21
Accept the license agreement and then select Install.
The .Net Framework 3.5 is installed successfully.
3 Install the SQL 2008. Select Next for each step and then select Finish.
4 When the data management software installation window is displayed, select

Next.
NOTE
Install the data management software in the default directory rather than
Program Files of the system drive.
5 The data management software is installed successfully.

6 The system initialization is started and will take about 10 seconds.
7 The login page is displayed. Enter the default password 111111 of Admin.
After logging on the system, you are allowed to change the password by
selecting Menu -> Setup -> Change Password.
3-22
3.5.7 Powering On
1 Turn on the power switch of the water unit or the water supply module(optional)
and the water drainage module(optional).
2 Turn on the analyzing unit power switch and the main power switch. Turn on
the ball valve in the front cabinet of the analyzer as shown in the figure below.
The water inlet valve in the back of the analyzer is turned on automatically to
supply water for the water tank. In normal conditions, the water tank can be
filled full in 10-15 minutes.
Ball valve
3 Start the computer. The BS-800 operating software is run automatically when
the Windows is started. You are also allowed to run the operating software by
selecting the shortcut icon on the desktop or in the Start menu. See the figure
below. The system checks if the fluidic prime is performed and then skips the
initialization procedure. When the login window is displayed, enter the username
ServiceUser and password #BS8A#SEU.
3-23
4 When the main screen is shown, select Utility -> System Setup -> Factory
F2. Select Optional Modules, enable/disable ISE module, sample bar code and
reagent bar code, and then select OK.See the figure below:
3-24
5 To set the local atmospheric pressure, select Utility -> Maintenance ->
Alignment -> Hydro Unit, select the Pump Check button, enter the
atmospheric pressure as indicated in the figure below, and then select Config to
save the input. Check the altitude of the installation site of the analyzer, and
then find the corresponding atmospheric pressure in Appendix A.
3-25
Select the Config button
6 Perform the Fluidic Prime procedure.
3.5.8 Fluidic Prime

1 Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Hydro Unit. The screen is
displayed as follows.
3-26
2 Select 3 Fluidic Prime to display the following window. The check of solenoid
valve, level floater and pump has been finished by default. Select Continue.
3 Select Continue to prime the water tank. When the priming is finished, select
OK, and then select Continue. The water circulating pump P03 is turned on.
4 Observe the water pressure gauge and make sure that the water supply pressure
is within 40-45kPa. Select Continue to go to the next step.
3-27
5 Prime the system with diluted wash solution. This step will take about 5 minutes.
Check if the diluted wash solution pressure is within 0.015-0.025MPa. When the
auto dilution is finished, select OK and then select Continue. The 3 probes
automatically move to the top of their wash reservoirs.
6 Select Continue to go to step 7, cleaning and priming the probe interior. Check
if the cleaning liquid is sprayed out straightly from the probes. Loosen the
screws on the sample syringe fixing block and remove the syringe. Pull and push
the syringe plunger until there is no air bubbles in the syringe. Install the syringe
back and make the V-shape slot level to scale 7.5 of the syringe.
7 Loosen the screws on the R1 syringe fixing block and remove the syringe. Pull
and push the syringe plunger until there is no air bubbles in the syringe. Install
the syringe back and make the V-shape slot level to scale 15 of the syringe.
Repeat this step for R2 syringe.
8 In step 8, check if water comes out of the wash wells of the 3 probes and 4
mixers without air bubbles.
9 In step 9, please remember to remove the cuvette wash station and put it in an
opening container. In step 10, check if diluted wash solution is dispensed
straightly from phase 1 and 2 wash probes.
10 In step 11, check if deionized water is dispensed straightly from phase 3-6 wash
3-28
probes without air bubbles.
11 Lift up the cuvette wash station and then check if the primary vacuum pressure
is normal. The pressure check will take about 30 seconds. In step 14, sense the
wash probes and check if there is suction force at the probe end.
12 Reinstall the cuvette wash station.
13 The cuvettes are cleaned for 10 times in step 14. Check that there is no liquid
overflowing the cuvettes and the liquid level in cuvettes is 5-10mm from the
cuvette opening.
14 The system is homed for 3 times, and there should be no failure alarms. The
containers and pressure gauges should be in correct status as indicated in the
following figure.
15 The fluidic prime is finished.
3-29
Figure 3.12 Containers status and pressure gauges
3.5.9 Initial Maintenance Logs

Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Maintenance to display the maintenance
window, on which all scheduled maintenance procedures should be confirmed for
the first time. The maintenance frequencies include Daily, Weekly, Two-Week,
Monthly, 3-Month, 6-Month, and Other. Select the Select All button on each
scheduled maintenance tab page, and then select OK. The current date and time
appears in the Date Performed column of each maintenance procedure.
3.5.10 Startup Initialization

When the fluidic prime is finished, exit the operating software and reboot the
computer. The operating software is automatically run, and the system starts
initializing. When the login window is displayed, enter the user name ServiceUser
and password #BS8A#SEU.
3-30
When the main screen is shown, select Rgts/Cal -> Reagent/Calibration, and
then load concentrated wash solution and ISE buffer solution through the Load
option.
3-31
3.5.11 Parameter Import and Chemistry Configuration
Start the software and click Utility -> Chemistries -> Config, and click Options
to display the Option window.
Click Import to display the Import window. Click Load Default, then all the
Mindray reagents will be displayed in the left column. Click Add All, all the
chemistries will be added to the right column. Click Exit to close this window.
3-32
All the Mindray chemistries will be displayed in Available Chemistries column.
Users can either select all the chemistries or select the specific chemistries as required
Click OK to complete the chemistry configuration.
3-33
3.5.12 Activation and Installation of ISE Electrodes (optional)
Activation of Na, K and Cl Electrodes
Prior to use, new Na, K and Cl electrodes need to be activated on the day before the
electrodes are installed. REF electrode needs not to be activated before use.
NOTE
Ref electrode cannot be activated.
Exercise caution and avoid drastic vibration when installing or removing electrodes,
especially Cl electrode.
Tools and materials: 2mL serum, 30mL ISE buffer solution, 2mL or 3mL disposable
pipette
Operating Procedure:
1 Take out ISE electrodes from the package and wipe off the liquid on the
electrode surface.
2 Remove the sponge from the electrode case and put the electrodes in it for
activating.
NOTE
Do not remove the cap on the electrode connector to prevent liquid ingression.
Two electrodes can be put simultaneously in an electrode case for processing.
3 Add 0.5mL serum into the flow cell to fill the entire measuring channel.
3-34
4 Add about 25mL buffer solution to the electrode case until the electrodes get
soaked completely. Keep the electrodes soaked overnight.
5 Before installing the electrodes, clean them with deionized water and dry them
for later use. If the measuring data are unstable after the electrodes are
preprocessed for quite a long time, perform the Clean Electrodes procedure.
See the figure below:
Figure 3.13 Procedure of activating electrodes
NOTE
If there is not enough time to activate the Na, K and Cl electrodes, install them
directly on the ISE module. After the installation, run 20 ISE tests with serum sample
and reject the test results so that the electrodes can quickly enter normal working
status. Recalibrate the electrodes to confirm their performances. You are
recommended to follow the standard activation procedure and leave the ISE module
enough time for getting steady.
3-35
ISE Module Configuration
Select Optional Modules on the factory settings window, and then mark the
checkbox in front of Enable/Disable ISE Module. As shown in the figure below.
Electrode Installation
1 Prepare the electrodes. The Na and K electrodes should be activated in advance.
Take out the Cl and Ref electrodes from the high-concentration salt solution,
and then clean and dry them.
2 Remove the caps from the electrode connectors. If there is liquid left on the
electrode connectors, wipe it off to prevent corroding the connectors.
3 Open the cover of the ISE module on the analyzers front panel.
4 Loosen the retaining screw and take out the spacer.
5 Install the electrodes from left to right in the following order: Ref, Na, K, and
Check that an O-shape washer exists between every two electrodes, between the
reference electrode and the module, and between the Cl electrode and the
module. Lost of washers may cause liquid leaks and unreliable test results, and
even damage the ISE module.
6 Use the mounting template to fix the electrodes and tighten the thumbscrew.
7 Connect the electrode connectors to corresponding terminals. Connect the

electrodes to terminals of corresponding color:
Yellow: Na electrode
Red: K electrode
Blue: Cl electrode
Black: Ref electrode
8 Perform the Buffer Prime maintenance procedure and set the prime cycle to
20.Observe the sample injection cup and check if buffer solution is correctly
3-36
injected and discharged, and if the electrode connectors are free of leaks or
overflow.
Checks after Installing Electrodes

1 Assign positions for ISE calibrators.
Select Cal Options F7 on the Reagent/Calibration screen, and then assign

positions for ISE calibrators.
2 Calibrate the ISE serum. The calibration may be failed due to the new electrodes.
Try again for several times.
3 Calibrate the ISE urine. The calibration may be failed due to the new electrodes.
Try again for several times.
4 Perform the precision test. Prepare 1mL serum sample, request Na, K and Cl
for serum sample measurement for 20 replicates. The precision will be calculated
when the measurement is complete. Check if the precision meets the following
requirements: Na: 1.0%; K: 1.5%, Cl: 1.5%.
3.5.13 Installation and Upgrading of Operating Software

Check if the operating software is in the latest version, if not, please upgrade it. The
BS-800 operating software can be installed in two ways: complete installation and
upgrading. Complete installation is chosen when the computer has no BS-800
operating software installed or the BS-800 operating software has been uninstalled
from it; upgrading is chosen when the computer has the BS-800 operating software
installed and the software version needs to be updated.
The installation and upgrading guide is contained in the installation package of
operating software.
3-37
1 Open the installation package of operating software.
2 Open the SetupGuide folder and select a upgrade guide corresponding to the
instrument model.
3 Perform the upgrading procedure as instructed by the upgrade guide.
3-38
4 Overview of Modules and Units
4-1
4.1 Shells Assembly
4.1.1 Functions
Shells assembly indicates the apparent structures of the whole analyzer designed for
protecting the internal assemblies. The shell is used as an interface of each module
which is also a representation of the industrial design.
4.1.2 Locations and FRU Details

Shells assembly consists of the front shielding cover, the rear shielding cover,
supporter of the shielding cover, various panels, carousel covers, the front panel, side
plates, the front door and the rear panel.
1
5
4-2
8
Table 4.1 FRU Details

No. FRU/Material Code Material Name Remarks
1 801-BA80-00116-00 Damping washer
2 801-BA80-00117-00 SWITCH, Button switch16mm,
with yellow light, AC/DC24V
3 801-BA80-00118-00 Reagent carousel cover
assembly
4-3
4 801-BA80-00119-00 Rubber cover
5 801-BX50-00138-00 Air spring,
YQ8/18-90-272(B-B)-180N
6 801-BA80-00120-00 Buffer cushion
7 801-BA80-00218-00 Air spring,
YQ6/15-84-235(B-B)-80N (10N)
8 801-BX50-00050-00 Lock catch, MC-37, white
4.1.3 Removing and Reinstalling Front & Back Shielding Covers

Maintenance time
The front and the back shielding cover should be removed if the shielding cover is
damaged or the reagent chamber has to be replaced.
Tools
Cross screwdriver, Hex wrench, M8 solid wrench
Steps:
1 Cut off the power of the analyzer to ensure all the assemblies are not in the
work status.
2 Open the shielding cover and push outward the circlip on the air spring head
with a flathead screwdriver to the position that it cannot be dropped.
3 Hold the body of the shielding cover and remove the air spring.
4 Remove M4X10 screws on the hinge of the shielding cover to remove the cover.
5 To reinstall the shielding cover, please follow the steps mentioned above in a
reverse order.
Alignment and confirmation

You need to adjust the hinge of the shielding cover to ensure that the front and the
back covers have been reinstalled in a proper position.
4.1.4 Removing and Reinstalling Side Plates

Maintenance time
The side plates should be removed if the host PCB or the assemblies at left and right
sides of the analyzer need to be maintained.
Tools
Cross screwdriver
Steps:
1 Unscrew the four M4X8 combination screws on the side plates.
2 Hold the upper rim of the plate and pull it back and lift it slightly to remove the
4-4
side plates.
3 To reinstall the side plates, please follow the steps mentioned above in a reverse
order.

None
4.1.5 Removing and Reinstalling Front Panel

Maintenance time
The front panel should be removed if the assemblies in the analyzer need to be
maintained.
Tools
Cross screwdriver
Steps:
1 Unscrew rubber plugs of the three screws on the panel, and loosen the three
M4X12 combination screws to the position that they cannot be dropped.
2 Open the front door and unscrew the four M4X8 combination screws on the
front panel to remove it by pulling it upward and outward.
3 To reinstall the side plates, please follow the steps mentioned above in a reverse
order.

You can adjust the gaps between the panels through the three screw holes (long) on
the front panel.
4.1.6 Removing and Reinstalling Reagent Carousel Cover

Maintenance time
The reagent carousel cover should be removed if the reagent carousel assembly
needs to be repaired or some of the parts are damaged.
Tools
Cross screwdriver
Steps:
1 Remove all the panels on the reagent carousel cover and unscrew the four
screws around the cover.
2 Remove the whole reagent carousel cover with hinges of the front and the rear
cover.
4-5
Since the screw holes are long, please note their positions when reinstalling the
reagent carousel cover. Try to install the screws to the original position to ensure that
the sample injection port is placed correctly.
4.1.7 Replacement of Air Spring

Maintenance time
The air spring should be replaced if it loses elasticity.
Tools
Flathead screwdriver
Steps:
1 Open the shielding cover and push outward the circlips on both heads of the air
spring with a flathead screwdriver to the position that it cannot be dropped.
2 Hold the air spring and pull it out.
3 Install a new air spring.

None
4.1.8 Replacement of Lock Catch

Maintenance time
The lock catch should be replaced if it is damaged.
Tools
Cross screwdriver
Steps:
1 Unscrew the two M4X8 screws to remove the lock catch assembly.
2 Unscrew the M3X8 retaining screws on the lock catch to remove it.
3 Install a new lock catch.
4 Place the new lock catch to the original position.

None
4-6
4.2 Reaction Carousel Assembly
4.2.1 Functions
Reaction carousel assembly is situated at the middle and rear of the analyzer,
including the body of the reaction carousel, reaction carousel drive assembly, reaction
carousel chamber and the reaction carousel sensor. It is used to complete various
actions, such as carrying and rotating the reaction cuvette to the specified position,
adding sample/reagent to the cuvette, mixing and washing, together with the sample
probe, reagent probe, the mixer and the 8-phase wash probes. It, as well as, provides
a constant temperature for the reaction cuvette for analysis.
Reaction
Moving parts for Moving parts for Mix assembly Auto wash
carousel
probe R1 probe R2 (sample) assembly
assembly
Reagent carousel
assembly Mix assembly
(reagent)
Moving parts
for sample
probe
Sample carousel
assembly
Syringe assembly
4-7
4.2.2 Locations and FRU details
11
3 2 1
No. FRU/Material Material Name Remarks

Code
1 801-BA80-00051-00 Cables of reaction carousel
encoder sensor
2 801-BA10-00097-00 Cables of carousel home
sensor
3 801-BA80-00053-00 High-speed motor assembly
4 801-BA80-00261-00 Cables of slip ring
5 801-BA80-00054-00 Metal plate for cuvette
6 801-BA80-00056-00 Heater wire (for reaction
carousel)
7 801-BA80-00057-00 Temperature sensor wire 1
(for reaction carousel) +
parameter
parameter
parameter
10 801-BA80-00060-00 Temperature protection
switch wire (for reaction
carousel)
11 801-BA80-00164-00 Glass cuvette
4-8
Note:
1. For locations of FRU 4~10, please refer to the related descriptions of
replacement.
2. For the replacing method of glass cuvette (FRU 11), please refer to the
descriptions of optical assembly in this manual.
4.2.3 Replacement of Reaction Carousel Body Cables

Maintenance time
If the temperature of the reaction carousel is abnormal, please replace the
temperature sensor wire 1~3, heater wire and temperature protection switch wire for
the reaction carousel.
Tools
Name Code Qty
Cross screwdriver / 1
Hex wrench / 1
Medical rubber / 1
gloves
Exploded view for installation

Skylight cover
M4X8 cross pan head

combination screw
M5X12 hexagon socket cap

head screws
Reaction carousel body
Please note that these eight

4X10 hexagon socket head
screws with glue on the screw
head should not be removed
4-9
Lower clamping
device

head screw
Heater wire for reaction carousel

801-BA80-00056-00
M2.5X12 cross pan

head screw
Upper clamping
device
Temperature sensor wire 2 for reaction

carousel + Parameter 2 Wire
801-BA80-00058-00 clamping
ring
Reaction
Temperature protection switch wire for cuvettes
reaction carousel
801-BA80-00060-00
M3X8 cross countersunk

head screw
Temperature sensor wire 3 for reaction Temperature sensor wire 1 for reaction
carousel + Parameter 3 carousel + Parameter 1
801-BA80-00059-00 801-BA80-00057-00
Steps of replacement
1 Switch off the power of the analyzer.
2 Open the back shielding cover and unscrew the two M5-20 spring screws to
remove the shield of the wash station.
3 Open the front shielding cover and remove the mixers and auto wash station on
the mix assembly and store them properly to protect the mixer and the wash
probe.
4 Rotate the reagent probe to the reagent aspiration position and rotate the sample
probe to the sample aspiration position to remove the reaction carousel cover
and all the panels around the reaction carousel assembly.
5 Unscrew the three M4X8 cross pan head combination screws on the reaction
carousels skylight cover to remove it.
4-10
6 Unscrew the four M5X12 hexagon socket cap head screws with washer on the
body of the reaction carousel to remove it. Please take the carousel carefully in
order not to damage the reaction cuvettes.
7 Remove all the reaction cuvettes and store them properly.
8 Place the carousel body with the bottom surface upward and unscrew the eight
M3X8 cross countersunk head screws on the wire clamping ring to remove it.
9 Remove the temperature sensor wire 1, 2 and 3 for the reaction carousel.
10 Daub some heat-conducting glue on the connectors of the new temperature

sensor wire 1, 2 and 3 and the installation holes and place the three sensors into
the holes on the body of the reaction carousel. Please ensure the positions of
the three sensors are correct, the joints should not be higher than the slot
surface of the reaction carousel. Write down the serial numbers and the
corresponding parameters of the three sensors which will be used to query the
electric resistance value during the alignment.
11 Unscrew the M3X6 cross pan head screw with washer of the ground terminal
of temperature protection switch on the reaction carousel to remove the switch
wire.
12 Daub some heat-conducting glue on the new switch wire and put it into the slot
of the carousel body, and tighten the ground terminal with one M3X6 cross pan
head screw with washer (with little threaded glue) onto the carousel body.
Traverse the connector of the temperature protection switch wire and the
ground terminal through slot of the heat-insulating ring and put it at the front
of the carousel.
13 Unscrew the 11 M3X8 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer on
the lower clamping device to remove it.
14 Remove the heater wire for reaction carousel.
15 Daub some heat-conducting glue on the root of the heater wire and place it on
the upper clamping device, and align the connector with the slot. Traverse the
cable connector of the heater through slot of the heat-insulating ring and put it
at the front of the carousel.
16 Put the lower clamping device on the heater and tighten the lower clamping
device onto the upper one with 11 M3X8 hexagon socket cap head screws with
4-11
spring washer. Push the ledge of the heater along the center of a circle as much
as possible when tighten the screws. Tighten the screws by the order of across
corners to bind the clamping device and the heater seamlessly, so that the heat
can be transmitted evenly.
17 Press cables of the heater, the temperature protection switch and the three
sensors into the slot of the carousel body, and then install the wire clamping ring
onto the carousel body with eight M3X8 countersunk head screws.
18 Install the body of the reaction carousel and the skylight cover by steps
mentioned above in a reverse order.

Re-configure the related parameters of the sensors after replacing the cables of the
sensor, the heater and the temperature protection switch and test the performance of
heat-insulating.
NOTE
Please be careful when removing the body of reaction carousel to protect the
cuvettes and the top of the carousels rotary shaft.
It is not suggested to remove the upper clamping device. If it is difficult to clean the
stains in the cuvette slot, you should remove the parts and clean the interior of the
cuvette slot.
Do not pull the cables during the installation, especially pay much attention to
protect cables of the three sensors.
Further decomposition may invalidate the functions of the reaction carousel.
The eight M4X10 hexagon socket cap head screws shown in the figure cannot be
removed; otherwise, the functions of the reaction carousel will become invalid.
4.2.4 Replacement of Metal Plate for Cuvette

Maintenance time
If the metal plate has no elasticity and cannot retain a cuvette, then it should be
replaced.
Tools
Name Code Qty
Sharp nose pliers / 1
Blade / 1
Medical rubber / 1
gloves
4-12
2 Remove the reaction carousel body according to the descriptions in 4.2.3 .
3 Remove the cuvette which metal plate needs to be replaced and eight cuvettes
on its right and left sides (four for each side), and store them properly.
4 Extract the metal plate about 3~5mm with a blade and grip it out with a sharp
nose pliers.
5 Press a new metal plate into the cuvette slot in a correct direction and fix it.
6 Install the parts of reaction carousel body according to the descriptions in

4.2.3 .

None.
NOTE
The metal plate should be pressed to the bottom.
Please do not do this with a sudden force to avoid bending of the metal plate.
Edges of the metal plate may have some small burrs, please be careful when
replacing it.
4.2.5 Replacement of Carousel Home Sensor and Encoder

Sensor Cables
Maintenance time
If reaction carousel sensor becomes invalid, please replace cables of the carousel
home sensor and the encoder sensor.
4-13
Tools
Name Code Qty
Hex wrench / 1

Cables of encoder sensor Sensor bracket
801-BA80-00051-00
M3X8 hexagon
socket cap head
screw
M3X6 cross pan

head screw
Cables of carousel home sensor

801-BA10-00097-00
2 Unscrew the ten M4X8 cross pan head combination screws on the right rear
panel to remove it.
3 Unscrew the three M3X8 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat
washers on the reaction carousel sensor assembly to remove it. Do not drop the
screws into the analyzer.
4 Unscrew the two M3X6 cross pan head screws retaining cables of the carousel
home sensor and the encoder sensor to remove them.
5 Fix cables of the new carousel home sensor and the encoder sensor on the
sensors bracket using two M3X6 cross pan head screws.
6 Fix the reaction carousel sensor assembly on the large bottom plate using three
M3X8 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers.
7 After the alignment and the validation, fix the right rear panel on the joint parts
of bracket using ten M4X8 cross pan head combination screws.
4-14
After replacing the carousel home sensor and the encoder sensor, you should align
and validate the following positions: position of photoelectric collection (according
to the descriptions in 7.2.1); positions of the sample probe, reagent probe, mixers
and wash probe in the reaction carousel (according to the contents described from
7.2.2 to 7.2.6); positions of sample probe, reagent probe and mixers in the wash
reservoir; positions of sample probes in the sample carousel; positions of reagent
probes in the reagent carousel; and the positions of sample/reagent bar code reader.
NOTE
Please install the sensor according to the identifications of the cable.
Do not tighten the screws with a sudden force, in order to protect the sensor.
4.2.6 Replacement of High-speed Motor

Maintenance time
The high-speed motor should be replaced if it is damaged.
Tools
Name Code Qty
Hex wrench / 1
Damping
board
Large
bottom
plate
High-speed motor assembly

801-BA80-00053-00
M4X10 hexagon
socket cap head
screw
WARNING
Do not drop a screw into the analyzer.
Do not remove the two screws on the damping washer; otherwise, the transmission
function will become invalid.
4-15
panel to remove it.
3 Disconnect the motor and unscrew the two M4X10 hexagon socket head screws
with spring washer on the high-speed motor to remove it. Do not drop a screw
into the analyzer.
4 Fix a new motor on the damping board using two M4X10 hexagon socket head
screws with spring washer. Keep the interface direction the same as that in the
figure. Please check if the gears are meshed properly before tightening the
screws. Coat the teeth of the two meshing gears with grease lubricant
(A90-000070---), rotate the gears in opposite directions to distribute the
lubricant evenly, and then wipe off the excessive lubricant from the top of the
gears.
5 Connect cables of the motor.
6 Fix the right rear panel on the joint parts of bracket using ten M4X8 cross pan
head combination screws.

None.
4.2.7 Replacement of Slip Ring Cables

Maintenance time
The cables of the slip ring should be replaced if they are damaged.
Tools
Name Code Qty
Hex wrench / 1
4-16
M3X12
Driver of slip ring hexagon socket
cap head screw
Cables of slip ring
801-BA80-00261-00/
801-BA80-00260-00
(Before EDM022)
M4X10
hexagon socket
cap head screw
Rotating
shaft
Figure 4.1 Schematic diagram of replacing cables of slip ring
NOTE
In the case of instruments delivered before EDM022, replace the temperature
collection board with "B-801-BA80-00260-00 BA80 reaction carousel temperature
collection board (with slip ring and shielding cover)", which contains a slip ring, a
temperature collection board and a shielding cover.
For the instruments delivered after EDM022, replace the "801-BA80-00055-01 BA80
reaction carousel temperature collection board PCBA (EDM022 FRU)" only.
WARNING
The driver of the slip ring should not be installed at the bottom of the cables, it
should be kept about 2mm distance from the cables; otherwise, the slip ring may be
damaged.
Do not tighten screws forcefully to avoid distortion; otherwise, cables of the slip ring
will be damaged.
2 Open the back shielding cover and unscrew the two M5-20 spring screws to
remove the shield of the wash station.
3 Open the front shielding cover and remove the mixers and auto wash station on
the mix assembly and store them properly to protect the mixer and the wash
probe.
4 Rotate the reagent probe to the reagent aspiration position and rotate the sample
4-17
probe to the sample aspiration position to remove the reaction carousel cover
and all the panels around the reaction carousel assembly.
5 Unscrew the three M4X8 cross pan head combination screws on the reaction
carousels skylight cover to remove it.
6 Unscrew the four M5X12 hexagon socket cap head screws with washer on the
body of the reaction carousel to remove it. Please take the carousel carefully in
order not to damage the reaction cuvettes.
7 Unscrew the three M4X10 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer
and disconnect the four terminals under the bottom plate of the analyzer to
remove the cables of the slip ring.
8 Unscrew the one M3X12 hexagon socket cap head screw on the driver of the
slip ring to remove it.
9 Install the driver of the slip ring onto the new cables of slip ring using one
M3X12 hexagon socket cap head screw. Please lift the driver about 2mm from
the cables and then tighten the screw.
10 Fix the cables of the slip ring to the rotating shaft using the three M4X10
hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer, and connect the four
terminals under the bottom plate of the analyzer.
11 Install the body of the reaction carousel, the skylight cover, reaction carousel
cover assembly, shielding cover of auto wash station and the right rear panel by
steps mentioned above in a reverse order.
4.2.8 Replacement of Reaction Cuvette

To replace the reaction cuvettes, please refer to the related descriptions in 4.11 .
4-18
4.3 Reagent Carousel Assembly
4.3.1 Module Functions
Reagent carousel assembly is situated at the left front of the analyzer, including the
outer/inner ring of carousels, reagent chamber, drive assembly and the reagent bar
code reader. It is used to complete various actions, such as carrying and rotating the
reagent bottle to the specified position, add samples together with sample addition
assembly. It provides a refrigerating environment, and the reagents stored in such
environment can be kept stable with little volatilization. For details, please refer to
the following contents.
Place reagent: Install a certain number of the reagent bottles in authorized
specifications onto the reagent carousel and add reagent into the reagent bottles, then
the sample addition station will aspirate the reagent and dispense it into the reaction
cuvette.
Refrigerating reagent: Provide 24-hour refrigeration and constant temperature
environment (2-8C) to keep the reagent stable with little volatilization.
Sequential rotation: With the drive assembly, the reagent carousel sends the specific
reagent bottle to the collection position for aspiration in a certain order. The outer
and the inner carousels can be rotated independently.
Input reagent data automatically: Bar code reader (optional).

1 801-BA80-00070-00 Outer ring of
reagent carousel
body
4-19
2 801-BA80-00072-00 Inner ring of
reagent carousel
body
3 801-BA80-00071-00/043-00445-01(After Base of reagent
EDM029) bottle
4 801-BA80-00073-00 Reagent chamber
assembly
5 801-BX50-00076-00 Cables of reagent Note 1
refrigeration
temperature
sensor
6 801-BX50-00080-00 Cables of carousel Note 2
cover sensor
7 801-BA80-00053-00 High-speed motor
assembly
Note:
1. For the position of cables of reagent refrigeration temperature sensor (5), please
refer to the related descriptions in 4.3.7 .
2. For the position of the carousel cover sensor (6), please refer to the related
description in 4.3.8 .
4.3.3 Replacement of Inner Ring of Reagent Carousel Body

Maintenance time
The inner ring of the reagent carousel body should be replaced if it is damaged or
cannot meet the operation requirements.
Tools
Name Code Qty
Cross / 1
screwdriver
Hex wrench / 1
4-20
2 Remove panels around the reagent carousel assembly, such as cover of reagent
carousel, left panel, and top panel.
3 Use a cross screwdriver to unscrew the two M04-051152--- screws with washer
M04-021043--- on the inner ring of the reagent carousel body.
4 Lift the handlebars to remove the inner ring of the reagent carousel body
assembly.
5 Align the locating hole on the inner reagent carousel body with the stop bolt,
and install it onto the cover of rotating shaft of reagent carousel, and then
tighten it using two M04-051152--- screws with washer M04-021043---.
6 Reinstall panels around the reagent carousel assembly, such as cover of reagent

None.
4-21
4.3.4 Replacement of Outer Ring of Reagent Carousel Body
Maintenance time
The outer ring of the reagent carousel should be replaced if it damaged or lots of
reagent bottle bases are damaged.
Tools
Name Code Qty
Cross / 1
screwdriver
Hex wrench / 1
4-22
3 Use a cross screwdriver to unscrew the two M04-051152--- screws with washer
M04-021043--- on the inner ring of the reagent carousel body.
4 Unscrew the four M4x10 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer on
the cover of rotating shaft of reagent carousel to remove it.
5 Unscrew the four M4x20 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer on
the outer ring of reagent carousel body to remove it.
6 Align the locating hole on the outer ring of the reagent carousel body with the
stop bolt, and install it onto the cover of rotating shaft, and then tighten it using
four M4x20 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer.
7 Fix the cover on the rotating shaft of reagent carousel using four M4x10
hexagon socket head screws with spring washer.
8 Align the locating hole on the inner reagent carousel body with the stop bolt,
and install it onto the cover of rotating shaft of reagent carousel, and then
tighten it using two M04-051152--- screws with washer M04-021043---.
9 Reinstall panels around the reagent carousel assembly, such as cover of reagent
NOTE
Use stainless screws.
Screws should be tightened.

None.
4.3.5 Replacement of Reagent bottle Base

Maintenance time
The base of reagent bottle should be replaced if it is damaged.
Tools
Name Code Qty
Cross / 1
screwdriver
4-23
1 Use a cross screwdriver to loosen the two M3X6 cross pan head screws
(M04-051038-00) in the reagent bottle base, and then remove them together
with the reagent chamber.
2 Wash the reagent positions in which new reagent bottle bases will be installed.
3 Place the two M3X6 cross pan head screws (M04-051038-00) into the screw
holes on the new reagent bottle bases, install the new reagent bottle bases on the
reagent carousel, and then tighten the screws.
NOTE
The new version reagent bottle bases (after EDM029) should be fixed with
screws. Replace the reagent bottle base with 043-00445-01 with two M3X6
screwes (M04-051038-00). Exercise caution not to let the screws drop into the
reagent chamber. To avoid this, you may block the two guiding holes first.
The old version (lock-style) reagent bottle bases should be replaced with
801-BA80-00071-00.
The new version screws must be stainless screws. Screw them tight to avoid
loose.

None.
4.3.6 Replacement of Reagent Chamber Assembly

Maintenance time
The reagent chamber should be replaced if it leaks or gets serious rustiness.
Tools
Name Code Qty
Cross / 1
screwdriver
4-24
Name Code Qty
Flathead / 1
screwdriver
Hex wrench / 1

Figure 4.2 Exploded view of reagent chamber assembly
Inner ring of reagent
carousel body assembly
Cover of rotating M4X10 hexagon socket cap
shaft of reagent
head screw
carousel
Outer ring of reagent head screw
carousel body assembly
Plug
Reagent chamber assembly
801-BA80-00073-00
O-shape washer
Reagent carousel drive

assembly
Small bottom plate

welding part

head screw
carousel, left panel, and top panel, and left/right covers of sample carousels and
the small sample carousel cover, to lift the inner sample carousel body.
3 Remove the two plugs of reagent chamber and the one plugs of sample
chamber.
4 Discharge the coolant in reagent chamber completely.
5 Remove the outer/inner rings of reagent carousel body.
4-25
6 Disconnect cables of reagent refrigeration temperature sensor and carousel
cover sensor.
7 Loosen the clamp on the tubes connected to reagent chamber, pull out liquid
feeding/discharging tubes and the two waste tubes.
8 Unscrew the three M5x16 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat
washers and lift the reagent chamber to remove it.
9 Fix the new reagent chamber on the small bottom plate welding part using three
M5x16 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers. Do not
tighten the screws.
10 Position the outer ring of reagent carousel body and adjust the position of the
reagent chamber to ensure the circumferential spaces between the two
assemblies are distributed uniformly and the outer ring can rotate freely. Then
tighten the screws.
11 Install outer ring of reagent carousel body, cover of rotating shaft of reagent
carousel and the inner ring of reagent carousel body.
12 Connect liquid feeding/discharging tubes, and the two waste tubes. Fasten the
clamps and wrap the joints with heat preservation sponge.
13 Connect cables of reagent refrigeration temperature sensor and carousel cover

sensor.
14 Prime with coolant and insert plugs of the reagent and the sample chambers.
15 Install panels around the reagent carousel assembly, such as inner sample
carousel body, over of reagent carousel, left panel, and top panel, and left/right
covers of sample carousels and the small sample carousel cover.

After replacing the reagent chamber, you need to align and validate positions of
reagent probe and bar code reader according to the descriptions in 7.2.4.
4.3.7 Replacement of Reagent Refrigeration Temperature

Sensor Cables
Maintenance time
If the refrigeration does not work, then replace the cables of temperature sensor.
4-26
Tools
Name Code Qty
Cross / 1
screwdriver
Blade / 1

Figure 4.3 Exploded view of cables of refrigeration temperature sensor
Outer sponge
Slash a breach on
the sponge with a
blade
Cables of temperature sensor

801-BX50-00076-00
2 Remove panels around the reagent carousel assembly, such as left panel and top
panel.
panel to remove it.
4 Slash a breach on the sponge with a blade and expose the cables of the sensor.
5 Clamp the cable with the sharp nose pliers and unscrew it out from M5
mounting screw.
6 Daub heat-conducting glue on the surface of reagent refrigeration temperature

sensor and the threaded position, screw the sensor into the threaded hole with
your hands and tighten it using the sharp nose pliers.
7 Coat some glue on the split on sponge for adhering and wrap it with adhesive
tapes to avoid any leaks.
8 Reinstall the parts, such as right rear panel, left panel and top panel.
4-27
NOTE
Please tighten the sensor carefully to avoid any damages.
Do not pull the cables forcefully.

None.
4.3.8 Replacement of Carousel Cover Sensor Cables

Maintenance time
If the carousel cover sensor does not work, then replace the cables of it.
Tools
Name Code Qty
Cross / 1
screwdriver
Blade / 1

Figure 4.4 Exploded view of carousel cover sensor
Sponge on carousel
cover
Locking ring of
chamber
Cables of carousel cover sensor

801-BX50-00080-00
2 Remove panels, such as left lower panel.
3 Reveal cables of the carousel cover sensor.
4 Disconnect the sensor and remove it.
5 Chuck the new sensor into the reagent chamber along the slot of the mounting
ring, and seal it with sponge.
6 Connect cables of the sensor.
7 Reinstall parts, such as left lower panel.
4-28
NOTE
Do not tear the sponge.
Do not pull the cables forcefully during the installation.

None.
4.3.9 Replacement of High-speed Motor

Maintenance time
The high-speed motor should be replaced if it is damaged.
Tools
Name Code Qty
Cross / 1
screwdriver
Hex wrench / 1

Figure 4.5 Exploded view of high-speed motor
Damping board of
motor
High-speed motor assembly

801-BA80-00053-00

head screw
2 Remove panels, such as left side panel and left front panel.
3 Unscrew the two M4x10 hexagon socket cap head screws on the high-speed
motor to remove it.
4-29
4 Fix the new motor on the damping board using two M410 hexagon socket cap
head screws with spring washer, and ensure the gears are meshed properly.
Tighten the screws. Coat the teeth of the two meshing gears with grease
lubricant (A90-000070---), rotate the gears in opposite directions to distribute
the lubricant evenly, and then wipe off the excessive lubricant from the top of
the gears.
NOTE
Please note the direction of the connector.
Do not drop a screw into the analyzer during the replacing procedures.
Do not remove the two screws on the damping washer; otherwise, the
transmission function will become invalid.
Screws should be tightened.

None.
4-30
4.4 Sample Carousel Assembly
Sample carousel assembly is situated at the right front of the analyzer, including the
outer and inner sample carousel body, sample refrigeration assembly, drive assembly,
sample chamber, outer/inner sample carousel sensor and the sample bar code reader.
It is used to complete various actions, such as carrying and rotating the sample
cuvette to the specified position, completing sample aspirations together with sample
probe. For details, please refer to the following contents.
Carry samples: Sample containers (cuvettes or micro tubes) with samples are located
on the sample carousel, and the sample collection station will aspirate samples and
dispense them to the reaction cuvettes.
Sequential rotation: With the drive assembly, the sample carousel sends the specific
sample cuvette to the collection position for aspiration in a certain order. The outer
and the inner carousels can be rotated independently.
Auto sample identification: Bar code reader.
Refrigeration of the fourth ring of sample carousel: Provide 24-hour refrigeration
and constant temperature environment.

1 3 6
4-31
8 7
1 801-BA80-00061-00 Outer sample carousel
body
2 801-BA80-00062-00 Cuvette holder base 2
3 801-BA80-00063-00 Inner sample carousel
body
4 801-BA80-00064-00 16 cuvette holder
5 801-BA80-00065-00 13 cuvette holder
adapter
6 801-BA80-00066-00 Sample motor
assembly
7 801-BA10-00096-00 Cables of encoder
sensor
8 801-BA10-00097-00 Cables of carousel
home sensor
Note:
1. For the position of cuvette holder base (2), please refer to the descriptions in
4.4.3 .
2. For the positions of 16 cuvette holder (4) and 13 cuvette holder adapter (5), please
refer to the descriptions in 4.4.4 .
4-32
4.4.3 Replacement of Outer Sample Carousel Body and Cuvette
Holder Base 2
Maintenance time
If the outer sample carousel body is damaged or rusted, or the cuvette holder base 2
is damaged, please replace them.
Tools
Name Code Qty

Handlebars on outer M3X8 stainless cross
sample carousel countersunk head screw
Cuvette holder base 2

Outer sample carousel body 801-BA80-00062-00
801-BA80-00061-00
Lower outer sample

carousel
Supporting plate for

Stop bolt
outer carousel
2 Remove left/right covers of sample carousels and the small sample carousel
cover.
3 Lift the handlebars to remove the outer sample carousel body assembly.
4 Unscrew the M3X8 stainless cross countersunk head screw on the cuvette
holder base 2 to remove it.
5 Place the new cuvette holder base 2 to the proper place and fix it on the lower
of outer sample carousel using one M3X8 stainless cross countersunk head
screw.
4-33
6 Align the two locating holes on the outer sample carousel body with the stop
bolt and place it on the supporting plate.
7 Reinstall left/right covers of sample carousels and the small sample carousel
cover.
Note: If the whole outer sample carousel body has been replaced, perform step
1 to step 4.
None.
4.4.4 Replacement of Inner Sample Carousel Body, 16 Cuvette

Holder and 13 Cuvette Holder Adapter
Maintenance time
If the inner sample carousel body or corresponding parts are damaged or rusted, or
the 16 cuvette holder and 13 cuvette holder adapter are damaged, please replace
them.
Tools
Name Code Qty

Inner sample carousel body
M3X8 stainless cross
assembly
countersunk head screw
801-BA80-00063-00
Upper inner sample

carousel 16 cuvette holder
801-AB80-00064-00
Lower inner sample

carousel
13 cuvette holder adapter
801-AB80-00064-00
Stop bolt
Adapter board on
inner ring
2 Remove left/right covers of sample carousels and the small sample carousel
4-34
cover.
3 Lift the handlebars to remove the inner sample carousel body assembly.
4 Loosen 13 cuvette holder adapter and push it upward to remove it.
5 Install a new 13 cuvette holder adapter onto the inner sample carousel properly
until you hear a click.
6 Unscrew the M3X8 stainless cross countersunk head screw on 16 cuvette holder
to remove it.
7 Place the new 16 cuvette holder to the proper place and fix it on the lower of
inner sample carousel using one M3X8 stainless cross countersunk head screw.
8 Align the two locating holes on the inner sample carousel body with the stop
bolt and place it on the supporting plate.
cover.
Note:
If the whole inner sample carousel body has been replaced, perform step 1
to step 6.
If only 13 cuvette holder adapter has been replaced, perform step 1, 2, 3,
and 6.
If only 16 cuvette holder has been replaced, perform step 1, 4, 5, and 6.
None.
4.4.5 Replacement of Sample Carousel Motor Assembly

Maintenance time
The sample carousel motor should be replaced if it is damaged or it does not work
properly.
Tools
Name Code Qty
Hex wrench / 1
Synchronous belt of BA30-K24 1
tension alignment
tool
tension alignment
tool
4-35
Large bottom plate
Inner sample carousel M4X20 hexagon socket cap Outer sample carousel M4X10 hexagon socket cap
motor assembly head screw motor assembly head screw
Mounting plate for inner Mounting plate for outer

motor motor
M4X10 hexagon socket

cap head screw
Sample carousel motor assembly

801-BA80-00066-00
2 Unscrew the four M4X8 stainless cross pan head combination screws on right
side panel to remove it.
3 Unscrew the two M4X20 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat
washers from the upper of large bottom plate and unscrew the two M4X10
hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers from the lower of
4-36
large bottom plate on inner/outer sample carousel motor.
4 Loosen the synchronous belt and disconnect the inner/outer sample carousel
motor.
5 Remove inner/outer sample carousel motor.
6 Unscrew the two M4X10 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer on
sample carousel motor to remove it from inner/outer sample carousel motor.
7 Fix the new sample carousel motor onto the motors mounting plate using two
M4X10 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer.
8 Set the side of the motor far from the center of sample carousel onto the large
bottom plate using two M4X20 hexagon socket cap head screws with large flat
and spring washers, and set the other side of the motor using two M4X20
hexagon socket cap head screws with flat and spring washers. Do not tighten the
screws.
9 Sleeve synchronous belt TBN340XL037 on big pulley (on outer sample carousel)
and small pulley (on outer sample carousel motor) and sleeve synchronous belt
220XL037 on big pulley (on inner sample carousel) and small pulley (on inner
sample carousel motor) to adjust the tension with BA30-K24 (for inner tension)
and BA40-K02 (for outer tension) to a specific value, and then tighten the
screws.
10 Connect inner/outer sample carousel motor.
11 Fix the right side panel on the bracket welding parts using four M4X8 stainless
cross pan head combination screws.
cover.
Note: Sample carousel motors are used in both inner and outer sample carousels.
The replacement methods for them are the same.
None.
4.4.6 Replacement of Encoder Sensor and Carousel Home

Sensor Cables
Maintenance time
If sample carousel sensor becomes invalid, please replace cables of the encoder
sensor and the carousel home sensor.
4-37
Tools
Name Code Qty
Inner sample carousel

Outer sample carousel
sensor
sensor
M4X12 cross pan head

combination screw
4-38
Bracket for inner carousel Bracket for outer carousel
sensor sensor
Mounting plate for sensor Mounting plate for sensor
M3X6 cross pan

head
combination
screw
M3X6 cross pan head
combination screw
Cables of encoder sensor

801-BA10-00096-00
M3X6 cross
pan head M3X6 cross
screw pan head
screw
Cables of carousel home sensor

801-BA10-00096-00
2 Unscrew the four M4X8 stainless cross pan head combination screws on right
side panel to remove it.
3 Disconnect cables of carousel home sensor and encoder sensor.
4 Unscrew the three M4X12 cross pan head combination screws on inner sample
carousel sensor (two screws on outer sample carousel sensor) from the lower of
the large bottom plate.
5 Remove the inner (or the outer) sample carousel sensor from the large bottom
plate.
6 Unscrew the two M3X6 cross pan head combination screws on the sensors
mounting plate to remove it from the bracket of inner (or outer) sensor together
with the encoder sensor.
7 Unscrew the two M3X6 cross pan head screws on cables of encoder sensor to
remove it from the sensors mounting plate.
8 Fix the new cables of encoder sensor on the sensors mounting plate using two
4-39
M3X6 cross pan head screws.
9 Install the sensors mounting plate together with cables of the encoder sensor
onto the bracket of inner (or outer) sensor using two M3X6 cross pan head
screws.
10 Unscrew the two M3X6 cross pan head screws on the cables of carousel home
sensor to remove it from the bracket of inner (or outer) sensor.
11 Fix the new cables of carousel home sensor onto the bracket of inner (or outer)
sensor using two M3X6 cross pan head screws.
12 Fix inner (or outer) sample carousel sensor onto the large bottom plate using
three M4X12 cross pan head combination screws (two screws on outer sample
carousel sensor).
13 Connect cables of the sensor.
14 Fix the right side panel on the bracket welding parts using four M4X8 stainless
cross pan head combination screws.
Note:
Cables of the encoder sensor and the carousel home sensor are used in
both inner and outer sensor assemblies. The replacement methods for them
are the same.
If only the encoder sensor has been replaced, do not perform step 10 to
step 11.
If only the carousel home sensor has been replaced, do not perform step 6
to step 9.
After replacing cables of the encoder sensor and the carousel home sensor, you need
to align and validate them according to the descriptions in 7.2.3.
4-40
4.5 Syringe Assembly
The syringe assembly is situated at the right front side of the analyzer, including
sample syringe drive module, reagent syringe drive module and the clog detection
T-piece. It is mainly used to provide motivity for aspirating and dispensing the
samples/reagents through perfect pulling and pushing actions of the plunger.

2 1
6 4 5 3

1 801-BA80-00074-00 Sample syringe drive
module
2 801-BA80-00075-00 Reagent syringe drive
module
3 801-BA80-00076-00 Syringe 42 step motor
assembly
4 801-3101-00001-00 Syringe 250l
5 801-BA80-00047-00 Syringe 1ml
6 801-BX50-00088-00 Clog detection T-piece
4.5.3 Replacement of Sample Syringe 250l and Reagent Syringe

1ml
Maintenance time
The sample or the reagent syringe should be replaced if leaks/damages occur or its
4-41
time for scheduled maintenance.
Tools
Name Code Qty

Syringe T-piece
Anchor plate
Screw tightener
Sample syringe 250ul Reagent syringe 1ml

801-3101-00001-00 801-BA80-00047-00
Retaining screws
1 Open the left front door of the analyzer and unscrew the six M4X8 cross pan
head combination screws on the left front panel to remove it.
2 Loosen the retaining screws on sample (reagent) syringe. Do not remove the
screws.
3 Loosen screws on anchor plate of sample (reagent) syringe to remove the

anchor plate and screws. Store them properly.
4 Loosen the sample (reagent) syringe to be replaced and remove it. Do not drop
the plastic washer between T piece and the syringe.
5 Screw the new sample (reagent) syringe into the T piece tightly.
6 Install the sample (reagent) syringe on the V-shape bracket and tighten it using
two anchor plates and four screws. Make the top of V-shape bracket level to
4-42
scale 7.5 and scale 15 of the syringe during the installation.
7 Rotate the motor pulley of the syringe assembly to move the syringe plunger to
the uppermost end, and then rotate the motor pulley counterclockwise to move
the syringe plunger downwards for 1 to 2 scales. Gently tighten the syringe
plunger screw to fix the front end of the plunger on the driver. Exercise caution
to prevent the syringe plunger rod from deviating while tightening the retaining
screw.
8 Fix the right front panel on the welding parts of bracket using six M4X8 cross
pan head combination screws.
Note:
The replacement methods for the sample syringe and the reagent syringe are
the same.
Tighten the four screws alternately. Do not tighten them forcefully.
None.
4.5.4 Replacement of Sample/Reagent Syringe Drive Modules

Maintenance time
The sample or the reagent syringe drive module should be replaced if errors occur or
it cannot work properly.
Tools
Name Code Qty
Hex wrench / 1
4-43
Syringe T-piece
M4X10 hexagon socket cap head
screw
Anchor plate
Screw tightener
Reagent syringe 1ml
Sample syringe 250ul
Reagent syringe drive module

Sample syringe drive module 801-BA80-00075-00
801-BA80-00074-00
Welding parts of syringe

bracket
M4X10 hexagon socket cap head
Retaining screw
screw
2 Loosen the retaining screws on sample (reagent) syringe to remove the screws.

4 Remove the sample (reagent) syringe together with T piece.
5 Disconnect cables of sample (reagent) syringe drive module.
6 Unscrew the four M4X10 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer
on sample (reagent) syringe drive module.
7 Remove the sample (reagent) syringe drive module.
8 Fix the new sample (reagent) syringe drive module on the welding parts of
syringe bracket using four M4X10 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring
washer.
9 Connect cables of sample (reagent) syringe drive module.
4-44
11 Rotate the motor pulley of the syringe assembly to move the syringe plunger to
the uppermost end, and then rotate the motor pulley counterclockwise to move
the syringe plunger downwards for 1 to 2 scales. Gently tighten the syringe
plunger screw to fix the front end of the plunger on the driver. Exercise caution
to prevent the syringe plunger rod from deviating while tightening the retaining
screw.
Note:
The replacement methods for the sample and reagent syringe drive modules
are the same.
None.
4.5.5 Replacement of Syringe 42 Step Motor Assembly

Maintenance time
The syringe 42 step motor should be replaced if it is damaged.
Tools
Name Code Qty
Hex wrench / 1
tension alignment tool
for syringe
4-45
Synchronous
M3X8 hexagon socket cap head belt Wheel of synchronous
screw
Syringe 42 step motor assembly

801-BA80-00076-00
2 Loosen the retaining screws on sample (reagent) syringe to remove the screws.

4 Remove the sample (reagent) syringe together with T piece.
5 Disconnect cables of sample (reagent) syringe drive module.
6 Unscrew the four M4X10 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer
on sample (reagent) syringe drive module.
7 Remove the sample (reagent) syringe drive module.
8 Unscrew the four M3X8 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat
4-46
washers on the syringe 42 step motor.
9 Remove the syringe 42 step motor.
10 Fix the new syringe 42 step motor on the syringe base using four M3X8
hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers, adjust the tension
of the synchronous belt to a proper value using BA31-K01, and tighten the
screws.
11 Fix the sample (reagent) syringe drive module on the welding parts of syringe
bracket using four M4X10 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer.
12 Connect cables of sample (reagent) syringe drive module.
14 Rotate the syringe motor and tighten the screws on the far side of syringe
plunger (15~20mm from syringe).
Note:
Syringe 42 step motors are used in both sample and reagent syringe drive
modules, and the replacement methods for them are the same.
None.
4.5.6 Replacement of Clog Detection T-Piece

Maintenance time
The clog detection T-piece assembly should be replaced if leaks/damages occur or it
cannot work properly.
Tools
Name Code Qty
4-47
Welding parts of syringe
bracket
M3X8 cross pan head screws with

washers
Clog detection T-piece

801-BX50-00088-00
2 Disconnect the clog detection sensor.
3 Loosen the two connectors and pull out tubes.
4 Unscrew the two M3X8 cross pan head screws with washers on clog detection
T-piece assembly to remove it.
5 Install the new clog detection T-piece assembly on the welding parts of syringe
bracket using two M3X8 cross pan head screws with washers.
6 Connect cables of the sensor and the tubes again.
Note: Do not splash water on the clog detection board.

None.
4-48
4.6 Mixer Assembly
The mixer assembly, located in the middle back part of the whole unit, consists of
the mixer drive assembly, mixer transmission assembly, mixers, shell, and other parts.
It is mainly used to:
Stir the reaction liquid in each cuvette.
Move to specified positions according to the sequencing of the whole unit.

1 801-BA80-00024-00 Mixer drive assembly
2 801-BA80-00149-00 Synchronous belt B175MXL6.4
3 801-BA20-00116-00 Synchronous pulley P16MXL6.4DF
copper
4 801-BA80-00220-00 Mixer transmission assembly
5 801-BA80-00022-00 Mixer motor assembly
6 801-BA80-00162-00 Mixer
7 801-BX50-00122-00 Mixer rotary sensor cable
4-49
8 801-BA80-00148-00 3-probe/mixer horizontal motor
assembly
9 801-BX50-00121-00 Mixer vertical sensor cable
10 801-BA80-00025-00 Vertical motor assembly
4.6.3 Replacement of Mixers

Maintenance time
The mixers should be replaced if they are bent or damaged.
Tools
Name Code Qty
Medical rubber / 1 pair
gloves
Removing steps
2 Open the shielding cover.
3 Grab the upper part of the mixer and then pull the mixer upwards to remove it.
4 Grab the upper part of the new mixer, align the mixer with the installation hole,
and then press the mixer until you cannot proceed any more.
NOTE
When removing the mixer, keep it vertical and do not apply force from an
inclining direction to prevent the mixer from being scratched or deformed.
Put the removed mixer in a mixer package.
After removing the mixer, do not touch the paddle with your hands.
When installing a mixer, make sure that it is fixed in place and pressed
downwards until it can no longer proceed.

After replacing a mixer, you are not required to adjust the horizontal or vertical
parameters but to check if it has been installed properly. Press the mixer gently and
check if it can no longer proceed. If yes, it means that the mixer has been installed
properly.
4.6.4 Replacement of Mixer Motor Assembly

Maintenance time
The mixer motor assembly should be replaced if it is impaired in functioning or
damaged.
4-50
Tools
Name Code Qty
Common cross / 1
screwdriver
Short cross / 1
screwdriver
gloves
Figure 4.6 Exploded view for installation
4-51
Put the removed mixer in a mixer package or in other appropriate places.
4 Loosen the three M3X10 cross pan head anti-off screws on the lower mixer
cover assembly, and then remove the lower mixer cover assembly.
5 Loosen the three M3X6 cross pan head screws on the upper mixer cover
assembly, and then remove the upper mixer cover assembly.
6 Unplug the mixer motor cable.
7 Loosen the three M3X8 cross pan head combination screws fixing the mixer
motor assembly, and then remove the mixer motor assembly.
8 Coat the gear of the new mixer motor assembly with little high-speed long-time
oil MI-SETRAL-LI/PD1, and then fix the new mixer motor assembly on the
mounting plate with three M3X8 cross pan head combination screws.
9 Refer to the above-mentioned steps in reversed order to install the motor cable,
upper/lower mixer cover assemblies, mixers, and other parts.

After replacing the mixer motor assembly, choose one of the following two methods
to check the replacement:
1 Execute the Stir/Wash instruction on the Macro Instruction window, and
then check for noise and alarms while the mixer transmission assembly is
working.
2 Running a clinical chemistry, and then check for noise and alarms while the
mixer transmission assembly is working.
NOTE
While replacing the mixer motor assembly, exercise caution to prevent the
motor gear teeth from being damaged.
Do not apply too much oil on the motor gear; otherwise, the motor may lose
steps. To solve this problem, execute the Stir/Wash instruction for several times
until the error disappears.
If an alarm is given indicating abnormal rotation speed, check if the motor cable
and mixer motor assembly have been installed correctly.
4.6.5 Replacement of Mixer Rotation Speed Optical Coupler

Conversion Board
Maintenance time
The mixer rotation speed optical coupler conversion board should be replaced if it is
impaired in functioning or damaged.
4-52
Tools
Name Code Qty
Common cross / 1
screwdriver
Short cross / 1
screwdriver
gloves
4 Loosen the three M3X10 cross pan head anti-off screws fixing the lower mixer
5 Loosen the three M3X6 cross pan head screws fixing the upper mixer cover
6 Unplug the cable of the rotation speed optical coupler conversion board.
7 Loosen the M2.5X4 cross pan head screw fixing the optical coupler conversion
board, and then remove the conversion board.
8 Fix the new conversion board on the mounting plate with an M2.5X4 cross pan
head screw.
9 Refer to the above-mentioned steps in reversed order to install the optical

coupler conversion board cable, upper/lower mixer cover assemblies, mixers,
and other parts.

After replacing the mixer rotation speed optical coupler conversion board, choose
one of the following two methods to check the replacement:
1 Execute the Stir/Wash instruction on the Macro Instruction window, and then
check for alarms during the stirring/washing process.
2 Running a clinical chemistry, and then check for alarms during the measurement.
4-53
NOTE
If an alarm is given indicating abnormal rotation speed, check whether the mixers
can rotate or not. If yes, it indicates that the sensor cable or sensor itself goes wrong;
otherwise, check if the mixer motors are working normally.
4.6.6 Replacement of Mixer Transmission Assembly

Maintenance time
The mixer transmission assembly should be replaced if it is impaired in functioning
or damaged.
Tools
Name Code Qty
Common cross / 1
screwdriver
Short cross / 1
screwdriver
gloves
4 Loosen the three M3X10 cross pan head anti-off screws fixing the lower mixer
5 Loosen the three M3X6 cross pan head screws fixing the upper mixer cover
6 Unplug the cables of the rotation speed optical coupler and step motor, and
then remove the straps.
7 Loosen the two M3X20 hexagon socket cap head screws fixing the supporting
flange and spline shaft, and then remove the mixer transmission assembly.
8 Fix the new mixer transmission assembly on the spline shaft with two M3X20
hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer.
9 Refer to the above-mentioned steps in reversed order to install the optical

coupler conversion board cable, step motor cable, upper/lower mixer cover
4-54
assemblies, mixers, and other parts.

After replacing the mixer transmission assembly, adjust and check the horizontal and
vertical positions of the mixers according to section 7.2.5 Probe and Mixer Units.
4.6.7 Replacement of 3-probe/mixer Horizontal Motor Assembly

Maintenance time
The 3-probe/mixer horizontal motor assembly should be replaced if it is impaired in
functioning or damaged.
Tools
Name Code Qty
Hex wrench / 1
3-probe/mixer BA80-TF25 1
assembly rotary
transmission belt S3M
Medical rubber gloves / 1 pair
Hexagon socket
cap head screw
M3X12
Mixer motor
support
Mixer
801-BA80-00162-00
Synchronous cog belt,

endless belt, 84-tooth,
S3M 6mm wide
4-55
3 Remove the panels around the mixer assembly, such as upper panel, diluted wash
position panel, etc.
4 Unplug the mixer motor cable.
5 Loosen the four M3X12 hexagon socket head screws with spring and flat
washers on the 3-probe/mixer horizontal motor assembly, and then remove the
assembly.
6 Use four M3X12 hexagon socket head screws with spring and flat washers to fix
the 3-probe/mixer horizontal assembly on the support. Do not tighten the
screws until you used the S3M tension alignment tool (BA80-TF25) to adjust the
synchronous belt to the specified value.
7 Connect the mixer motor cable.
8 Install the upper panel, diluted wash position panel, and other parts.

After replacing the 3-probe mixer horizontal motor assembly, adjust and check the
horizontal and vertical positions of the mixers according to section 7.2.5 Probe and
Mixer Units.
4.6.8 Replacement of Synchronous Cog Belt (Endless Belt,

84-tooth, S3M, 6mm Wide)
Maintenance time
The mixer transmission assembly should be replaced if it is impaired in functioning
or damaged.
Tools
Name Code Qty
Common cross / 1
screwdriver
Short cross / 1
screwdriver
Hex wrench / 1
assembly rotary
4-56
4 Remove the mixer transmission assembly according to section 4.6.6 Replacement of

Mixer Transmission Assembly.
5 Loosen the four M3X12 socket head screws with spring and flat washers on the
3-mixer horizontal motor assembly, and then remove the synchronous cog belt
(endless belt with 84 teeth, S3M, 6MM wide) while leaving over the
3-probe/mixer horizontal motor assembly and other retaining screws.
6 Sleeve the new cog belt (endless belt with 84 teeth, S3M, 6MM wide) on the
synchronous pulley, use the S3M tension alignment tool (BA80-TF25) to adjust
the synchronous belt to the specified value, and then tighten the retaining screws
on the 3-probe/mixer horizontal motor assembly.
7 Install the mixer drive assembly, upper panel, diluted wash position panel and
other parts according to the above-mentioned steps in reversed order.

After replacing the synchronous cog belt, adjust and check the horizontal and vertical
positions of the mixers according to section 7.2.5 Probe and Mixer Units.
4.6.9 Replacement of Mixer Drive Assembly

Maintenance time
The mixer drive assembly should be replaced if it is impaired in functioning or
damaged.
Tools
Name Code Qty
Common cross / 1
screwdriver
Short cross / 1
screwdriver
Hex wrench / 1
4-57
Mixer drive assembly

801-BA80-00024-00
Mixer vertical sensor
Mixer rotary sensor 801-BX50-00121-00 Anchor plate
801-BX50-00122-00
Cross countersunk
head screw M3X6
Cross pan head screw

M3X6
Support
Hexagon socket cap
Synchronous
head screw M4X16
pulley .P16MXL6.4DF
801-BA20-00116-00
Synchronous
belt .175MXL6.4
Mixer vertical motor 801-BA80-00149-00 Shielding
assembly Hexagon socket cap Cross pan head screw
cover
801-BA80-00025-00 head screw M5X20 M3X6 with washer
4 Loosen the six M4X8 cross pan head combination screws on the left rear panel,
and then remove the left rear panel.
5 Loosen the ten M4X10 cross pan head combination screws on the right rear
panel, and then remove the right rear panel.

7 Remove the connectors on the motor cable and sensor cable of the mixer
transmission assembly.
8 Unplug all motor cables and sensor cables on the mixer drive assembly.
9 Loosen the three M5X20 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat
washers on the mixer drive assembly, and then remove the mixer drive assembly.
10 Fix the new mixer drive assembly on the large bottom plate using three M5X20
hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers. Make sure to lead
the motor cables and sensor cables through the spline shaft prior to the
4-58
installation.
11 Refer to the above-mentioned steps in reversed order to install the motor and
sensor cables of the mixer drive assembly and mixer transmission assembly,
mixer transmission assembly, left/right rear panels, upper panel, and so on.
Note: Connect connectors to the mixer transmission assembly motor and sensor
cables after leading the cables through the supporting flange.
After replacing the mixer drive assembly, adjust and check the horizontal and vertical
4.6.10 Replacement of Synchronous Pulley .P16MXL6.4DF

Maintenance time
The synchronous pulley should be replaced if it is damaged.
Tools
Name Code Qty
Common cross / 1
screwdriver
Short cross / 1
screwdriver
Hex wrench / 1
3-probe/mixer BA30-K21 1
assembly vertical
synchronous belt
2 Loosen the M3X8 hexagon socket cap head screw with flat washer on the
synchronous pulley, and then remove the synchronous pulley.
3 Fix the new synchronous pulley on the small pulley axle using one M3X8
hexagon socket cap head screw with flat washer, use the tension alignment tool
(BA30-K21) to adjust the synchronous belt to the specified value, and then
tighten the screw.
4 Install the mixer transmission assembly according to section 4.6.6 Replacement of

4-59
Note: Prior to installing the new pulley, clean the new small pulley axle and apply
new grease lubricant on it.
After replacing the synchronous pulley, adjust and check the horizontal and vertical
4.6.11 Replacement of Synchronous Belt .B175MXL6.4

Maintenance time
The synchronous belt should be replaced if it is damaged.
Tools
Name Code Qty
Common cross / 1
screwdriver
Short cross / 1
screwdriver
Hex wrench / 1
assembly vertical
synchronous belt
2 Loosen the four M3X6 cross pan head screws with wash on the shielding cover,
and then remove the shielding cover.
3 Loosen the three M4X16 hexagon socket cap head screws with wash on the
mixer vertical motor assembly.
4 Loosen the two M3X6 cross countersunk head screws on the anchor plate and
then remove the synchronous belt.
5 Sleeve the new synchronous belt on the pulley of the mixer vertical motor
assembly, and then fix the mixer vertical motor assembly on the support using
three M4X16 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer. Do not
tighten the screws until you use the tension alignment tool (BA30-K21) to adjust
the synchronous belt to the specified value.
6 Refer to the above-mentioned steps in reversed order to install the anchor plate,
mixer drive assembly, and other parts.
4-60
After replacing the synchronous belt, adjust and check the horizontal and vertical
4.6.12 Replacement of Mixer Vertical Motor Assembly

Maintenance time
The mixer vertical motor assembly should be replaced if it is impaired in functioning
or damaged.
Tools
Name Code Qty
Common cross / 1
screwdriver
Short cross / 1
screwdriver
Hex wrench / 1
assembly vertical
synchronous belt
3 Loosen the three M4X16 hexagon socket cap head screws with washer on the
4 Fix the new mixer vertical motor assembly on the support using three M4X16
hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer, and then sleeve the
synchronous belt on the small pulley. Do not tighten the screws until you use the
tension alignment tool (BA30-K21) to adjust the synchronous belt to the
specified value.
mixer drive assembly, and other parts.

After replacing the mixer vertical motor assembly, adjust and check the horizontal
and vertical positions of the mixers according to section 7.2.5 Probe and Mixer Units.
4-61
4.6.13 Replacement of Mixer Rotary/Vertical Sensor Cables
Maintenance time
The mixer rotary/vertical sensor cables should be replaced when they are damaged.
Tools
Name Code Qty
Common cross / 1
screwdriver
Short cross / 1
screwdriver
Hex wrench / 1
2 Loosen the M3X6 cross pan head screw on the mixer rotary or vertical sensor
cable, and then remove the cable.
3 Fix the new mixer rotary or vertical sensor cable on the mixer drive assembly
using one M3X6 cross pan head screw.
4 Install the mixer transmission assembly according to section 4.6.6 Replacement of


After replacing the sensor cables, adjust and check the horizontal and vertical
4.6.14 Replacement of Mixer Phase-1 Wash Well

Maintenance time
The phase-1 wash well of the sample mixer or reagent mixer should be replaced
when it is damaged or the drain hole is blocked.
Tools
Name Code Qty
Flathead screwdriver / 1
Cutting pliers / 1
Knife / 1
High-temperature / Several
gummed papaer
4-62
Name Code Qty
Tape / Several
Intallation location
Required material (FRU)

1 043-001540-00/ Wash well Including a
801-BA80-00225-00 wash well
package.
No.1 means
phase-1
wash well
of sample
mixer.
2 043-001540-00/ Wash well Including a
801-BA80-00225-00 wash well
package.
No.1 means
phase-1
wash well
of reagent
mixer.
1 Make sure the analyzer's power is off.
2 Open the front and back shielding covers.
3 Loosen the ten M4X8 stainless cross pan head screws on the right rear plate, and
remove the right rear plate.
4 Loosen the four M4X8 stainless cross pan head screws on the right plate, and
4-63
remove the right plate.
5 Loosen the two screws on the wash position protective cover, and remove the
wash position protective cover.
6 Remove the following components sequentially: reaction carousel cover, right

panel, auto wash panel, middle panel, and upper panel.
All these panels are around the sample or reagent mixer wash well.
7 Loosen the screws on the 8-phase wash probe assembly, and then remove the
wash probe assembly.
8 Remove the two M4X8 cross pan head screws with washer respectively on the
sample mixer wash well and reagent mixer wash well.
9 Lift the sample or reagent mixer wash well, unplug the inlet tube and waste tube,
and remove the wash well.
Use high-temperature gummed paper to stick the tubes to a reliable position in

order to prevent leakage.
10 Connect the inlet tube and waste tube to corresponding interfaces of the new
sample or reagent mixer wash well. To ensure the inlet tube is installed tightly,
use a pair of cutting pliers to cut off a small segment from the inlet tube.
(Reserve enough length for connection.) During installation, pay attention to the
position of the waste tube and the direction of the inlet tube. Use a tape to
bind the waste tube to the supporting rod of the wash well.
11 Use two M4X8 cross pan head screws with washer to fix the sample or reagent
mixer wash well on the supporting rod. Do not tighten the screws until finishing
alignment of the wash well position.
12 Install the following components sequentially: 8-phase wash probe assembly,

upper panel, middle panel, auto wash panel, right panel, and reaction carousel
cover, which are around the sample or reagent mixer wash well, as well as wash
position protective cover, right plate and right rear plate.
Note:
1 The wash wells are confusing. Mark them before replacement.
2 Exercise caution to prevent screws from getting lost or dropped into the
instrument during removing/installation.
3 Do not bend the wash tubes while removing or installing the 8-phase wash
4-64
probe assembly.
4 The wash wells mentioned in this section are the sample mixer wash well close
to the probe R2 assembly and the reagent mixer wash well close to the cuvette
wash station.
5 When unplugging the inlet tube and waste tube of a wash well, use a flathead
screwdriver and shake the tubes to loose them.
6 While removing or installing the sample and reagent mixer wash wells, exercise
caution to prevent damaging the horizontal rotating sensors of the mixer
assembly and probe R2 assembly.
7 When installing the waste tube of the sample mixer wash well, hold the lower
part of the waste tube from the bottom of the reaction carousel and insert it to
the waste liquid end. Make sure that the inlet tube is between the wash well
assembly and its supporting rod.
8 When installing the waste tube of the reagent mixer wash well, hold the lower
part of the waste tub from the right side and insert it to the waste liquid end.

1. After replacing the phase-1 wash well, align the wash well according to 7.2.5 Probe
and Mixer Units. After alignment, tighten the screws on the wash well.
2. After alignment, check the status of pumps P03, P06 and P07 according to 7.2.7
Hydropneumatic Unit. Turn on and off solenoid valves V12 and V13 to prime the
tubes and to check if water flows out normally from the wash well.
3. Verify the replacement through the following operations or phenomena:
requesting clinical tests, instrument's normal running, normal working of mixers in
cuvettes and wash well.
4-65
4.7 Sample Probe Assembly
The sample probe unit, located in the right front of the whole unit, consists of the
sample probe drive assembly, arm assembly and sample probe assembly. It is mainly
used to aspirate/dispense samples in reaction cuvettes and get washed according to
the sequencing of the while unit.

5 4
12
11
7 10
2
8 9
1

1 801-BA80-00034-00 Sample probe drive assembly
2 801-BA40-00179-00 Probe vertical sensor cable
3 801-BA80-00037-00 Sample probe arm assembly
4 801-BA80-00174-01 Sample probe assembly (with
spring guide post)
5 801-BA80-00029-01 Anticollision spring
6 245H031-000040-00 Synchronous cog belt (endless No FRU
belt, 84-tooth, S3M, 6mm code
wide)
7 801-BA80-00148-00 3-probe/mixer horizontal
motor assembly
8 801-BX50-00129-00 59 step motor assembly
10 801-BA20-00116-00 Synchronous pulley
P16MXL6.4DF copper
4-66
11 C-BA40-21-61735 Probe horizontal obstruct No FRU
detection sensor cable code
12 C-BA40-21-61733 Probe rotary sensor cable No FRU
code
4.7.3 Replacement of Sample Probe Assembly, Anticollision

Spring, and Sample Probe Arm Assembly
Maintenance time
The sample probe should be replaced if it is bent or rusted; and the anticollision
spring should be replaced if it is impaired.
Tools
Name Code Qty
Flathead / 1
screwdriver
Hex wrench / 1
Cutting pliers / 1
Washer
Sample probe arm Arm cover
assembly
801-BA80-00037-00 Spring
guide post
Anti-collision spring
Hexagon socket
801-BA80-00029-01
cap head screw
M3X12
Sample probe assembly

801-BA80-00174-01
Removing steps
4-67
2 Open the front shielding cover.
3 Grab the probe arm cover by its middle part with your hands and then pull the
two long edges from opposite directions to remove the cover.
4 Loosen the tube connector and unplug the fluid level sensor cable. If you are
going to replace the entire arm assembly, remove the connector from the sensor
cable.
5 Remove the spring guide post and the anticollision spring.
6 Remove the sample probe assembly.
7 Loosen the two M3X12 hexagon socket cap head screws with washer on the
sample probe arm assembly, and then remove the arm assembly.
8 Fix the new sample probe arm assembly on the spline shaft using two M3X12
9 Lead the new sample probe assembly through the mixer arm and support sleeve.
10 Fix the new anticollision spring on the mixer arm using the spring guide post.
11 Refer to the above-mentioned steps in reversed order to install the tube

connector, sensor cable and mixer arm cover.

After replacing the sample probe assembly, anticollision spring and arm assembly,
align the sample probe to the reaction carousel, sample carousel, wash well, ISE
module and diluted wash solution according to section 7.2.5 Probe and Mixer Units.
NOTE
When installing/removing the probe assembly and tube connector, exercise caution
to prevent dropping off the white washer at connection joint.
Exercise caution to prevent dropping off the anticollision spring into the instrument
during installation/removing.
Handle the sample probe assembly carefully and store it properly to avoid being bent
or damaged.
Prevent dropping off screws and spring washers into the instrument during
installation/removing.
To install the sample probe assembly, insert the sample probe into the support sleeve,
and then install the anticollision spring and guide post. Exercise caution to prevent
the probe riveted part from being pressed by the stage at the lower end of the guide
post. Move the sample probe up and down and check if it can move smoothly. If it
fails to move smoothly, readjust the spring guide post.
4-68
To install the arm cover, first lower its end part to make the foam touch the arm base,
push the arm cover forwards without touching the front strengthening rib, and then
press the arm cover to the arm until you hear a click.
4.7.4 Replacement of 3-Probe/Mixer Horizontal Motor Assembly

and Synchronous Cog Belt (84-tooth, S3M)
Maintenance time
The 3-probe/mixer horizontal motor assembly and synchronous cog belt (endless
belt with 84 teeth, S3M, 6mm wide) should be replaced if they are impaired in
Tools
Name Code Qty
Cross head / 1
screwdriver
Hex wrench / 1
assembly rotary
4-69
3 Remove the panels around the sample probe assembly, such as ISE module
cover, diluted wash position panel, etc.
4 Unplug the 3-probe/mixer horizontal motor cable.
3-mixer horizontal motor assembly, and then remove the 3-mixer horizontal
motor assembly and synchronous cog belt (endless belt with 84 teeth, S3M,
6mm wide).
6 Fix the new 3-probe/mixer horizontal motor assembly on the support using
three M3X12 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers, and
then sleeve the new cog belt (endless belt with 84 teeth, S3M, 6MM wide) on the
synchronous pulley. Do not tighten the screws until you use the S3M tension
alignment tool (BA80-TF25) to adjust the synchronous belt to the specified
value.
7 Refer to the above-mentioned steps in reversed order to install the

3-probe/mixer horizontal motor cable, ISE module cover, and diluted wash
position panel.

N/A.
4.7.5 Replacement of Sample Probe Drive Assembly

Maintenance time
The sample probe drive assembly or its part should be replaced if they are impaired
in functioning or damaged.
Tools
Name Code Qty
Cross head / 1
screwdriver
Hex wrench / 1
Cutting pliers / 1
4-70
Horizontal Vertical sensor Sample probe drive

obstruct 801-BA40-00179-00 assembly
detection sensor 801-BA80-00034-00
Anchor Cross
plate countersunk
head screw
M3X6
Cross pan head
screw M3X6 Cross pan head
screw M3X6
Hexagon socket cap
with washer
head screw M4X16
Hexagon socket
cap head screw Shielding
M3X8 cover
Synchronous Synchronous
59 step motor assembly Hexagon socket cap pulley .P16MXL6.4DF belt .175MXL6.4
801-BX50-001295-00 head screw M5X20 801-BA20-00116-00 801-BA80-00149-00
2 Open the shielding cover and left/right front doors, and then remove the ISE
module cover, diluted wash position panel and front panel.
3 Remove the sample probe arm assembly according to section 4.7.3 Replacement of
Sample Probe Assembly, Anticollision Spring, and Sample Probe Arm Assembly.
4 Unplug the motor cable, sensor cable, and fluidic tube.
5 Loosen the three M5X20 hexagon socket head screws with spring washer on the
sample probe drive assembly, and then remove the sample probe drive assembly.
6 Fix the new sample probe drive assembly on the large bottom plate using three
M5X20 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers. Make sure
to lead the fluidic tube and sensor cable through the spline shaft prior to the
installation.
7 Refer to the above-mentioned steps in reversed order to connect the motor

cable, sensor cable and fluidic tube, and install the sample probe arm assembly,
ISE module cover, diluted wash position panel, front panel and other parts.
Note: Connect connectors to the sample probe drive assembly sensor cable after
leading the cable through the supporting flange.
4-71
After replacing the sample probe drive assembly, align the sample probe to the
reaction carousel, sample carousel, wash well, ISE module and diluted wash solution
according to section 7.2.5 Probe and Mixer Units.

Maintenance time
Tools
Name Code Qty
Cross head / 1
screwdriver
Hex wrench / 1
assembly vertical
synchronous belt
Cutting pliers / 1
1 Remove the sample probe drive assembly according to section 4.7.5 Replacement of
Sample Probe Drive Assembly.
tighten the screw.
4 Install the sample probe drive assembly according to section 4.7.5 Replacement of
After replacing the synchronous pulley, align the sample probe to the reaction
carousel, sample carousel, wash well, ISE module and diluted wash solution
4-72
Maintenance time
Tools
Name Code Qty
Cross head / 1
screwdriver
Hex wrench / 1
assembly vertical
synchronous belt
Cutting pliers / 1
3 Loosen the three M4X16 hexagon socket cap head screws with wash on the
5 Sleeve the new synchronous belt on the pulley of the 59 step motor assembly,
and then fix the 59 step motor assembly on the support using three M4X16
hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer. Do not tighten the screws
until you use the tension alignment tool (BA30-K21) to adjust the synchronous
belt to the specified value.
sample probe drive assembly, and other parts.

After replacing the synchronous belt, align the sample probe to the reaction carousel,
sample carousel, wash well, ISE module and diluted wash solution according to
section 7.2.5 Probe and Mixer Units.
4-73
4.7.8 Replacement of 59 Step Motor Assembly
Maintenance time
The 59 step motor assembly should be replaced if it is impaired in functioning or
damaged.
Tools
Name Code Qty
Cross head / 1
screwdriver
Hex wrench / 1
assembly vertical
synchronous belt
Cutting pliers / 1
3 Loosen the three M4X16 hexagon socket cap head screws with washer on the 59
step motor assembly.
4 Fix the new 59 step motor assembly on the support using three M4X16 hexagon
socket cap head screws with spring washer, and then sleeve the synchronous belt
on the small pulley. Do not tighten the screws until you use the tension
alignment tool (BA30-K21) to adjust the synchronous belt to the specified value.
sample probe drive assembly, and other parts.

After replacing the 59 step motor, align the sample probe to the reaction carousel,
4.7.9 Replacement of Cables of Probe Rotary Sensor, Obstruct

Detection Sensor, and Vertical Sensor
Maintenance time
The cables of the probe rotary sensor, obstruct detection sensor and vertical sensor
should be replaced if they are damaged.
4-74
Tools
Name Code Qty
Cross head / 1
screwdriver
Hex wrench / 1
Cutting pliers / 1
2 Loosen the M3X6 cross pan head screw on the cable of the probe rotary sensor,
obstruct detection sensor or vertical sensor, and then remove the cable.
3 Fix the new sensor cable on the sample probe drive assembly using one M3X6
cross pan head screw.
4 Install the sample probe drive assembly according to section 4.7.5 Replacement of

After replacing the sensor cables, align the sample probe to the reaction carousel,
4-75
4.8 Probe R1 Assembly
The probe R1 unit, located in the middle front of the whole unit, consists of the
probe drive assembly, probe R1 arm assembly, and reagent probe assembly. It is
mainly used to aspirate/dispense R1/R3 in reaction cuvettes and get washed
according to the sequencing of the whole unit.
5 4
12
11
7 10
2
8 9
1
Table 4.2 FRU details of probe R1 assembly

1 801-BA80-00031-00 Probe drive assembly
2 801-BX50-00059-00 Probe vertical sensor cable
3 801-BA80-00027-00 Probe R1 arm assembly
4 801-BA80-00175-01 Reagent probe assembly (with spring
guide post)
6 246H031-000040-00 Synchronous cog belt (endless belt, No FRU
84-tooth, S3M, 6mm wide) code
4-76
assembly
copper
11 801-BX50-00057-00 Probe horizontal obstruct detection
sensor cable
12 801-BX50-00058-00 Probe rotary sensor cable
4.8.3 Replacement of Reagent Probe Assembly, Anticollision

Spring, and Probe R1 Arm Assembly
Maintenance time
The reagent probe should be replaced if it is bent or rusted; and the anticollision
Tools
Name Code Qty
Flathead / 1
screwdriver
Hex wrench / 1
Cutting pliers / 1
4-77
Removing steps
cable.
6 Remove the reagent probe assembly.
probe R1 arm assembly, and then remove the arm assembly.
8 Fix the new reagent probe arm assembly on the spline shaft using two M3X12
9 Lead the new reagent probe assembly through the mixer arm and support sleeve.
4-78


After replacing the reagent probe assembly, anticollision spring and arm assembly,
align the reagent probe to the reaction carousel, reagent carousel, and wash well
NOTE
When installing/removing the reagent probe assembly and tube connector, exercise
caution to prevent dropping off the white washer at connection joint.
Handle the reagent probe assembly carefully and store it properly to avoid being
bent or damaged.
To install the reagent probe assembly, insert the reagent probe into the support
sleeve, and then install the anticollision spring and guide post. Exercise caution to
prevent the probe riveted part from being pressed by the stage at the lower end of
the guide post. Move the reagent probe up and down and check if it can move
smoothly. If it fails to move smoothly, readjust the spring guide post.
4.8.4 Replacement of 3-Probe/Mixer Motor Assembly and

Synchronous Cog Belt (84-tooth, S3M)
Maintenance time
Tools
Name Code Qty
Cross head / 1
screwdriver
Hex wrench / 1
assembly rotary
4-79
Hexagon socket
cap head screw
M3X12
Motor
support
3-probe/mixer
horizontal motor Synchronous cog belt,
endless belt, 84-tooth,
assembly 801-BA80-
S3M, 6MM wide
00148-00
3 Remove the panels around the probe R1 assembly, such as light source cover,
ISE module cover, etc.
6mm wide).
value.

4-80
position panel.

N/A.
4.8.5 Replacement of Probe R1 Drive Assembly

Maintenance time
The probe R1 drive assembly or its part should be replaced if they are impaired in
Tools
Name Code Qty
Cross head / 1
screwdriver
Hex wrench / 1
Cutting pliers / 1
Probe rotary sensor

801-BX50-00058-00 Vertical sensor
Horizontal obstruct 801-BX50-00059-00
detection sensor Probe drive assembly
801-BX50-00057-00 801-BA80-00031-00
Anchor
Cross
plate
countersunk
head screw
M3X6
M3X6 Cross pan head
screw M3X6
Hexagon socket cap
with washer
head screw M4X16
Hexagon socket
M3X8
Synchronous Synchronous cover
2 Open the shielding cover and left/right front doors, and then remove the light
source cover, ISE module cover, and front panel.
3 Remove the probe R1 arm assembly according to section 4.8.3 Replacement of Reagent
Probe Assembly, Anticollision Spring, and Probe R1 Arm Assembly.
4-81
probe drive assembly, and then remove the probe drive assembly.
6 Fix the new probe drive assembly on the large bottom plate using three M5X20
the fluidic tube and sensor cable through the spline shaft prior to the
installation.

cable, sensor cable and fluidic tube, and install the probe R1 arm assembly, ISE
module cover, diluted wash position panel, front panel and other parts.
Note: Connect connectors to the probe drive assembly sensor cable after leading
the cable through the supporting flange.
After replacing the probe drive assembly, align the reagent probe to the reaction
carousel, reagent carousel, and wash well according to section 7.2.5 Probe and Mixer Units.

Maintenance time
Tools
Name Code Qty
Cross head / 1
screwdriver
Hex wrench / 1
assembly vertical
synchronous belt
Cutting pliers / 1
1 Remove the probe drive assembly according to section 4.8.5 Replacement of Probe R1
Drive Assembly.
4-82
tighten the screw.
4 Install the probe drive assembly according to section 4.8.5 Replacement of Probe R1
Drive Assembly.
After replacing the synchronous pulley, align the reagent probe to the reaction

Maintenance time
Tools
Name Code Qty
Cross head / 1
screwdriver
Hex wrench / 1
assembly vertical
synchronous belt
Cutting pliers / 1
Drive Assembly.
4-83
probe drive assembly, and other parts.

After replacing the synchronous belt, align the reagent probe to the reaction carousel,
reagent carousel, and wash well according to section 7.2.5 Probe and Mixer Units.

Maintenance time
damaged.
Tools
Name Code Qty
Cross head / 1
screwdriver
Hex wrench / 1
assembly vertical
synchronous belt
Cutting pliers / 1
Drive Assembly.
4-84
After replacing the 59 step motor, align the reagent probe to the reaction carousel,

Maintenance time
Tools
Name Code Qty
Cross head / 1
screwdriver
Hex wrench / 1
Cutting pliers / 1
Drive Assembly.
3 Fix the new sensor cable on the probe drive assembly using one M3X6 cross
pan head screw.
4 Install the probe drive assembly according to section 4.8.5 Replacement of Probe R1
Drive Assembly.

After replacing the sensor cables, align the reagent probe to the reaction carousel,
4-85
4.9 Probe R2 Assembly
The probe R2 unit, located in the middle front of the whole unit, consists of the
probe R2 drive assembly, probe R2 arm assembly, and reagent probe assembly. It is
mainly used to aspirate/dispense R2/R4 in reaction cuvettes and get washed
according to the sequencing of the whole unit.

5 4
12
11
7 10
2
8 9
1
Table 4.3 FRU details of probe R2 assembly

1 115-005498-00 Probe R2 drive assembly No FRU
code
2 801-BX50-00059-00 Probe vertical sensor cable
3 801-BA80-00033-00 Probe R2 arm assembly
4 801-BA80-00175-01 Reagent probe assembly (with spring
guide post)
6 247H031-000040-00 Synchronous cog belt (endless belt, No FRU
84-tooth, S3M, 6mm wide) code
assembly
4-86
copper
11 801-BX50-00057-00 Probe horizontal obstruct detection
sensor cable
12 801-BX50-00058-00 Probe rotary sensor cable
4.9.3 Replacement of Reagent Probe Assembly, Anticollision

Spring, and Probe R2 Arm Assembly
Maintenance time
The reagent probe should be replaced if it is bent or rusted; and the anticollision
Tools
Name Code Qty
Flathead / 1
screwdriver
Hex wrench / 1
Cutting pliers / 1
4-87
Removing steps
cable.
6 Remove the reagent probe assembly.
probe R2 arm assembly, and then remove the arm assembly.
8 Fix the new probe R2 arm assembly on the spline shaft using two M3X12
9 Lead the new reagent probe assembly through the mixer arm and support sleeve.
4-88


After replacing the reagent probe assembly, anticollision spring and arm assembly,
align the reagent probe to the reaction carousel, reagent carousel, and wash well
NOTE
When installing/removing the reagent probe assembly and tube connector, exercise
caution to prevent dropping off the white washer at connection joint.
Handle the reagent probe assembly carefully and store it properly to avoid being
bent or damaged.
To install the reagent probe assembly, insert the reagent probe into the support
sleeve, and then install the anticollision spring and guide post. Exercise caution to
prevent the probe riveted part from being pressed by the stage at the lower end of
the guide post. Move the reagent probe up and down and check if it can move
smoothly. If it fails to move smoothly, readjust the spring guide post.
4.9.4 Replacement of 3-Probe/Mixer Motor Assembly and

Synchronous Cog Belt (84-tooth, S3M)
Maintenance time
Tools
Name Code Qty
Cross head / 1
screwdriver
Hex wrench / 1
assembly rotary
4-89
3 Remove the panels around the probe R2 assembly, such as light source cover,
ISE module cover, etc.
6mm wide).
value.

position panel.
4-90
N/A.
4.9.5 Replacement of Probe R2 Drive Assembly

Maintenance time
The probe R2 drive assembly or its part should be replaced if they are impaired in
Tools
Name Code Qty
Cross head / 1
screwdriver
Hex wrench / 1
Cutting pliers / 1
Probe rotary sensor

801-BX50-00058-00 Vertical sensor
Horizontal obstruct 801-BX50-00059-00
Probe R2 drive
detection sensor assembly
801-BX50-00057-00 801-BA80-xxxxx-00
Anchor
Cross
plate
countersunk
head screw
M3X6
M3X6 Cross pan head
screw M3X6
Hexagon socket cap
with washer
head screw M4X16
Hexagon socket
M3X8
Synchronous Synchronous cover
2 Open the shielding cover and left/right front doors, and then remove the light
source cover, ISE module cover, and front panel.
3 Remove the probe R2 arm assembly according to section 4.9.3 Replacement of Reagent
Probe Assembly, Anticollision Spring, and Probe R2 Arm Assembly.
4-91
probe drive assembly, and then remove the probe drive assembly.
6 Fix the new probe drive assembly on the large bottom plate using three M5X20
the fluidic tube and sensor cable through the spline shaft prior to the
installation.

cable, sensor cable and fluidic tube, and install the probe R2 arm assembly, ISE
module cover, diluted wash position panel, front panel and other parts.
Note: Connect connectors to the probe R2 drive assembly sensor cable after
leading the cable through the supporting flange.
After replacing the probe R2 drive assembly, align the reagent probe to the reaction

Maintenance time
Tools
Name Code Qty
Cross head / 1
screwdriver
Hex wrench / 1
assembly vertical
synchronous belt
Cutting pliers / 1
1 Remove the probe R2 drive assembly according to section 4.9.5 Replacement of Probe
R2 Drive Assembly.
tighten the screw.
4-92
4 Install the probe R2 drive assembly according to section 4.9.5 Replacement of Probe
R2 Drive Assembly.
After replacing the synchronous pulley, align the reagent probe to the reaction

Maintenance time
Tools
Name Code Qty
Cross head / 1
screwdriver
Hex wrench / 1
assembly vertical
synchronous belt
Cutting pliers / 1
R2 Drive Assembly.
4-93

After replacing the synchronous belt, align the reagent probe to the reaction carousel,

Maintenance time
damaged.
Tools
Name Code Qty
Cross head / 1
screwdriver
Hex wrench / 1
assembly vertical
synchronous belt
Cutting pliers / 1
R2 Drive Assembly.

After replacing the 59 step motor, align the reagent probe to the reaction carousel,
4-94
Maintenance time
Tools
Name Code Qty
Cross head / 1
screwdriver
Hex wrench / 1
Cutting pliers / 1
R2 Drive Assembly.
3 Fix the new sensor cable on the probe drive assembly using one M3X6 cross
pan head screw.
4 Install the probe R2 drive assembly according to section 4.9.5 Replacement of Probe
R2 Drive Assembly.

After replacing the sensor cables, align the reagent probe to the reaction carousel,
4-95
4.10 Bar Code Reader
4.10.1 Tools
Name Code Qty
Cross screwdriver 1
Hex wrench 1
Sample bar code BA80-J16-01 1
alignment tool on
outer sample
carousel
Sample bar code BA80-J17-01 1
alignment tool on
inner sample
carousel
Reagent bar code BA80-J26-01~02 1
alignment tool on
carousel R1
Reagent bar code BA80-J23-01~02 1
alignment tool on
carousel R2
4.10.2 Maintenance of Sample Bar Code Assembly

Overview
The sample bar code module is composed of bar code reader and sample carousel,
which is shown as below. Since the sample carousel is separated into the outer and
inner ones, the two carousels should be aligned separately when installing and
aligning this module. Sample bar code assembly is located in the middle of
assemblies of sample & reaction carousels and sample probe, under laser warning
label.
4-96
Figure 4.18 Sample bar code module structure
4-97
2 1
Figure 4.19 Location of sample bar code assembly

No. Material Description FRU Remarks
1 Sample bar code scan assembly 801-BA80-00035-0
(upgrade package) 0
2 Built-in bar code reader 801-BA20-00001-0
(maintenance parts) 0
4.10.3 Replacement of Sample Bar Code Reader

The sample bar code reader should be replaced if it cannot work properly.
Removing built-in sample bar code reader
1 Remove sample carousel cover, panel and panel with position of intensive wash
solution, and front panel.
4-98
Remove these
panels
Figure 4.20 Panels to be moved when replacing sample bar code reader
2 Find the patch cord of sample bar code reader and connector of built-in bar
code reader under the reagent chamber, loosen the wire coil on the bar coder
reader cable, and remove the cable that has been laid along the reagent chamber,
in front of the AD housing and behind the ISE module. (Remove the ISE
module if necessary.) Unscrew the two M3X8 hexagon socket head screws, to
remove the reader.
4-99
Installing built-in sample bar code reader
Sponge cushion 2
Dust shield for Glass window
reader
Sponge cushion 2
Small bracket
for reader
Built-in bar code reader

801-BA20-00001-00 Sample
conductive brush
Large bracket Sample
for reader Bracket for chamber
Sponge cushion
conductive brush
Figure 4.21 Descriptions and locations for each component

3 Please assemble sample bar code components according to the figure above. Fix
the bar code components on the large bottom plate using three M5X16 hexagon
socket head screws with flat and spring washers, and fix the reader on the small
bracket for it with two M3X8 hexagon socket head screws. Connect the reader,
and fix it on bar code reader bracket with coil of wire. The built-in bar code
reader should be installed on the top of the bracket.
4 Fix components of sample carousel to its drive assembly; place sample bar code
alignment tool on outer carousel (BA80-J16-01) in position #46 on outer sample
carousel and place sample bar code alignment tool on inner carousel
(BA80-J17-01) in position #91 on inner sample carousel.
5 Arrange the cable of the built-in bar code reader along the front of the AD
housing and back of the ISE module. (Remove the ISE module if necessary.)
Extend the cable to the patch cord connector of sample bar code reader under
the reagent chamber, and then connect the cable with the sample bar code
reader. Check if the instrument is correctly connected, and then start and reset
it.
4-100
Patch cord
connector
Figure 4.22 Layout of patch cord of sample bar code reader

6 Run the operation software, and select Utilities -> Maintenance -> Sample
bar code alignment. Adjust the reader according to the procedures prompted
by the software, to make the emergent ray just pass through the aperture on the
sample bar code alignment tool on outer carousel, and fix the reader with four
M3X8 hexagon socket head screws. Then perform the alignment procedures to
adjust the scan position of the inner sample carousel, making the emergent ray
just present to the aperture on the sample bar code alignment tool on inner
sample carousel, and determine the scan position.
4-101
Figure 4.23 Sample bar code alignment interface
Sample bar code

alignment tool on
outer sample carousel
Ray from bar code

reader
4-102
Figure 4.24 Usage of barcode reader alignment tool on outer sample carousel
Sample bar code

alignment tool on
inner sample carousel
Ray from bar code

reader
Figure 4.25 Usage of barcode reader alignment tool on inner sample carousel
NOTE
Do not let the sponge cushion (4) shield the emergent ray from bar code reader
(3).
7 Install the cover of the panel, front panel, and restore the cover of the sample
carousel.
4.10.4 Maintenance of Reagent Bar Code Assembly

Overview
The reagent bar code module is composed of bar code reader and reagent carousel,
which is shown as below. Since the reagent carousel is separated into outer and inner
ones, the two carousels should be aligned separately when installing and aligning this
module. Reagent bar code assembly locates at left front of the analyzer, lower-left
corner of the reagent carousel, and under the laser warning label of the panel.
4-103
Figure 4.26 Reagent bar code module structure
4-104
2 1
Figure 4.27 Location of reagent bar code assembly
Figure 4.28 Locations of antifogging assembly

No. Material description FRU Remarks
1 Reagent bar code 801-BA80-00028-00
reader
2 Built-in bar code reader 801-BA20-00001-00
3 Cables of antifogging 801-BX50-00078-00 Installed in
temperature switch reagent bar
code assembly
4 Cables of antifogging 801-BA40-00171-00 Installed in
heater wire reagent bar
code assembly
4-105
4.10.5 Replacement of Reagent Bar Code Reader
The reagent bar code reader should be replaced if it does not work properly.
1 Unscrew the three retaining screws on the panel near the laser warning label,
open the cover of the reagent carousel, and remove the panel at the lower-left
corner of the reagent carousel.
2 Disconnect the bar code reader, loosen coil of wire, and unscrew two M3X8
hexagon socket head screws, to remove the built-in bar code reader.
Antifogging
Small bracket for assembly
reader
Bracket for
reader
Built-in bar code

reader Sponge cushion
801-BA20-00001-00
Figure 4.29 Locations of reagent bar code reader assemblies

3 Install the built-in bar code reader on the small bracket for it with two M3X8
hexagon socket head screws with flat and spring washers.
4 Place R1 bar code alignment tool in position #1 on the outer reagent carousel,
and place R2 bar code alignment tool in position #1 on the inner reagent
carousel.
5 Check if the instrument is correctly connected, and then start and reset it.
6 Run the operation software, and select Utilities -> Maintenance ->
Reagent bar code alignment. Adjust the reader according to the procedures
4-106
prompted by the software, to make the emergent ray just pass through the
aperture on the reagent bar code alignment tool on the outer reagent carousel,
and fix the reader with four M3X8 hexagon socket head screws. Then perform
the alignment procedures to adjust the scan position of the inner reagent
carousel, making the emergent ray just present to the aperture on the bar code
alignment tool on the inner reagent carousel, and determine the scan position.
Figure 4.30 Reagent bar code alignment interface
4-107
Figure 4.31 Usage of barcode reader alignment tool on outer reagent carousel
Reagent bar code

alignment tool on
inner reagent carousel
Ray from bar code

reader
Figure 4.32 Usage of barcode reader alignment tool on inner reagent carousel
7 Install the cover of the panel, front panel, and restore the cover of the reagent
carousel.
4.10.6 Replacement of Antifogging Temperature Switch Cables

The cables of antifogging temperature switch should be replaced if the switch is
damaged or it cannot work properly because of overheat.
2 Unscrew the two M3X8 hexagon socket head screws on the built-in bar code
reader to remove the reader.
4-108
Antifogging
Small bracket assembly
for reader
Bracket for
reader
Built-in bar
code reader Sponge cushion
801-BA20-
00001-00
Figure 4.33 Reagent bar code assembly

3 Unscrew the four M3X6 cross pan head screws from interior of the reagent
chamber, to remove the antifogging assembly.
4-109
Figure 4.34 Antifogging assembly of reagent bar code
4 Unscrew the four M3X10 retaining screws between the mounting plate for
antifogging device and the dust shield for bar code reader, to remove the dust
shield and sponge cushion.
5 Unscrew bolts on overheat switch plate, to remove cables of the antifogging

temperature switch and the overheat switch plate. And remove cables of the
antifogging temperature switch to be replaced.
6 Daubing some heat-conducting glue on the bottom surface of the new wire and
place it on the heating element. Then fix it on the overheat switch plate with one
M3X12 hexagon socket head screws.
7 Fasten the dust shield for bar code reader and the mounting plate for
antifogging device with four M3X10 retaining screws.
8 Press mounting plate for antifogging device on the hermetic sponge and fix it
on the side of refrigeration chamber, and then fix the dust shield pasted with
sponge cushion with four M3X6 cross pan head screws on the mounting plate.
Now, the antifogging assembly is fixed.
4-110
Antifogging
Small bracket for assembly
bar code reader
Bracket for
reader
Built-in bar
code reader Sponge cushion
801-BA20-
00001-00

9 Install built-in bar code reader onto the small bracket with two M3X8 hexagon
socket head screws with flat and spring washers. Please keep the glass surface of
the reader clean to avoid any influences on the readers performance. You can
keep screws loosen until the alignment is complete. Place R1 bar code alignment
tool in position #1 on the outer reagent carousel, and place R2 bar code
alignment tool in position #1 on the inner reagent carousel.
11 Run the operation software, and select Utilities -> Maintenance ->
Reagent bar code alignment. Adjust the reader according to the procedures
prompted by the software, to make the emergent ray just pass through the
aperture on the reagent bar code alignment tool on the outer reagent carousel,
and fix the reader with four M3X8 hexagon socket head screws. Then perform
the alignment procedures to adjust the scan position of the inner reagent
carousel, making the emergent ray just present to the aperture on the bar code
alignment tool on the inner reagent carousel, and determine the scan position.
4-111
4-112
Reagent bar code

alignment tool on the
Ray from bar code

reader
carousel.
4.10.7 Replacement of Antifogging Heater Cables

The cables of antifogging heater should be replaced if the heater cannot work
properly for heating, or condensate water or fogging occurs on glass window.
2 Unscrew the two M3X8 hexagon socket head screws on the built-in bar code
reader to remove the reader.
3 Unscrew the four M3X6 cross pan head screws from interior of the reagent
chamber, to remove the antifogging assembly.
4-113
Figure 4.39 Antifogging assembly of reagent bar code
4 Unscrew the four M3X10 retaining screws between the mounting plate for
antifogging device and the dust shield for bar code reader, to remove the dust
shield and sponge cushion.
5 Unscrew bolts on overheat switch plate, to remove cables of the antifogging

temperature switch and the overheat switch plate. Remove cables of the
antifogging heater you want to replace from the groove of heat conductive
aluminum plate.
6 Place a new one in the right place instead.
7 Daubing some heat-conducting glue on the bottom surface of the wire and
place it on the heating element. Then fix it on the overheat switch plate with one
M3X12 hexagon socket head screw.
8 Fasten the dust shield for bar code reader and the mounting plate for
antifogging device with four M3X10 retaining screws.
9 Press mounting plate for antifogging device on the hermetic sponge and fix it
on the side of refrigeration chamber, and then fix the dust shield pasted with
sponge cushion with four M3X6 cross pan head screws on the mounting plate.
Now, the antifogging assembly is fixed.
4-114
Antifogging
Small bracket for bar assembly
code reader
Bracket for reader
Built-in bar code

reader Sponge cushion
801-BA20-00001-
00

10 Install built-in bar code reader onto the small bracket with two M3X8 hexagon
socket head screws with flat and spring washers. Please keep the glass surface of
the reader clean to avoid any influences on the readers performance. You can
keep screws loosen until the alignment is complete. Place R1 bar code alignment
tool in position #1 on the outer reagent carousel, and place R2 bar code
alignment tool in position #1 on the inner reagent carousel.
12 Run the operation software, and select Utilities -> Maintenance -> Reagent bar
code alignment. Adjust the reader according to the procedures prompted by the
software, to make the emergent ray just pass through the aperture on the reagent
bar code alignment tool on R1 carousel, and fix the reader with four M3X8
hexagon socket head screws. Then perform the alignment procedures to adjust
the scan position of the inner reagent carousel, making the emergent ray just
present to the aperture on the bar code alignment tool on the inner reagent
4-115
carousel, and determine the scan position.
4-116
Reagent bar code

alignment tool on the
Ray from bar code

reader
carousel.
4-117
4.11 Photoelectric Unit
4.11.1 Functions
Chemistry analyzer is a typical precision instrument which features in optics,
mechanics, electronics and logarithm. The spectrophotometer is one of the key
components of the instrument and determines directly the precision and accuracy of
measurement by the system.
The BS-800/BS-820 inherits the technology of reversed optics of holographic
concave flat-field gratings. The holographic concave flat-field gratings are used for
optical dispersion and imaging. It can not only simplify the optical design to compact
the optical structure, but also eliminate the stray light. A combined light passing
through the entrance slit projects on the PDA(Photodiode Array) via the concave
flat-field gratings. One or multiple light-activated elements on different positions
receive the monochromatic light at certain wavelength. During operation, the
photometric system controlled by the computer receives the electric signals produced
by the light-activated elements of corresponding wavelength and then converts them
into absorbance. In case the spectrum is defined, the absorbance at multiple
wavelengths can be calculated quickly.
4.11.2 Components and Structure

The BS-800/BS-820 applies direct lighting, the holographic concave flat-field
gratings and PDA(Photodiode Array) for photometric measurement. See the figure
below. The front lens converges the light beam sent from the tungsten-halogen lamp
to the reaction cuvette via the fiber bundle. The light beam passes through the
reaction cuvette and then converges at the entrance slit via the lens group 2. The
gratings divide the light beam from the entrance slit and then converge them to the
slit array. Finally the PDA behind the slit array converts the light signals into electric
signals and then outputs them.
PDA Slits array
Optical filter
Tungsten- Reaction
Lens Lens Lens Lens
halogen lamp cuvette
Entrance slit
Gratings
4-118
Figure 4.44 Photometric structure
Optical measurement assembly

The optical measurement assembly is composed of optical assembly, power supply,
20W lamp, patch cord for lamp housing fan and the supporter.
20W lamp
801-BA80-00222-00
Power supply
assembly
Supporter
Figure 4.45 Optical measurement assembly (1)
Patch cord for lamp

housing fan
801-BA80-00136-00
Figure 4.46 Optical measurement assembly (2)
4-119
Figure 4.47 Optical assembly (801-BA80-00137-00)
AD housing assembly
AD housing assembly is used to receive and process analog signals transmitted from
pre-amp board, and to transmit the converted signals.
AD housing
Bracket of AD
housing
4-120
Figure 4.48 AD housing assembly
4.11.3 Assembly Locations and Replacement Solutions

Locations and FRU details
3
1
No. FRU/Material Code Material name Remarks

1 801-BA80-00222-00 20W lamp
2 801-BA80-00136-00 Patch cord for lamp
housing fan
3 801-BA80-00137-00 Optical assembly
4 801-BA80-00164-00 Glass cuvette
4-121
No. FRU/Material Code Material name Remarks
5 BA40-20-61320 0.1 optical Used together with
adjustment washer optical assembly
6 042-001722-00 0.3 optical Used together with
adjustment washer optical assembly
Note: For locations and replacement methods of 0.1 and 0.3 optical adjustment
washers, please refer to the contents below.
Replacing optical assembly

When to do
The optical assembly should be replaced if some of functions are disabled or its
performance cannot meet the requirements.
Tools
Cross screwdriver, Hex wrench, Adjustable wrench
Support post for lamp

panel
Left plate of lamp

replacement window
Right plate of lamp
Optical assembly replacement window
801-BA80-00137-00
20W lamp
801-BA80-00222-00
0.1 optical
adjustment washer
BA40-20-61320
Lamp base
retaining screw
0.3 optical
adjustment washer
042-001722-00
Supporting post
4-122
NOTE
Please remove the reaction carousel carefully to protect the reaction cuvettes.
After removing the optical assembly, place it in the package, and then bring the
package back or mail it to our company for repair.
Do not touch the lamp housing after removing the lamp. In case of touching, please
clean your hands with clean ethanol-moistened cloth or gauze.
Use a new lamp to align gains of each channel after replacing the optical assembly,
to avoid strong light of the lamp.
Do not lose the washers on the supporting post when removing the optical assembly.
Each supporting post has the same quantity of washers of the two types, and the
quantity should be determined by the actual requirement.
Replacing steps
2 Remove the mixer from mix station and the cuvette wash station and put them
in place, to avoid any bend.
3 Remove the top cover of reaction carousel and all the side plates; remove the
lamp and the top cover of ISE, to make the heat chamber of the reaction
carousel easy to take out. Rotate the reagent probe to the sample aspiration
position, and rotate the sample probe to the position over the sample carousel.
4 Remove the lamp, and demount the right and the left side plates of lamp
replacement window in the correct order.
5 Remove the reaction carousel by the tool. Please be careful to do this to protect
the glass cuvettes.
6 Loosen the drain line of heat chamber of reaction carousel and remove the heat
chamber.
7 Remove AD housing and open its upper cover; unplug the pre-amplification-AD
collection cable from the AD collection board, and unplug the parallel port
connector from the bottom of the AD housing assembly.
8 Loosen the connector of lamp fan and three retaining screws on the small
bottom plate, to remove the optical assembly to be changed. Please note that
there are several adjustment washers on each supporting post which should not
be removed together with the optical assembly.
9 Unscrew the supporting post fixed on the old optical assembly using adjustable
wrench, and install it in the place where a new optical assembly should be
4-123
installed.
10 Check if the number of 0.1 and 0.3 optical adjustment washers on each of the
three supporting posts are the same before installing the new optical assembly.
If there is any difference, please determine the quantity according to that on
another two supporting posts.
11 Install the new optical assembly following the above steps reversely.
12 After replacement, switch on the power of the analyzer and the analyzing unit,
and run the operation software. Set the target voltage to 11.8V with the function
of alignment, to adjust the light intensity of the lamp. (For details, please refer to
4.11.4 .)When the light becomes stable, please confirm again if the photometric
collection position and gains of each channel can meet the requirements. (For
details, please refer to 4.11.4 .) If the optical coupler bracket has been adjusted
during the alignment, then you need to re-adjust all the sample probes, reagent
probes, mixers and the wash station in the horizontal direction on the reaction
carousel.
13 When all the alignments complete, check if the performance of the analyzer can
meet the operation requirements with method of metal breakout.
Replacing lamp
Maintenance time
Warning that the light intensity is insufficient or the lamp is not turned on.
The lamp has been used over 2,000 hours.
Tools
Cross screwdriver
4-124
NOTE
To avoid water blank error 10X and lamp using time calculation error, please
replace the lamp according to the descriptions of lamp replacement.
Please wait for at least five minutes (considering that the lamp fan works
properly) after turn off the lamp to avoid any injury.
Do not touch the lamp housing when installing the new lamp. In case of touching,
please clean your hands with clean ethanol-moistened cloth or gauze.
1 Click Utility -> Maintenance -> Biochemistry Maintenance, and select
Replace Lamp.
2 Following the instructions prompted by the software and wait for five minutes
until the lamp cools down.
3 Remove the lamp cover plate with cross screwdriver.
4 Unscrew O-ring connector fixed on the cable terminal and lamp base retaining
screws with hands, to remove the lamp.
5 Install the lamp and panel in a reversed order. Please ensure that the lamp has
been installed properly in the right place and there is no space between the lamp
and the lamp base before mounting the panel. (For details, please refer to the
contents of installation notice.)
6 Click Continue on Replace Lamp window, and then wait for ten minutes to
start Lamp Check to check if it can work properly.
4-125
Replacing lamp fan
Maintenance time
The fan does not work properly and has confirmed it is not the problem with PCB
or joint parts.
Tools
Cross screwdriver
Patch cord for lamp
Light source assembly
housing fan
801-BA80-00136-00
WARNING
Do not touch the optical surface of the lamp after removing the lamp. In case of
touching, please clean your hands with clean ethanol-moistened cloth or gauze.
Please wait for at least ten minutes until the lamp cool down before replacing the
lamp, to avoid any injury.
Do not drop nuts into the analyzer device when removing the fan.
When installing the fan, please make sure that the wind blow to the light source
assembly and the tab of the fun face to the light source assembly.
1 Turn off the power of the analyzer and wait for ten minutes until the lamp cools
down, to avoid any injury.
2 Rotate the reagent probe to the position over the reagent carousel, and remove
panels of lamp, reagent wash reservoir and ISE.
3 Remove the lamp and store it properly. Do not touch the bulb of the lamp to
avoid any contamination.
4 Remove the left and right side plates, and remove the connector of lamp fan.
5 Unscrew the four screws of the fan carefully by a cross screwdriver. Please do
not drop the nuts into the analyzer device.
4-126
M5 nut Patch cord for lamp housing
fan 801-BA80-00136-00
6 Install the new fan to the light source assembly in a reversed order.
Cables downward
Label inward
7 Mount the plate of lamp window, the lamp and other plates, and switch on the
analyzer.
8 Check if the fan works properly and blow to the lamp base.
9 Restart the operating software. If the problem still exists, there may be some
problems with PCB.
Replacing reaction cuvette

Maintenance time
The cuvettes are dirty, damaged or overflowing.
Tools
Fiber-free gloves, concentrated wash solution manufactured by our company,
tweezers, air pressure gun (cold air), cross screwdriver, hex wrench, dry and clean
cloth or gauze, ethanol.
4-127
WARNING
Remove the reaction carousel carefully to avoid any damage.
While removing or installing the reaction cuvettes, exercise caution to avoid
scratching them. Do not touch the optical surface of the reaction cuvettes. If
the optical surface is polluted, the obtained absorbance may be inaccurate. In
case of touching, please clean with ethanol-moistened cloth or gauze.
Wear gloves free of fiber and powder to avoid polluting the optical surface of the
reaction cuvettes.
Do not use fiber tools like cotton swabs, cotton and cotton cloth to wipe the
reaction cuvettes. If fibers are left on the optical surface, inaccurate absorbance
may be obtained.
While installing the reaction cuvettes, make sure that the optical surface is
confronted with the outside of the reaction carousel.
Do not use the hot air pressure gun to dry the reaction carousel, to avoid any
deformation of parts.
If the cuvette is damaged, please clean the shatters on the surface of reaction
carousel, interior of the hole placing the cuvette, interior of other cuvettes and
interior of groove of the heat chamber, in order not to scratch the parts, block
the wash station or influence the subsequent loading of reaction cuvette.
The operation approaches are different with different quantity of reaction cuvettes
to be changed.
Replace or maintain a small number of reaction cuvettes
The reaction carousel does not need to be removed if only a few cuvettes to be
changed. For the procedures, please refer to the following contents.
1 Record the position of overflowing cuvette.
2 Run the software and click Utility -> Maintenance -> Maintenance ->
Biochemistry Maintenance -> Replace Cuvette.
3 Remove the wash station, mixers and cover of the reaction carousel following
software instructions.
4 Enter the position(s) you want to replace.
4-128
5 Wear a pair of gloves and remove the contaminated cuvette by pulling it
outwards. If the cuvette has been broken, it is suggested to unclench the metal
plate with a knife and then take out the cuvette with the tweezers.
6 Repeat step 4 and step 5 to remove all the cuvettes to be replaced.
7 If overflow occurs, you need to clean the surface of cuvette and the
contaminated hole placing the cuvette with dry and clean cloth or gauze in step
4 and step 5 to ensure that hole is dry and clean. Check if the temperature
control of reaction carousel is running, and expose the carousel to air for more
than 60 minutes for drying.
8 Run Replace Cuvette again to install the cuvettes on the reaction carousel
and make sure that the cuvette bottom attaches completely to the reaction
cuvette. Please clean the shatters to make sure the cuvettes can be placed into
the proper position.
9 After the cuvette is installed properly, please prime the new cuvette with at least
300l concentrated wash solution, and click Cuvette Check.If cuvette marked
red still exists, please maintain it using Replace Cuvette.
Replace or maintain a large number of reaction cuvettes

The reaction carousel has to be removed if there are a large number of reaction
cuvettes to be replaced. For steps, please refer to the following contents.
1 Switch off the power of the analyzing unit.
2 Remove the mixer from mix station and the cuvette wash station and put them
in place, to avoid any bend.
3 Remove the top cover of the reaction carousel, rotate the reagent probe to the
sample aspiration position, and rotate the sample probe to the position over the
sample carousel.
4 Remove the reaction carousel by the tool. Please be careful to do this to protect
the glass cuvettes.
5 Wear a pair of gloves and remove the contaminated cuvette by pulling it

outwards, and wash residual liquid inside of the cuvette. If the cuvette has been
broken, it is suggested to unclench the metal plate with a knife and then take out
the cuvette with the tweezers.
6 If there are a large number of cuvettes have been contaminated because of the
4-129
overflow, then please maintain it according to the descriptions of cleaning
cuvette. Clean the residual liquid using clean cloth or gauze and expose the
reaction carousel to air for drying.
7 Place the clean cuvette or the new one into the reaction carousel, and make sure
that the cuvette bottom attaches completely to the reaction cuvette. Please clean
the shatters to make sure the cuvettes can be placed into the proper position.
8 Install the reaction carousel, cover of the carousel, wash station and mixers to
the proper positions, and prime all the cuvettes newly replaced with at least
300l concentrated wash solution, and click Cuvette Check.If cuvette marked
red still exists, please maintain it using Replace Cuvette.
4.11.4 Adjustment of Photometer

Parameters adjustment of each channel gain
The function is applied when:
A warning occurs indicating that the light is too strong.
Required value of parameters after adjustment:
Water blank AD of all channels: < 60,000
Dark current of all channels: 1 to 200
Gain parameters: 65 for 340nm; 30 for 380nm; 20 for other 10 channels
NOTE
Add 200l DI water to the reaction cuvette before adjusting the gain parameter,
otherwise, the result may be different.
Adjusting the gain value cannot prolong the lamps service life.
Please keep the lamp on for more than 10 minutes before adjusting the gain
parameters; otherwise, the result may be different.
For steps, please refer to the following contents.

1 Run the software and click Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment ->
Photoelectric Gain Adjustment.
4-130
2 Before alignment, make sure that photoelectric waves and photoelectric
collection positions have been aligned, and the lamp is on for more than 10
minutes.
3 Add 200l DI water to the reaction cuvette from #131 to #135 followed by the
software instruction, and select Next.
4 The system will measure the energy of reaction cuvettes from #131 to #135,
and calculate gain parameters of all channels automatically. Check gain value of
each channel, water blank AD and dark current, and adjust them accordingly.
5 If the results meet the requirement, click Done to save the parameters.
6 If the value of water blank AD is greater than 60,000 after the adjustment,
4-131
please lower the voltage of the lamp and adjust again after the light become
stable.
7 If the value of dark current of one channel is greater than 200 or less than 1,
please check if the gain parameter of this channel does not meet the
requirement (340nm 65, 380nm 30, others 20).If the gain parameter falls
in the correct range, then you should run Fluctuation of Dark Current to
check if there is any problem with PCB. If the gain parameter falls out of the
range, please replace with a new lamp and adjust it again.
Light intensity adjustment

A warning occurs indicating that the light is too strong and the value of water blank
AD of each channel cannot be adjusted below 60,000 with method mentioned
above.
Voltage of the lamp: 11.0V to 12.0V
Water blank AD of all channels: < 60,000
NOTE
The voltage must be within 11.0V ~12.0V.
This function is only available when the light intensity is too strong and cannot be
aligned through gain adjustment. Higher voltage will shorten the lamps service life.
After adjusting the voltage, please keep the lamp on for more than 10 minutes
before re-adjusting photoelectric gain.
For steps, please refer to the following contents.

1 Select Utility -> Status -> Power to check and record the measured value of
Photometer Lamp Voltage 12V.
Photoelectric Unit.
4-132
3 Select Index Setup to reset the target lamp voltage (target value = measured
value 0.3), and click Save to return to the Alignment window.
4 Select Light Intensity Adjustment on Alignment window, a prompt will be

displayed indicating that the voltage is being adjusted.
4-133
5 After adjusting the voltage, you need to re-configure the gain parameter of each
channel followed by the descriptions in 4.11.4 .If the value is below 60,000,
please exit the Alignment window after the process complete. Then the system
can be used after homing. (Note: The lamp should be kept on for more than 10
minutes before adjusting the photoelectric gains.)
6 If some value of water blank AD still greater than 60,000 after adjusting the
photoelectric gains, then repeat step 3 to step 5 to re-adjust the light intensity
according to the difference between water blank AD measured during
photoelectric gain adjustment and 60,000 by the ratio of 0.1V : 1,500AD, until
the measured value of water blank AD is less than 60,000.If there are still some
values fall out of the range after adjusting the voltage to 11.0V, then there may
be some problems with photoelectric collection board.
Photoelectric waves and collecting position adjustment

Replacing optical assembly;
Replacing any part of reaction carousel assembly;
Checking if the reaction carousel assembly is at the Home position.
Checking if the output of each channel of photoelectric collection is normal.

Green frame should fall in the range of flat area;
No abnormal output.
4-134
NOTE
Before analyzing, you need to adjust the voltage and keep the lamp on for more than
three minutes.
Please remember to add 200l DI water to the reaction cuvette when scanning the
flat area, otherwise, the scan result may not be correct.
For details of operations, please refer to the following contents.

Photoelectricity Collection Position Adjustment.
2 Adjust the voltage and keep the lamp on more than three minutes, and run
analysis.
3 Enter a number in Start Cuvette field which displayed 131 to 135 by default,
it is suggested to enter the position number for best alignment.
4 Click Start at the upper right corner of the window, and add 200l DI water to
the reaction cuvettes from the start one to the subsequent five cuvettes.
5 Then click Next. The system will scan the flat areas of the specified cuvettes
and display the photoelectric collection areas on the top of the window.
4-135
6 As shown in the above figure, the upper curve is for 340nm flat area and the
lower curve is for 800nm flat area. Please ensure that the green frame falls in the
middle of the flat area.
7 If the green frame is in the middle of the flat area, then click Done to exit.
8 If the green frame is not in the middle of the flat area, then re-adjust the
position of the optical coupler on reaction carousel. Then click Readjust to
analyze the relationship between the flat area and the photoelectricity collection
position until it falls in the middle of the flat area.
9 When the position of the flat area is adjusted, click Start at the lower part of
the window to confirm the curves of each channel followed by the software
instructions. If the curve of one channel displays abnormally comparing with
others, like flat area error, no flat area, no output of one channel, then there may
some problems with PCB, you need to replace the optical assembly and re-adjust
it.
Query of lamp hour

When to use:
This function is used to inquire the working hour of the lamp and sleep time of the
analyzer, when the lamp intensity is too strong or too weak, or the water blank error
10X occurs.
Parameter requirements after maintenance:
None
4-136
NOTE
Abnormal fluctuation or extinguishment may occur on a lamp that has exceeded its
life span, thus affecting the test results. If the lamp has been used for over 2000
hours, replace it.
Working hour of the lamp may be shortened if the analyzer is not set up for auto
sleep or the auto sleep time span is more than 60 minutes. Set up the auto sleep
time span less than 60 minutes.
Perform the following steps:

Select Utility - Maintenance - Maintenance - Biochemistry Maintenance,
to access the maintenance screen.
Where,
Last Replaced: the date and time when the lamp was recently replaced and
that has been recorded on the maintenance window.
Total Time: the time that the lamp has been used for. The unit is hour. It
includes the time of normal use and sleep time.
Sleep Time: the time that the lamp has hibernated. The unit is hour.
Search: used to inquire the total time and replacement time of the lamp.
Zero: used to clear the water blank reference value of all reaction cuvettes. The
service personnel are recommended to click this button after maintaining the
reaction cuvettes, to prevent photometer alarm or invalid cuvettes because no
cuvette check is performed after cuvette replacement or maintenance. This
function is only available for advanced users.
Exit: used to close the window.
Photoelectric Signal Collection

When to use:
This function is used to view the actual dark current or the fluctuation of water
4-137
blank or of cuvette blank, when the dark current is too high, or the water blank error
10X occurs, or the light intensity is insufficient.
Parameter requirements after alignment:
None
The operating procedure is as follows:
1 Select Utility - Maintenance - Alignment - Photometer Unit -
Photoelectric Signal Collection.
Where,
Cuvette No.: cuvette number for the test.
Test Time: the time that the photoelectric signal collection will be
performed. The unit is second.
Light On: used to manually turn on the lamp, for example, after the dark
current test.
Light Off: used to manually turn off the lamp before the dark current test.
Start: used to start photoelectric signal collection.
Exit: used to close the window.
2 To measure the fluctuation or mean value of dark current, select Light Off, and
then select Start.
3 To measure the power or fluctuation of the lamp, ensure that the lamp has been
turned on. If it is off, select Light On, and wait for 10 minutes before starting
the measurement. Before starting the measurement, you are recommended to
remove the cuvette specified on the Photoelectric Signal Collection window, or
add over 200l deionized water in the cuvette, and then change the test time into
600.
4 After the measurement, the data will be exported to the Excel file in
OperationSoft/Instrument/LampSignalGatherResults. The filename is
4-138
LampSignalGatherRst_Test time.csv.
5 The following information are included in the file: lamp voltage, gain of each
channel, photoelectric value of each channel, maximum, minimum and mean
values. Recall relevant data according to your needs. The mean value of all
channels must be within 1~200 during dark current measurement. During the
lamp stability test, the photoelectric signals collected in any channel must have
no step jumps.
4-139
4.12 ISE Module (Optional)
4.12.1 Functions
The ISE module is an optional module for the fully-automated chemistry analyzer
and designed to measure the concentration of K+, Na+ and Cl- in serum, plasma and
urine. The theory of measurement is indirect ion-selective electrode method. With
this method, the system will dilute the sample (this is executed automatically by ISE
module) before analyzing it. Diluent: ISE Buffer Sample volume: 22l; Dilution
factor: 33.
4.12.2 Components of ISE Unit

ISE unit consists of ISE module, ISE reagent, ISE vacuum assembly and ISE air
duct assembly. For details of the functions, please refer to the following table.
Table 4.4 Components of ISE Unit

Name Functions
ISE Module There are four kinds of electrodes: Na+, K+, Cl-
and reference electrode. The sample is added
from injection port of ISE module, and diluted
and analyzed in this module.
ISE vacuum Provide degassing vacuum for ISE buffer in ISE
assembly module.
ISE air duct This assembly consists of ISE air duct and fan of
assembly ISE module, cooling ISE module.
Position and components of ISE module

ISE module is situated at the front of the analyzer, which is shown as below.
Figure 4.49 Position of ISE module in the analyzer

For positions of ISE module and ISE reagent, please refer to the figure below.
4-140
Figure 4.50 Components of ISE module
Figure 4.51 Position of ISE buffer solution tank
4-141
Table 4.5 Components of ISE module
Code
1 801-BA80-00213-00 Degassing
membrane (FRU)
2 801-BA80-00215-00 Temperature
Stabilizer (FRU)
3 801-BA80-00192-00 Solenoid Valve
SV01 (FRU)
4 801-BA80-00193-00 Solenoid Valve
SV02 (FRU)
5 801-BA80-00210-00 Buffer Nozzle
(FRU)
6 - SIC (Sample
Injection Cup)
7 - Electrode
8 - ISE Buffer Syringe
9 801-BA80-00195-00 Syringe Motor
(FRU)
10 - Waste Tube
Interface
11 - Waste Tube
Through-hole
12 801-BA80-00186-00 Waste Drain
Nozzle (FRU)
13 801-BA80-00191-00 Electrode Holder
(FRU)
14 801-BA80-00197-00 Temperature
Sensor (FRU)
15 801-BA80-00211-00 Fluidic Earthing
Piece (FRU)
16 801-BA80-00199-00 Motor of
Temperature
Stabilizer (FRU)
17 801-BA80-00217-00 Retaining Screws
for Electrodes and
Shielding Cover
(FRU)
18 801-BA80-00212-00 ISE Level
Detection Sensor
(FRU)
19 801-BA80-00209-00 Electrode Installed on the electrode for
Shielding Cover shielding.
(FRU)
20 801-BA80-00198-00 Spacer (FRU) Installed in the position of
electrode for cleaning ISE
tubing.
4-142
Fluidic diagram of ISE module
Figure 4.52 Fluidic Diagram of ISE Module
Table 4.6 ISE tubes and tube specifications

No. FRU Code Name Tube Tube
(corresponded Specification Specification
with numbers 1 2
in Figure
4.33)
01 ISE
Tube
801-BA80-00200-00
01
(FRU) bottle degasser
02 ISE
Tube
801-BA80-00201-00
02
(FRU) degasser SV01-NO
03 ISE
Tube
801-BA80-00202-00
03
(FRU) SV01-COM syringe-L
4-143
No. FRU Code Name Tube Tube
(corresponded Specification Specification
with numbers 1 2
in Figure
4.33)
04 ISE
Tube
801-BA80-00203-00
04
(FRU) SV01-NC RTB-IN
05 ISE
Tube
801-BA80-00204-00
05
(FRU) RTB RTB
06 ISE
Tube
801-BA80-00205-00
06
(FRU) RTB-OUT DP-IN
07 ISE
Tube
801-BA80-00206-00
07
(FRU) DP-OUT SV02-NC
08 ISE
Tube
801-BA80-00207-00
08
(FRU) SV02-COM syringe-R
09 ISE
Tube
801-BA80-00208-00
09
(FRU) SV02-NO drain
Overview of ISE fluidic assembly

ISE Buffer: The liquid in the ISE fluidic assembly is the buffer stored in the buffer
solution tank on tank bracket.
Liquid Flow Motivity: The flow of ISE buffer is driven by the buffer syringe. The
syringe motor drives two pistons simultaneously. The left one is used to add buffer to
the sample injection cup, and the right one is used to drain liquid in the cup.
Degassing Membrane: It is used to remove gas from ISE buffer.
Temperature Stabilizer: It is used to stabilize the temperature of ISE buffer to
keep the temperature similar as the environment temperature in the analyzer, to avoid
sharp fluctuation.
Work Process: As shown in Fluidic Diagram of ISE Module, ISE Level
Detection Sensor (801-BA80-00212-00) aspirates the buffer from the buffer solution
tank and dispenses it to ISE Tube 01 (801-BA80-00200-00).Remove gas in the buffer
with degassing membrane (801-BA80-00213-00) and put the buffer into ISE Tube 02
(801-BA80-00201-00).Drain the buffer to ISE Tube 04 (801-BA80-00203-00) using
syringe and Solenoid Valve SV01 (801-BA80-00192-00).ISE buffer flows into
Temperature Stabilizer (801-BA80-00215-00), and its temperature become closer to
the internal environment temperature in the analyzer. Drain the temperature
stabilized buffer to the SIC through ISE Tube 06 (801-BA80-00205-00).Drain the
4-144
liquid in SIC from the module using both syringe and Solenoid Valve SV02
(801-BA80-00193-00).The liquid in SIC will flow through ISE electrode, ISE Tube
07 (801-BA80-00206-00), Solenoid Valve SV02, ISE Tube 08 (801-BA80-00207-00),
ISE Tube 09 (801-BA80-00208-00), and then drain from the ISE module by gravity.
Overview of ISE analyzing

ISE analysis mainly consists of the following actions. During analyzing or priming,
ISE buffer always flows from tube 01 to tube 09 which is shown in Fluidic Diagram
of ISE Module.
Priming: Priming indicates that the syringe pumps the buffer passing through the
degassing membrane and Temperature Stabilizer unit to SIC and electrode. During
priming, ISE buffer always flows from tube 01 to tube 09 which is shown in Fluidic
Diagram of ISE Module.
Analyzing buffer: The ISE buffer syringe aspirates the degassed and stabilized
buffer and dispenses it to SIC. And then the buffer will be absorbed slowly into the
flow cell for analyzing. After that, waste liquid will be drained from waste drain
nozzle.
Analyzing sample: The ISE buffer syringe dispenses the degassed and stabilized
buffer to SIC at the specified height and the sample probe adds the sample to SIC,
then the sample and the buffer will be mixed in SIC. The sample-buffer mixture will
be absorbed into the flow cell for analyzing. After that, waste liquid will be drained
from waste drain nozzle.
A typical process is shown as below: Priming -> Analyzing buffer -> Analyzing
sample -> Priming -> Analyzing buffer.
Flow direction of buffer: During analyzing or priming, ISE buffer always flows from
tube 01 to tube 09 which is shown in Fluidic Diagram of ISE Module.
NOTE
To remove the joint parts of tank bracket, please first disconnect the ISE buffer tube
and ISE level detection sensor and remove them. Please take care of the ISE buffer
tube when perform operations above to prevent it from being bent.
4.12.3 Troubleshooting of ISE Tube

Note
Biohazard. Please exercise caution when maintaining ISE.
Tools
Name Requirement Qty
4-145
Materials
Code
1 ISE Level
801-BA80-00212-00 Detection Sensor
(FRU)
2 Degassing
801-BA80-00213-00
membrane (FRU)
3 Solenoid Valve
801-BA80-00192-00
SV01 (FRU)
4 Solenoid Valve
801-BA80-00193-00
SV02 (FRU)
5 Temperature
801-BA80-00215-00
Stabilizer (FRU)
6 O-shape Washer
801-BA80-00185-00
(FRU)
7 Waste Drain
801-BA80-00186-00
Nozzle (FRU)
Troubleshooting approach and steps

When to do:
Buffer overflows from sample injection port, poor performance of re-analysis,
calibration error, or such failures occur as A01034 (ISE sample injection port liquid
level too high), A01035 (ISE sample injection port liquid level too low) and A13023
(ISE calibration paused, the number of replicates for calibration exceeds the
designated value).
Judgement Criterion:
Prime with ISE buffer and check if the priming works properly. ISE tube will full of
liquid after priming it with the buffer for about 20 times. Normal buffer priming
should meet the following two conditions: 1. No obvious air bubbles in ISE Tube 06
(see Fluidic Diagram of ISE Module); 2. No overflow.
Troubleshooting steps:
If there are still a lot of air bubbles in the tube after priming the tube with ISE
buffer for several times, please check and handle it according to the following
descriptions.
1 Check the buffer solution tank first. Check the tubes shown in Fluidic Diagram
of ISE Module by the buffer flowing direction.
2 Make sure there are sufficient buffer in the buffer solution tank. And observe if
obvious air bubbles exist in the tube that connecting the buffer solution tank
with ISE module. Priming can be executed for several times if necessary. If air
bubbles exist, please check the followings.
4-146
3 Check if pipette on ISE level detection sensor is damaged.
4 Check if the tubes on ISE level detection sensor are connected well.
5 Check if the tubes on ISE degassing membrane are connected well.
6 Check if vacuum tubes on ISE degassing membrane are connected well.

Vacuum tube should be inserted into the bottom of the connector, and the
connector and the degassing membrane should be connected well. (Note: Do
not screw the connector so tightly when checking.)
7 Check if ISE vacuum works properly. The normal range of pressure is from
-25kPa to -36kPa. If exceptions occur, please check ISE vacuum assembly.
8 Check if there is any bubble in the tube that connecting degassing membrane to
the right Solenoid Valve SV01.If bubbles exist, please check the connectors of
degassing membrane and the right Solenoid Valve SV01.Check the right
connector of the syringe. Check ISE syringe for leak. If it leaks, please replace
the washer of the syringe.
9 Check the tube connection from the right Solenoid Valve SV01 to Temperature
Stabilizer.
10 Check the tube connection in Heat stabilizer.

Troubleshootings for overflow:
1 Check electrodes connection by the liquid flowing direction (see Fluidic

Diagram of ISE Module).You can drain ISE wastes during checking, and
observe the flowing direction of the liquid.
2 Check if the channel connecting the bottom of SIC and the electrodes has been
blocked.
3 Check the installation of the electrodes. On the contacting surface between

electrodes, REF electrode and temperature sensor, CL electrode and fluidic
earthing joint piece, there should be only one O-shape washer.
4 Check the tube connection from the electrode to the left Solenoid Valve SV02.
5 Check the tube connection from the left Solenoid Valve SV02 to ISE syringe.
Check the syringe for leak. If it leaks, please replace the washer of the syringe.
6 Check the tube connection from the left Solenoid Valve SV02 to the waste drain
nozzle. Check if the nozzle is blocked.
4-147
4.12.4 ISE Buffer Resorption Volume Confirmation and
Alignment
Note
Tools
None

When to do:
Replaced or reinstalled the sample injection cups.
Judgement Criterion:
When performing ISE analysis, the buffer nozzle will dispense a specific volume of
buffer to the SIC for diluting the sample before the sample probe adds the sample.
When adding ISE buffer, the buffer nozzle will resorb the buffer to keep the buffer
level always below the nozzle for positive displacement. Resorption may generate an
air column in the tube that connecting the buffer nozzle.
Run ISE analysis for about five times, and observe the position of air column from
the second analysis. (Note: Do not take the result of the first analysis as the
reference.)Normally, the air column should keep 10 to 40mm distance from edges of
SIC. If not, you should modify Adjustment Factor of SIC Volume.
10mm ~ 40mm
The resorption volume will influence the position of the air column which can be
changed by modifying Adjustment Factor of SIC Volume. To modify it, please
select System Setup -> Factory -> ISE Setup.The range of the factor is from 25
to 45.
Lowering the factor will increase the distance between the air column and the edges
of SIC, and vice versa. The air column in the tube will move about 1mm with one
unit change of this factor.
4-148
4.12.5 Electrodes O-shape Washer (801-BA80-00185-00) Check
Note
Please take it carefully when removing and installing the electrode.
Tools
None
Materials
Code
1 O-shape Washer
801-BA80-00185-00
(FRU)

When to do:
Buffer overflows from sample injection port, poor performance of re-analysis,
calibration error, or such failures occur as A01034 (ISE sample injection port liquid
level too high) and A13023 (ISE calibration paused, the number of replicates for
calibration exceeds the designated value).
The ISE module is completely sealed through pressing parts (from SIC to drain
outlet) with each other. See the figure below. O-shape washer should be placed in
each contacting surface, and there should be only one washer between two
contacting surfaces.
Remove ISE and check O-shape washers of the contacting surfaces.
Figure 4.53 Positions of O-shape washers to be checked
4-149
4.12.6 Removing and Reinstalling ISE Module
(801-BA80-00168-00)
Note
Biohazard. Please exercise caution when removing and reinstalling the ISE module.
Please cut off the power of the analyzer before removing and reinstalling this
module.
Tools
Hex wrench / 1
ISE alignment tool for BA80-J13-01 1
sample probe
Materials
Code
1 801-BA80-00168-00 EAM05 Module
(ISE)
Removing steps
1 Cut off the power of the analyzer, remove the top cover of ISE module, and
remove the front cover of the analyzer.
2 Unscrew the retaining screws on the air duct plate and the screws jointing the
plate and ISE air duct, to remove the plate.
3 Unscrew the retaining screws of ISE air duct to remove it.
4 Disconnect the analyzer and this module.
5 Rotate the connector counterclockwise to disconnect ISE Tube 01 and the

degassing membrane.
6 Disconnect vacuum tube and the degassing membrane. (Note: The connector is
a quick connect fitting, you can remove the vacuum tube by pressing its top.)
7 Loosen the tube clamp on ISE waste tube with a flathead screwdriver.
8 Unscrew three M4 hexagon socket head screws of ISE module.
9 Remove ISE module. Please store the tube clamps properly.
4-150
Figure 4.54 Fixed position of ISE waste tube clamp (front view)
Note: The arrow in the tube indicates the fixed position of ISE waste tube
clamp.
1 2
Figure 4.55 Locations of retaining screws (top view of ISE module)

Note: 1, 2, 3 showed in the figure are the holes for installing the retaining screws.
Installation steps
1 Cut off the power. Place the ISE module in the right place. ISE waste tube
should traverse the through-hole at the bottom of the module.
2 Connect waste tubes: Set the tube clamp on the waste tube, and connect the
tube to the waste tube interface, and fasten the tube clamp. Please do not fasten
it so tightly.
4-151
Figure 4.56 Fix ISE waste tube
3 Position ISE module: Fix the module with three M4X12 hexagon socket head
screws, and do not tighten them. Place the sample probe alignment tool at the
ISE sample injection port. Spin the sample arm with your hands to the position
just above the ISE alignment tool, and align the sample probe to the blank hole
and tighten the retaining screws.
Note: If it cannot be aligned by moving the module, please tighten the retaining
screws in the direction as much as the alignment required to fix the module first.
And then, unscrew the retaining screws on the top of the module and adjust the
positions of sample injection port and the sample probe through adjusting the
upper part of the module. After the alignment, tighten the screws. Remove the
alignment tool.
Figure 4.57 Adjusting positions of ISE module
4-152
4 Connect buffer tubes and fix them properly.
5 Connect ISE vacuum tubes.
6 Connect wirings of the analyzer and the module according to the interfaces
label.
Figure 4.58 Connection of tubes and wires
Note:
Interface of the buffer tube.
Wrap the buffer tubes with transparent flexible tube (1/4 inch ID) and fix it
on the lateral supporting post.
ISE vacuum interface.
Wiring interfaces. They are labeled as EAM 01, EAM 02, EAM 03 and
EAM 04.
7 Power on the analyzer and run startup procedure. Observe if the ISE module
works properly. Load ISE reagent and prime the module with the buffer to
check if the tubes are connected properly.
8 Place the alignment tool at the ISE sample injection port. Select Alignment ->
Sample Probe Unit and run alignment in horizontal and vertical directions
here.
9 Turn off the analyzer and the cut off the power to install the ISE fan. Then
power on the analyzer to check if the fan works properly.
10 Cut off the power of the analyzer to install the ISE air duct. Please do not put
the air duct on the wirings of the fan.
11 Install the ISE air duct plate.
4-153
12 Install the front cover of the analyzer.
13 Install the top cover of ISE module.
Validation
1 Run ISE Serum and ISE Urine calibration to check if the calibration is passed.
2 Run the precision test of ISE serum for 20 times to check if the CV value can
meet the requirements.
4.12.7 Removing and Reinstalling SIC Assembly

Note
module.
Tools
Tweezers / 1
Materials
None
Removing steps
Disconnect electrode connector and temperature sensor connector, loosen waste
tube connector (1) and the buffer nozzle. Please store the retaining screws (2) of the
buffer nozzle properly.
Unscrew the four retaining screws (3) and nuts to move the SIC assembly.
1 2
3
Figure 4.59 Removing SIC assembly
4-154
Installation steps
After the maintenance, place the SIC assembly back to the position shown in the
figure below.
1
Figure 4.60 Installing SIC assembly
Perform the removing steps in a reverse order to reinstall the SIC assembly.
If a new sample injection cup has been replaced, then the new cup should be placed
24.6mm far from the edge of the module. Shown as below.
Figure 4.61 Position of SIC assembly
Validation
After the installation, please check the positions of the mixer motor and the mixer,
and the position between the sample probe and ISE sample injection port.
Run ISE calibration and analysis to check if ISE analysis works properly.
Please pay more attention to check if the mixer works properly during ISE analysis.
4.12.8 Removing and Reinstalling SIC

Note
4-155
module.
Tools
Tweezers / 1
Materials
Code
1 801-BA80-00190-00 Mixer (FRU)
2 801-BA80-00216-00 Mixer motor (FRU)
Removing steps
You may need to remove the sample injection cup when something drops in the cup
or the mixer has to be changed. Removing SIC assembly from the module can
facilitate your subsequent work. For steps, please refer to the contents below.
Loosen the screws for retaining the SIC plates. (Please remember the right places for
later reinstallation.)
Remove SIC plate carefully, and clean the cup with a tweezers or replace the mixer.
Installation steps
Reinstall the plate.
Place the retaining screws in the original places and tighten them.(If a torque wrench
is available, please use torque of 4kgfm)
Validation
Run ISE Buffer Resorption Volume Confirmation and Alignment, and check if
the mixer works properly during ISE analysis.
Run ISE Serum and ISE Urine calibration to check if the calibration is passed.
Run the precision test of ISE serum for 20 times to check if the CV value can meet
the requirements.
Figure 4.62 SIC (Sample Injection Cup)
4-156
Note: 1: The mixer.
Figure 4.63 Mixer (801-BA80-00190-00)
4.12.9 Removing and Reinstalling Solenoid Valve

Note
Biohazard. Please exercise extra cautions.
Please cut off the power of the analyzer before removing and reinstalling the
solenoid valve.
Please avoid the static during the operations to protect CPU board.
Tools
Hex wrench / 1
sample probe
Removing steps
Remove ISE module from the analyzer, and the back cover of the ISE module.
Disconnect the CPU board from all wirings. Loosen the retaining screws on the CPU
board to remove it.
4-157
Figure 4.64 Back view of ISE module
Loosen the two retaining screws of the solenoid valve and the three connectors joint
to it to remove the solenoid valve.
Figure 4.65 ISE solenoid valve
Installation steps
Install a new solenoid valve. Fix the two retaining screws on the solenoid valve. To
join the fluidic connections, please refer to Fluidic Diagram of ISE Module.
Install the CPU board back and fix the retaining screws. Joint all the connectors to
the CPU board followed by the labels on it.
Reinstall the back cover of the ISE module.
Now, the ISE module is reinstalled.
4-158
Validation
1. Prime ISE buffer to check if the priming works properly.
2. Run ISE Serum and ISE Urine calibration to check if the calibration is passed.
3. Run the precision test of ISE serum for 20 times to check if the CV value can
4.12.10 Removing and Reinstalling Degassing Membrane

(801-BA80-00213-00)
Note
Tools
Materials
Code
1 Degassing
801-BA80-00213-00
membrane (FRU)
Removing steps
Note: You can check the degassing membrane by shaking it. The good ones have no
fluidic sound when shaking.
Loosen the connector of the two tubes and disconnect the ISE vacuum tubes.
Unscrew the two retaining screws of the degassing membrane to remove it.
Installation steps
Install a new degassing membrane and fix the retaining screws to connect the tubes.
Validation
1. Prime ISE buffer to check if the priming works properly.
4.12.11 Removing and Reinstalling CPU Board

(801-BA80-00214-00)
Note
Note: Please avoid the static during the operations to protect CPU board.
4-159
Tools
Name Code Qty
Hex wrench / 1
Lengthening 1
combination tool
sample probe
Materials
Code
1 CPU Board of ISE
801-BA80-00214-00
module (FRU)
Removing steps
1 Remove the ISE module from the analyzer.
2 Unscrew the retaining screws on the back cover of the ISE module to remove it.
3 Disconnect the connector of electrode and temperature sensor to remove the

rubber stopper for retaining the electrode connector. Disconnect all the wirings
on CPU board.
4 Loosen the retaining screws on CPU board to remove it.
Installation steps
1 Install a new CPU board and tighten its retaining screws.
2 Fix all the wirings with the rubber stopper.
3 Joint the connectors according to their labels.
4 Reinstall the back cover of the ISE module.
5 Now, the ISE module is reinstalled.
Validation
4-160
4.12.12 Removing and Reinstalling Syringe Washer
(801-BA80-00184-00)
ISE syringe washer can be used to run analysis for 66,000 times at most, then you
need to replace it with a new one. The washer should be replaced when it is damaged,
or leaks occur around the washer, or the air bubbles in the tube cannot be removed
because of the poor hermeticity.
Note
Tools
Adjustable wrench / 1
Materials
Code
1 Syringe washer
801-BA80-00184-00
(FRU)
Removing steps
1 Remove the front cover of the analyzer and the ISE air duct plate.
2 Unscrew the two retaining screws (1) of the syringe, and loosen the connector
of the tubes (2) to remove the syringe.
4-161
Figure 4.66 Fixing and connection of ISE syringe
3 Take out the syringe plunger (4).
4 Unscrew the screw caps (3) counterclockwise.
4
Figure 4.67 ISE syringe
5 Take out the old washer.
Installation steps
1 Put a new washer (5) into the screw cap (6).
Figure 4.68 Installation of washer

2 Traverse the syringe plunger through the screw cap.
3 Install the screw cap back to the syringe. Looking from the top of the syringe,
you can see a yellow circle (7) on the syringe.(If a torque wrench is available,
please use torque of 13kgfcm)
4-162
Figure 4.69 Installation of syringes screw cap
4 Reinstall the syringe and joint connectors.
Validation
1. Prime ISE buffer to check if the priming works properly. No leaks around the
washer.
4.12.13 Removing and Reinstalling Temperature Stabilizer

(801-BA80-00215-00)
Note
Tools
Name Code Qty
Hex wrench / 1
Materials
No. FRU/Material Material name Remarks
Code
1 Temperature
801-BA80-00215-00
Stabilizer (FRU)
Removing steps
1 Disconnect the motor (1).
2 Disconnect the tubes (3).
3 Unscrew two M3 hexagon socket head screws (2) on the temperature stabilizer
unit to remove it.
4-163
Figure 4.70 Fixing and connection of temperature stabilizer
Installation steps
1 Install the temperature stabilizer and tighten the retaining screws.
2 Connect tubes.
3 Connect the motor.
Validation
Prime ISE buffer to check if the priming works properly. The connector of
Temperature Stabilizer unit should be free of leaks.
4.12.14 Removing and Reinstalling Motor (801-BA80-00199-00)

of Temperature Stabilizer Unit
Note
Tools
Hex wrench / 1
Ruler / 1
4-164
Materials
Code
1 Motor of
801-BA80-00199-00 Temperature
Stabilizer (FRU)
Removing steps
1 Remove the Temperature Stabilizer unit according to the related descriptions.
2 Unscrew the two hexagon socket head screws of the mixer motor. Take out the
motor to replace with a new one.
Installation steps
1 Connect the motor with the mixer in Temperature Stabilizer unit. Shown as
below.
Figure 4.71 Connection of the motor and the mixer

2 Install it according to the dimension showed in the figure below. The top of the
motor should be come out about 20mm.
4-165
Figure 4.72 Motors position
3 Install the Temperature Stabilizer unit back to the module, fix the retaining
screws, joint the tubes and connect the mixer motor.
Validation
Prime ISE buffer to check if the priming works properly. The connector of
Temperature Stabilizer unit should be free of leaks.
If the mixer motor of the Temperature Stabilizer unit makes a slight sound every a
few seconds when the ISE module is in the status of Standby, then the motor
works normally.
4-166
4.13 Refrigeration Unit
By using the liquid circulating refrigeration technology, the BS-800 chemistry
analyzer provides refrigeration for reagents and samples for 24 hours per day,
keeping them in a 2-8C environment.
The refrigeration system is composed of the refrigeration module, reagent
compartment unit, sample compartment unit, circulating pump, and tubes. The
reagent and sample compartment units are connected in serial, and the
circulating pump is designed with a drain outlet to discharge refrigerants.
Figure 4.73 Locations 1 of refrigeration unit FRU
4-167
6
Table 4.7 FRU details of refrigeration unit

No. FRU Code Material Name Remarks
1 801-BA80-00073-00 Reagent refrigeration chamber assembly*
2 801-BA80-00067-00 Sample refrigeration chamber assembly*
3 801-BA80-00109-00 Reagent refrigeration module assembly
4 801-BA80-00154-00 Refrigeration circulating pump assembly
5 801-BX50-00074-00 Refrigeration fan cable
6 801-BX50-00076-00 Reagent refrigeration temperature sensor
cable
7 801-BA80-00165-00 Refrigerant
* Refer to the reagent carousel unit and sample carousel unit sections for removing
and installation of the reagent and sample refrigeration chamber assemblies.
4-168
4.13.2 Replacement of Refrigerant
Exploded view
Figure 4.77 Outline of prime fixture
Figure 4.78 Installation of reagent compartment and prime fixture
Plug
Prime
fixture
Sample
compartment
Figure 4.79 Installation of sample compartment and prime fixture
4-169
Tools
Table 4.8 Necessary tools for replacement of refrigerant

Cross head / 1
screwdriver
Hex wrench / 1
Tweezers / 1
Electric torch / 1
Cotton swabs Defatted Several
Prime fixture BA80-J46 1
Refrigerant 801-BA80-00165-00 6 bottles
Refrigerant recycle / 1
bucket
Procedure of discharging refrigerant

When to do:
The refrigerant inside the refrigeration system should be discharged through the
drain outlet if the refrigeration module, circulating pump, sample compartment
or reagent compartment is replaced.
Procedure:
Switch off the power supply of the instrument.
Remove the rear panel, the panel at the reagent compartment prime port, and
the sample compartment cover.
Remove the insulating foam from the drain tube of the circulating pump, and
then put the drain tube into a clean refrigerant recycle bucket with volume no
less than 4L. Make sure that the drain outlet is lower than the outlet of the
circulating pump. Use a flathead screwdriver to loosen the tube clamp on the
drainage plug, and then remove the drainage plug.
Open the air vent on the reagent compartment and sample compartment. The
refrigerant flows into the bucket under the gravity force.
When the refrigerant is completely discharged, block the outlet of the drain tube
with a plug, tighten the tube clamp, and then install the insulating foam. Fill the
new refrigerant according to the steps above in reversed order.
Precautions:
During refrigerant discharging, exercise caution to prevent the refrigerant from
spraying out and dropping on PCBs and connectors.
The discharged refrigerant must be retrieved.
General or partial ventilation must be provided to ensure good working
environment.
Use oil-proof chemical resistant gloves during operation.
Wash your hands with fresh water after finishing the operation.
4-170
The refrigerant should be stored while sealed properly, and it must not be
exposed to air for a long time.
Procedure of installing refrigerant

When to do:
Before the instrument leaves the factory.
The refrigerant is insufficient when the instrument is initially installed at the user
end. (The refrigeration is less than one bottle.)
The refrigerant needs to be filled during component repairing. If the
refrigeration module, circulating pump, sample compartment or reagent
compartment is replaced, the refrigerant inside the refrigeration system should
be discharged through the drain outlet. New refrigerant then should be filled for
about six bottles.
Refrigerant needs not to be discharged when the refrigeration fan, refrigeration
board temperature sensor, and reagent temperature sensor are replaced.
Procedure:
Prepare one to six bottles of refrigerant (801-BA80-00165-00), one funnel, and
three prime fixtures (BA80-J46).
Switch off the main power supply of the instrument.
Loosen the sealing plug screws at the prime port and air vent of the reagent
compartment and at the air vent of the sample compartment.
Install two prime fixtures without plug at the air vent and prime port of the
reagent compartment, and then install a prime fixture with plug at the air vent of
the sample compartment.
Connect the funnel with the prime fixture at the reagent compartments prime
port, and then remove the plug from the prime fixture on the sample
compartment. Fill the refrigerant into the funnel, and exercise caution to prevent
the refrigerant from spilling out. When the refrigerant level reaches the prime
connector, install the plug on the prime fixture of the sample compartment.
Check if the sensor cable of the refrigeration board is intact. Run the operating
software, select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Pyrology Unit
Reagent Refrigeration Temperature Curve, search and check the
refrigeration parameters, and then set the refrigeration status flag as 0.
Turn on the circulating pump P02 for one minute and then turn it off.
Remove the plug from the prime fixture of the sample compartment, and
then check if the fluid level comes down after half a minute. If it does,
repeat steps 5-7 until the refrigerant level no longer comes down while
remaining at the prime port of the reagent compartment.
Remove the prime fixtures in the correct order. First remove the prime fixture at
the air vent of the sample compartment with extra refrigerant discharged into
the sample compartment. Make sure that no extra refrigerant spills out when the
two prime fixtures on the reagent compartment are removed.
Install and tighten all sealing plug screws on the reagent compartment and
sample compartment.
4-171
Turn on the circulating pump P02 and reagent refrigeration. The temperature
curve is displayed. Check the radiator current and refrigeration board
temperature for about 20 minutes. If the radiator current is between 2-.5A and
no alarms are triggered indicating low refrigeration temperature, set the
refrigeration status flag as 0.
Install the insulating foam heads on the prime port and air vent of the reagent
compartment, and then stick transparent adhesive paper.
Figure 4.80 Reagent refrigeration temperature curve

Precautions:
During refrigerant priming, exercise caution to prevent the refrigerant from
Fill refrigerant strictly as instructed by the procedure mentioned above. When
turning on the circulating pump, be sure to block the air vent of the sample
compartment.
General or partial ventilation must be provided to ensure good working
environment.
Use oil-proof chemical resistant gloves during operation.
Wash your hands with fresh water after finishing the operation.
The refrigerant should be stored while sealed properly, and it must not be
exposed to air for a long time.
Alignment and confirmation (regular check of refrigerant)

When to do:
The instrument has been filled with refrigerant before leaving the factory. The
refrigerant level, however, may come down due to some unstable factors caused
during instrument transportation, such as air bubble drifting. When installing the
instrument at the user end, service engineers should check if the refrigerant is
sufficient.
4-172
When performing annually spontaneous maintenance at the user end, service
engineers should check the refrigerant inside the refrigeration tubes, and if
necessary, fill more refrigerants. Also service engineers should remove and check
the filter screen from the prime port of the reagent compartment, and if
necessary, clean it.
Figure 4.81 Fluid level of refrigeration system
Figure 4.82 Filter structure of refrigeration system

Procedure:
Use a flathead screwdriver to loosen the plug screws on the air vent and prime
port of the reagent compartment.
Use a pair of tweezers to remove the filter from the prime port and then clean
the filter with fresh water.
Use an electric torch to visually check the refrigerant level from the air vent and
prime port of the reagent compartment. If visual check is not allowed due to
the environment, use a cotton swab to sense the refrigerant level from the air
vent and prime port. Make sure that the refrigerant level is no lower than the
center line of the horizontal connector tube. The center line of the tube is about
15mm away from the top of the connector.
If the refrigerant level does not meet the requirements, fill more refrigerants
according to the steps described in this section.
After finishing the prime, put the filter back to the prime port.
Install the plug screws on the air vent and prime port of the reagent
compartment.
4-173
4.13.3 Removing/Installation of Reagent Refrigeration Module
Exploded view
Inlet
Outlet
Mounting
screws
Figure 4.83 Reagent refrigeration module
Tools
Table 4.9 Necessary tools for replacement of reagent refrigeration module

Cross head / 1
screwdriver
Hex wrench / 1
bucket
802 glue 095-000052-00 1
Adhesive tape 095-000049-00 1 roll
Removing steps
When to do:
The refrigeration module (115-005636-00) should be checked and replaced if a
refrigeration alarm is given due to impaired radiators and the refrigerating
temperature is greater than 8C.
Procedure:
Switch off the power supply of the instrument and remove the rear panel.
4-174
Disconnect the ten radiator cables, two temperature protection switch cables,
two refrigeration fan cables, and one temperature sensor cable of the reagent
refrigeration module.
Discharge the refrigerant from the refrigeration system according to the steps
described in the previous section.
Remove the insulating foam from the inlet and outlet of the refrigeration
module. Use a flathead screwdriver to loosen the tube clamps on the inlet and
outlet, and then unplug the fluidic tubes.
Use a hex wrench to loosen the two mounting screws from the refrigeration
module, and then pull out the refrigeration module in the direction indicated by
the arrow.
Precautions:
When unplugging the inlet and outlet tubes from the refrigeration module, hold
them carefully to prevent the residual fluid from spilling on PCBs and
connectors.
Installation steps
Procedure:
Install the new refrigeration module by pushing it along the guide slot on the
bottom plate of the whole unit, making the fan side facing inside of the
instrument.
Tighten the two mounting screws using a hex wrench.
Connect the inlet and outlet tubes according to the labels on the refrigeration
module and use a flathead screwdriver to install the tube clamps. Wrap the
insulating foam using class A insulating adhesive tape AS-ATAPEC1T-9M
(095-000049-00).
Connect the ten radiator cables, two temperature protection switch cables, two
refrigeration fan cables, and one temperature sensor cable of the reagent
refrigeration module.
Fill the refrigeration system with refrigerant according to the steps described in
the previous section.
Reinstall the enclosure of the instrument and switch on the power supply.
Precautions:
Connect the fluidic tubes properly.
Do not fix the tube clamp on a barb connector.
Wrap the insulating foam tightly to avoid any space.

Procedure:
Switch on the power supply of the instrument to turn on refrigeration. Select
Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Pyrology Unit -> Reagent
4-175
Refrigeration Temperature Curve, and then check if the current of the
radiators are between 2-6.5A.
4.13.4 Removing/Installation of Refrigeration Circulating Pump

Exploded view
Figure 4.84 Removing/Installation of refrigeration circulating pump
Figure 4.85 Inlet and outlet of refrigeration circulating pump
Tools
Table 4.10 Necessary tools for replacement of refrigeration circulating pump

Cross head / 1
screwdriver
Hex wrench / 1
bucket
802 glue 095-000052-00 1
4-176
Removing steps
When to do:
The reagent refrigeration circulation pump should be checked and replaced if an
alarm is given indicating refrigerating temperature too low.
Procedure:
Switch off the power supply of the instrument and remove the rear panel. You
will see the refrigeration circulating pump inside the instrument.
Disconnect the 24V power cord from the circulating pump.
Discharge the refrigerant from the refrigeration system according to the steps
described in the previous section.
Remove the insulating foam from the inlet and outlet of the refrigeration
circulating pump. Use a flathead screwdriver to loosen the tube clamps on the
inlet and outlet of the circulating pump, and then unplug the fluidic tubes.
Use a hex wrench to loosen the two retaining screws on the circulating pump
and then remove the circulating pump.
Precautions:
When unplugging the fluidic tubes, hold them carefully to prevent the residual
fluid from spilling on PCBs and connectors.
Installation steps
Procedure:
Connect the outlet with the tube of the refrigeration module and the inlet with
the other tube. Tighten the tube clamps.
Wrap the insulating foam using class A insulating adhesive tape
AS-ATAPEC1T-9M(095-000049-00).
Fix the circulating pump assembly on its bracket using two screws, making the
pump head in the front and the pump end in the back.
Connect the power cord of the circulating pump.
Fill the refrigeration system with refrigerant.
Install the enclosure of the instrument and make the instrument standby.
Precautions:
Connect the fluidic tubes properly.
Do not fix the tube clamp on a barb connector.
Wrap the insulating foam tightly to avoid any space.

Procedure:
Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Pyrology Unit -> Reagent
4-177
Refrigeration Temperature Curve, and then check if the refrigerating
temperature is no less than -8C.
4.13.5 Removing/Installation of Refrigeration Fans

Exploded view
Figure 4.86 Removing/Installation of refrigeration fan assembly
Figure 4.87 Reagent refrigeration fans
Tools
Table 4.11 Necessary tools for replacement of refrigeration fans

Cross head / 1
screwdriver
Hex wrench / 1
Removing steps
When to do:
The refrigeration fans (801-BX50-00076-00) should be checked and replaced if
an alarm is given indicating refrigeration fan abnormal.
4-178
The refrigeration fans need to be removed when they are going to be cleaned.
Procedure:
Remove the rear panel and disconnect the power cords of the two refrigeration
fans.
Take out the water tank from the front cabinet and use a cross head screwdriver
to remove the plate behind the water tank.
Loosen screws 1 and 2, and remove screws 3 and 4. Lift the refrigeration fan
assembly in the direction indicated by the arrow and then pull it out.
Loosen the four screws on the fans and take out the fans. (This step is not
needed when service engineers clean the fans.)
Precautions:
Handle the water tank carefully to prevent water from spraying out.
When removing screws 3 and 4, exercise caution to prevent them from dropping
into the instrument.
Installation steps
Procedure:
Lay the new fans in the same way as the old fans are set and arrange the cables.
Refer to the wind direction marked on the fan cover, and make sure that the fans
are installed correctly with wind entering the refrigeration module from its front
and leaving from its back.
Tighten each fan with four screws and nuts. Exercise caution to avoid damaging
the fan cover, which is plastic. Install the refrigeration fan assembly.
Install the fan assembly on the refrigeration module in the correct angle.
Install screws 3 and 4, and tighten screws 1-4.
Connect the fan cables, and restore the water tank and instrument enclosure.
Precautions:
Do not mistake the installation direction of the fans.
When installing the fans, use the screwdriver carefully to avoid damaging the fan
cover.
Ensure that the protrusion below the fan assembly is inserted into the
counterpart on the refrigeration air duct.
When installing screws 3 and 4, exercise caution to prevent them from dropping
into the instrument.

Procedure:
Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Pyrology Unit -> Fan Status
Query, and then check if the refrigeration fans 1 and 2 are normal.
4-179
4.13.6 Removing/Installation of Refrigeration Temperature
Sensors
Exploded view
Figure 4.88 Removing/Installation of temperature sensor in reagent compartment
Figure 4.89 Removing/Installation of temperature sensor on reagent refrigeration

module
Tools
Table 4.12 Necessary tools for replacement of refrigeration temperature sensors

Cross head / 1
screwdriver
Snap-off knife / 1
Box spanner BA40-J09 1
802 glue 095-000052-00 1
Removing steps
When to do:
The temperature sensor on the reagent refrigeration module should be replaced
if an alarm is given indicating refrigerating temperature too low and the
temperature is obviously abnormal.
The temperature sensor in the reagent compartment should be replaced if an
alarm is given indicating refrigerating temperature beyond range and the
temperature is obviously abnormal.
4-180
Find the sensors according to the exploded view.
Disconnect the temperature sensor cables.
Use a knife to scratch the insulating foam around the temperature sensors and
then remove the sensors with a box spanner.
Coat the front end of the new sensors with heat conductive silicon and screw
the sensors into the mounting holes using a box spanner.
Fill the breach of the insulating foam with 820 glue.
Wrap the breach with adhesive tape.
Connect the sensor cables and install the instrument enclosure.
Precautions:
Prior to installation, make sure that the sensors are intact.
When using box spanner to pinch the sensors, operate carefully to avoid
breaking or damaging the sensor cables.
Apply the 820 glue according to glue operation process.
The box spanner and its application on sensor are shown below:
Figure 4.90 Profile of box spanner (BA40-J09)
4-181
Figure 4.91 Application on sensor (1)
Figure 4.92 Application on sensor (2)
Installation steps
/

Procedure:
Switch on the power supply of the instrument to turn on refrigeration, and then
check if the refrigerating temperature is between -5-30C.
4-182
BS-800/BS-820 Chemistry Analyzer
Service Manual
(Volume 2)
Table of Contents
Intellectual Property Statement............................................................................................................... ii

Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party ............................................................................................ iii
Warranty .................................................................................................................................................... iv
Exemptions ................................................................................................................................. iv
Return Policy.............................................................................................................................................. v
Return Procedure ........................................................................................................................ v
Company Contact........................................................................................................................ v
1 System Description 1-1
1.1 Overview...........................................................................................................................................1-2
1.2 Components of Analyzing Unit....................................................................................................1-3
1.3 Functions ..........................................................................................................................................1-5
2 System Performance and Workflow 2-1
2.1 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................2-2
2.1.1 Common ..........................................................................................................................2-2
2.1.2 Specifications for Sample System .................................................................................2-3
2.1.3 Specifications for Reagent System................................................................................2-4
2.1.4 Specifications of Reaction System ...............................................................................2-5
2.1.5 Specifications of Operation ..........................................................................................2-6
2.2 Workflows.........................................................................................................................................2-8
2.2.1 Common Workflows ......................................................................................................2-8
2.2.2 Workflow Descriptions ..................................................................................................2-8
2.2.3 Measuring Points.............................................................................................................2-9
3 Installation 3-1
3.1 Overview...........................................................................................................................................3-2
3.2 Before Installation ...........................................................................................................................3-3
3.2.1 Environment Check .......................................................................................................3-3
3.2.2 System Configuration .....................................................................................................3-3
3.3 Installation Requirements ...............................................................................................................3-4
3.3.1 Space and Accessibility Requirements .........................................................................3-4
I
3.3.2 Power Supply and Noise ................................................................................................3-4
3.3.3 Water Supply and Drainage ...........................................................................................3-4
3.4 Computer Configuration (for International Customers) ...........................................................3-6
3.4.1 CPU...................................................................................................................................3-6
3.4.2 RAM..................................................................................................................................3-6
3.4.3 Network Adapter ............................................................................................................3-6
3.4.4 Serial Port.........................................................................................................................3-6
3.4.5 Hard Disk Defragment ..................................................................................................3-6
3.4.6 Remove Screen Saver and System Standby .................................................................3-7
3.4.7 Screen Display Properties..............................................................................................3-8
3.4.8 Auto Awake Setup...........................................................................................................3-9
3.5 Installation steps ............................................................................................................................3-13
3.5.1 Unpacking ......................................................................................................................3-13
3.5.2 Installation......................................................................................................................3-14
3.5.3 Fluidic Connection .......................................................................................................3-17
3.5.4 Connection of Chemistry Analyzer ...........................................................................3-20
3.5.5 Installation of Hub (optional).....................................................................................3-20
3.5.6 Installation of Data Management Software..............................................................3-21
3.5.7 Powering On..................................................................................................................3-23
3.5.8 Fluidic Prime..................................................................................................................3-26
3.5.9 Initial Maintenance Logs..............................................................................................3-30
3.5.10 Startup Initialization ...................................................................................................3-30
3.5.11 Parameter Import and Chemistry Configuration...................................................3-32
3.5.12 Activation and Installation of ISE Electrodes (optional).....................................3-34
3.5.13 Installation and Upgrading of Operating Software...............................................3-37
4 Overview of Modules and Units 4-1
4.1 Shells Assembly................................................................................................................................4-2
4.1.1 Functions..........................................................................................................................4-2
4.1.2 Locations and FRU Details ...........................................................................................4-2
4.1.3 Removing and Reinstalling Front & Back Shielding Covers ....................................4-4
4.1.4 Removing and Reinstalling Side Plates ........................................................................4-4
4.1.5 Removing and Reinstalling Front Panel.......................................................................4-5
4.1.6 Removing and Reinstalling Reagent Carousel Cover.................................................4-5
4.1.7 Replacement of Air Spring............................................................................................4-6
4.1.8 Replacement of Lock Catch..........................................................................................4-6
4.2 Reaction Carousel Assembly..........................................................................................................4-7
4.2.1 Functions..........................................................................................................................4-7
4.2.2 Locations and FRU details ............................................................................................4-8
4.2.3 Replacement of Reaction Carousel Body Cables.......................................................4-9
4.2.4 Replacement of Metal Plate for Cuvette ...................................................................4-12
4.2.5 Replacement of Carousel Home Sensor and Encoder Sensor Cables .................4-13
II
4.2.7 Replacement of Slip Ring Cables ...............................................................................4-16
4.2.8 Replacement of Reaction Cuvette..............................................................................4-18
4.3 Reagent Carousel Assembly .........................................................................................................4-19
4.3.3 Replacement of Inner Ring of Reagent Carousel Body .........................................4-20
4.3.4 Replacement of Outer Ring of Reagent Carousel Body ........................................4-22
4.3.5 Replacement of Reagent bottle Base .........................................................................4-23
4.3.6 Replacement of Reagent Chamber Assembly ..........................................................4-24
4.3.7 Replacement of Reagent Refrigeration Temperature Sensor Cables ....................4-26
4.3.8 Replacement of Carousel Cover Sensor Cables .......................................................4-28
4.4 Sample Carousel Assembly...........................................................................................................4-31
4.4.3 Replacement of Outer Sample Carousel Body and Cuvette Holder Base 2 ........4-33
4.4.4 Replacement of Inner Sample Carousel Body, 16 Cuvette Holder and 13 Cuvette
Holder Adapter.......................................................................................................................4-34
4.4.5 Replacement of Sample Carousel Motor Assembly ................................................4-35
4.4.6 Replacement of Encoder Sensor and Carousel Home Sensor Cables .................4-37
4.5 Syringe Assembly...........................................................................................................................4-41
4.5.3 Replacement of Sample Syringe 250l and Reagent Syringe 1ml .........................4-41
4.5.4 Replacement of Sample/Reagent Syringe Drive Modules .....................................4-43
4.5.5 Replacement of Syringe 42 Step Motor Assembly ..................................................4-45
4.5.6 Replacement of Clog Detection T-Piece...................................................................4-47
4.6 Mixer Assembly..............................................................................................................................4-49
4.6.2 Locations and FRU Details .........................................................................................4-49
4.6.3 Replacement of Mixers ................................................................................................4-50
4.6.4 Replacement of Mixer Motor Assembly ...................................................................4-50
4.6.5 Replacement of Mixer Rotation Speed Optical Coupler Conversion Board.......4-52
4.6.6 Replacement of Mixer Transmission Assembly.......................................................4-54
4.6.7 Replacement of 3-probe/mixer Horizontal Motor Assembly...............................4-55
4.6.8 Replacement of Synchronous Cog Belt (Endless Belt, 84-tooth, S3M, 6mm Wide)4-56
4.6.9 Replacement of Mixer Drive Assembly ....................................................................4-57
4.6.10 Replacement of Synchronous Pulley .P16MXL6.4DF .........................................4-59
4.6.11 Replacement of Synchronous Belt .B175MXL6.4.................................................4-60
4.6.12 Replacement of Mixer Vertical Motor Assembly ..................................................4-61
4.6.13 Replacement of Mixer Rotary/Vertical Sensor Cables .........................................4-62
III
4.6.14 Replacement of Mixer Phase-1 Wash Well .............................................................4-62
4.7 Sample Probe Assembly ...............................................................................................................4-66
4.7.3 Replacement of Sample Probe Assembly, Anticollision Spring, and Sample Probe
Arm Assembly ........................................................................................................................4-67
4.7.4 Replacement of 3-Probe/Mixer Horizontal Motor Assembly and Synchronous
Cog Belt (84-tooth, S3M) ......................................................................................................4-69
4.7.5 Replacement of Sample Probe Drive Assembly ......................................................4-70
Vertical Sensor ........................................................................................................................4-74
4.8 Probe R1 Assembly .......................................................................................................................4-76
Arm Assembly ........................................................................................................................4-77
(84-tooth, S3M).......................................................................................................................4-79
Vertical Sensor ........................................................................................................................4-85
4.9 Probe R2 Assembly .......................................................................................................................4-86
Arm Assembly ........................................................................................................................4-87
(84-tooth, S3M).......................................................................................................................4-89
Vertical Sensor ........................................................................................................................4-95
4.10 Bar Code Reader..........................................................................................................................4-96
4.10.1 Tools .............................................................................................................................4-96
4.10.2 Maintenance of Sample Bar Code Assembly .........................................................4-96
4.10.3 Replacement of Sample Bar Code Reader..............................................................4-98
IV
4.10.4 Maintenance of Reagent Bar Code Assembly......................................................4-103
4.10.5 Replacement of Reagent Bar Code Reader...........................................................4-106
4.10.6 Replacement of Antifogging Temperature Switch Cables .................................4-108
4.10.7 Replacement of Antifogging Heater Cables.........................................................4-113
4.11 Photoelectric Unit......................................................................................................................4-118
4.11.1 Functions ...................................................................................................................4-118
4.11.2 Components and Structure .....................................................................................4-118
4.11.3 Assembly Locations and Replacement Solutions.................................................4-121
4.11.4 Adjustment of Photometer.....................................................................................4-130
4.12 ISE Module (Optional).............................................................................................................4-140
4.12.1 Functions ...................................................................................................................4-140
4.12.2 Components of ISE Unit........................................................................................4-140
4.12.3 Troubleshooting of ISE Tube ................................................................................4-145
4.12.4 ISE Buffer Resorption Volume Confirmation and Alignment..........................4-148
4.12.5 Electrodes O-shape Washer (801-BA80-00185-00) Check................................4-149
4.12.6 Removing and Reinstalling ISE Module (801-BA80-00168-00) ........................4-150
4.12.7 Removing and Reinstalling SIC Assembly ............................................................4-154
4.12.8 Removing and Reinstalling SIC ..............................................................................4-155
4.12.9 Removing and Reinstalling Solenoid Valve...........................................................4-157
4.12.10 Removing and Reinstalling Degassing Membrane (801-BA80-00213-00) .....4-159
4.12.11 Removing and Reinstalling CPU Board (801-BA80-00214-00) .......................4-159
4.12.12 Removing and Reinstalling Syringe Washer (801-BA80-00184-00).................4-161
4.12.13 Removing and Reinstalling Temperature Stabilizer (801-BA80-00215-00)....4-163
4.12.14 Removing and Reinstalling Motor (801-BA80-00199-00) of Temperature
Stabilizer Unit........................................................................................................................4-164
4.13 Refrigeration Unit......................................................................................................................4-167
4.13.1 Locations and FRU Details .....................................................................................4-167
4.13.2 Replacement of Refrigerant ....................................................................................4-169
4.13.3 Removing/Installation of Reagent Refrigeration Module..................................4-174
4.13.4 Removing/Installation of Refrigeration Circulating Pump................................4-176
4.13.5 Removing/Installation of Refrigeration Fans ......................................................4-178
4.13.6 Removing/Installation of Refrigeration Temperature Sensors .........................4-180
5 Hardware Circuits5-1
5.1 Overview...........................................................................................................................................5-2
5.2 Safety Precautions............................................................................................................................5-3
5.3 Summary of PCBAs........................................................................................................................5-4
5.4 Locations of the PCBAs.................................................................................................................5-8
5.5 Removing PCBAs ..........................................................................................................................5-10
5.6 Functions of PCBAs.....................................................................................................................5-11
5.6.1 Main Control Board......................................................................................................5-11
5.6.2 Wash Temperature Control Board .............................................................................5-16
5.6.3 BA80 Sample Control Drive Board............................................................................5-23
V
5.6.4 BA80 Reagent Control Drive Board ..........................................................................5-29
5.6.5 AC Drive Board.............................................................................................................5-35
5.6.6 Reagent Refrigeration Board .......................................................................................5-39
5.6.7 Five-Probe/Mixer Conversion Board ........................................................................5-46
5.6.8 External Air Pump Drive Board.................................................................................5-49
5.6.9 Communication Conversion Board ...........................................................................5-50
5.6.10 Reaction Carousel Temperature Collection Board.................................................5-51
5.6.11 Cleaning Fluid Temperature Collection Board.......................................................5-55
5.6.12 AD Collection Board .................................................................................................5-57
5.6.13 Preamplifier Board......................................................................................................5-61
5.6.14 Level Sense Board.......................................................................................................5-64
5.6.15 Pressure Detection Board..........................................................................................5-67
5.6.16 Clog Detection Board ................................................................................................5-71
5.6.17 Water Quality Detection Board ................................................................................5-75
5.7 Power Supply System ....................................................................................................................5-77
5.7.1 Description of Power Supply System ........................................................................5-77
5.7.2 Performance Indices.....................................................................................................5-78
5.7.3 Functional Diagram......................................................................................................5-79
5.7.4 BA40 Power Supply Assembly....................................................................................5-80
5.7.5 12V/30A Power Supply Board ...................................................................................5-88
5.7.6 24V/6A Power Supply Board .....................................................................................5-90
5.7.7 Analog Power Supply Conversion Board ..................................................................5-92
5.7.8 DC Power Supply Conversion Board ........................................................................5-93
5.7.9 Tips for Troubleshooting Power Supply System......................................................5-96
5.8 Wiring Diagrams............................................................................................................................5-97
6 Hydropneumatic System6-1
6.1 Overview...........................................................................................................................................6-2
6.2 Hydropneumatic Diagram..............................................................................................................6-3
6.3 Principles of Hydropneumatic System.........................................................................................6-5
6.3.1 Sampling Unit..................................................................................................................6-5
6.3.2 Cuvette Wash Unit..........................................................................................................6-6
6.3.3 Water Supply Unit...........................................................................................................6-7
6.3.4 Waste Unit........................................................................................................................6-8
6.3.5 ISE Hydropneumatic Unit.............................................................................................6-9
6.3.6 Other...............................................................................................................................6-10
6.4 Removing and Installation of Hydropneumatic Components ...............................................6-11
6.4.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................6-11
6.4.2 Sampling Unit................................................................................................................6-12
6.4.3 Cuvette Wash Unit........................................................................................................6-13
6.4.4 Water Supply Unit.........................................................................................................6-20
6.4.5 Waste Unit......................................................................................................................6-23
VI
6.4.6 ISE Hydropneumatic Unit...........................................................................................6-26
6.5 List of Hydropneumatic Materials..............................................................................................6-28
6.5.1 Pumps .............................................................................................................................6-28
6.5.2 Solenoid Valves .............................................................................................................6-28
6.5.3 Connectors.....................................................................................................................6-29
6.5.4 Tubes...............................................................................................................................6-32
7 Alignment and Maintenance 7-1
7.1 Basic Operations..............................................................................................................................7-2
7.1.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................7-2
7.2 Alignment Procedure ......................................................................................................................7-4
7.2.1 Photoelectric Unit...........................................................................................................7-4
7.2.2 Reaction Carousel Unit ..................................................................................................7-8
7.2.3 Sample Carousel Unit.....................................................................................................7-9
7.2.4 Reagent Carousel Unit..................................................................................................7-10
7.2.5 Probe and Mixer Units .................................................................................................7-11
7.2.6 Bar Code Units..............................................................................................................7-15
7.2.7 Hydropneumatic Unit ..................................................................................................7-18
7.2.8 Pyrology Unit ................................................................................................................7-21
8 Alarms and Troubleshooting8-1
9 Scheduled Maintenance List 9-1
9.1 Clean Cooling Fans and Radiators ................................................................................................9-3
9.1.1 When to do ......................................................................................................................9-3
9.1.2 Tool ...................................................................................................................................9-3
9.1.4 Test and check .................................................................................................................9-8
9.2 Maintain reagent refrigeration circulating filter...........................................................................9-9
9.2.1 When to do ......................................................................................................................9-9
9.2.2 Tool ...................................................................................................................................9-9
9.2.4 Test and confirmation ....................................................................................................9-9
9.3 Check the refrigerant in the reagent circulation system...........................................................9-11
9.3.1 When to do ....................................................................................................................9-11
9.3.2 Maintenance tools and materials.................................................................................9-11
9.4 Clean the lens of the optical module..........................................................................................9-13
9.4.1 When to do ....................................................................................................................9-13
9.5 Replacement of the wearing parts of waste pump (P07) ........................................................9-15
9.5.1 When to do ....................................................................................................................9-15
VII
9.5.3 Required materialFRU.........................................................................................9-15
9.5.5 Test and check ...............................................................................................................9-20
9.6 Replacement of the wearing parts of primary vacuum pump(P08) ......................................9-21
9.6.1 When to do ....................................................................................................................9-21
9.6.5 Test and check ...............................................................................................................9-25
9.7 Replacement of the auto wash transfer pipe .............................................................................9-26
9.7.1 When to do ....................................................................................................................9-26
9.8 Replacement of the concentrated wash solution filter ............................................................9-28
9.8.1 When to do ....................................................................................................................9-28
9.8.5 Test and check ...............................................................................................................9-30
9.9 Maintenance the water supply filter ............................................................................................9-31
9.9.1 When to do ....................................................................................................................9-31
VIII
5 Hardware Circuits
5-1
5.1 Overview
This chapter describes the functions of the printed circuit board assemblies (PCBAs)
used on the BS-800/BS-820 Chemistry Analyzer.
5-2
5.2 Safety Precautions
While the instrument is working, do not touch the hardware circuit boards with your
hands or other objects.
To remove a circuit board, you should first disconnect the instrument from the (AC)
power supply. Please wear a pair of antistatic gloves or take other measures to
prevent static electricity prior to removing a circuit board.
5-3
5.3 Summary of PCBAs
Sequence number and description of PCBAs
The table bellows provides a summary of the PCBAs used on the BS-800/BS-820
Chemistry Analyzer and briefly describes their functions.
PCBA (PCB) Functions No.
Main control board The main control board is the control center of #1
051-000203-00 the instrument. It is mainly used to fulfil the
following tasks: 1). communicating with a
computer through the RS232 serial port or the
Ethernet interface (reserved) to transmit data
and instructions; 2) communicating with the
smart modules, including the ISE module,
through the extended serial ports to transmit
data and instructions; and 3) controlling digital
potentiometer adjustment and photoelectric
data collection of the AD collection board and
receiving the photoelectric data.
It provides the BDM/JTAG interface for
debugging software and downloading
application programs. The application software
of the main control board can be updated
through the RS232 serial port.
Communication The communication conversion board is the #2
conversion board bridge used for communication between the
BA40-30-61377 main control board and a computer. It provides
the serial port, network port and USB port for
connecting the main control board; and it
provides the standard DB9 serial port, RJ45
network port and standard USB port for
connecting a computer. Note: Only the serial
port and network port are used now, and other
ports are reserved.
5-4
Reaction carousel The reaction carousel temperature collection #3
temperature board adjusts the signal of the reaction carousel
collection board temperature sensor and controls it for AD
801-BA80-00055-01/ conversion. It provides a serial peripheral
801-BA80-00260-00 interface (SPI) and a power supply jack for the
(Before EDM022) reaction carousel heater and connects with the
wash solution temperature control board via the
slip ring.
Note: In the case of instruments delivered
before EDM022, replace the temperature
collection board with "801-BA80-00260-00 BA80
reaction carousel temperature collection board
(with slip ring and shielding cover)", which
contains a slip ring, a temperature collection
board and a shielding cover. For the
instruments delivered after EDM022, replace
the "801-BA80-00055-01 BA80 reaction carousel
temperature collection board PCBA (EDM022
FRU)" only.
Cleaning fluid The cleaning fluid temperature collection board #4
temperature adjusts the signals of three cleaning fluid
collection board temperature sensors and one environment
248H051-000449-00 temperature sensor and controls them for AD
conversion. It provides a SPI interface for
connecting with the wash temperature control
board.
Control drive board The sample control drive board is used to drive #5
(S) and control the inner and outer sample
051-000205-00 carousels, the sample probe, the sample mixers
and related components.
Control drive board The reagent control drive board drives and #6
(R) controls the reagent carousel inner and outer
051-000204-00 rings, the probe R1/R2, and related
components.
Wash temperature The wash temperature control board drives and #7
control board controls the reagent mixers, cuvette wash
051-000206-00 station, reaction carousel and temperature
control assemblies.
Reagent The reagent refrigeration board is used to: #8
refrigeration board refrigerate reagents via the radiators and
051-000207-00 circulating pump; indicate refrigerating
temperature; drive the fans and the demisting
circuit of the reagent bar code reader; and
powers the ISE module.
Sample probe level The two boards respectively sense the level of #9
sense board samples and reagents, and detect/convert the
051-000362-00 signals of the two vertical obstruct detection
Reagent probe level sensors.
sense board
051-000363-00
5-5
Clog detection The clog detection board detects clogs inside #10
board the sample probe by checking the pressure of
051-000218-00 the fluidic tube when the sample probes
aspirates samples.
AD collection board The AD collection board adjusts the #11
051-000405-00 photoelectric signals output by the preamplifier
board and controls it for AD conversion. It
provides a SPI interface for connecting with the
main control board.
Preamplifier board The preamplifier board converts the signals of #12
051-000213-00 the discrete photodiode array from analog to
digital and then amplifies them.
Pressure detection The pressure detection board checks the #13
board pressure of the vacuum compression pump tube,
051-000216-00 and processes and converts the analog signals
output by the water quality detection board. It
provides a serial port for communication and
transmitting pressure data and water quality
data.
External air pump The external air pump drive board receives the Inside
drive board air pump control signal from the wash the
051-000359-00 temperature control board and controls the external
switch to turn on/off the air pump. It provides air
two interfaces for connecting with the AC pump
cooling fans. module
24V/6A power The 24V/6A power supply board switch on/off Inside
supply board the water inlet pump power supply according to the
BX50-30-89627 the fluidic pressure signals, ensuring proper water
pressure of the water inlet tube. supply
module
AC drive board By receiving control signals from the #14
051-000208-00 sample/reagent control drive board and the
wash temperature control board, the AC drive
board drives the AC pump and AC heater and
allocates power supply to power the whole unit.
DC power supply The DC power supply conversion board receives #15
conversion board the A5V digital, D12V/E12V analog, C12V power
051-000209-00 and B24V power, and then shifts them to the
analog power supply conversion board,
sample/reagent drive control board, and wash
temperature control board.
Five-probe/mixer The five-probe/mixer conversion board is used #16
conversion board to shifts the signals of the sample/reagent
051-000210-00 control drive board, wash temperature control
board, sample/reagent level sense board,
sample/reagent mixer motor, and rotation
speed.
Water quality The water quality detection board converts the #17
detection board quality of the test water into changes of output
051-000211-00 analog voltage.
5-6
12V/30A power The 12V/30A power supply board provides F12V #18
supply board power supply for the radiators.
051-000212-00
Wash bump optical The wash bump optical coupler conversion #19
coupler conversion board is used to shift the cable of the wash
board bump optical coupler.
051-000394-00
Analog power The analog power supply conversion board #20
supply conversion converts the A5V DC/DC digital of the BA40
board power supply assembly into +/-12V analog and
BA38-30-88342 then provides it for the AC collection board and
preamplifier board.
24V/6A power The 24V/6A power supply board is used to power #21
supply board the fans and circulating pump of the reagent
BX50-30-89627 refrigeration board.
12V power supply These boards are used to power the whole unit, #22
board outputting the A12V, A5V digital, D12V/E12V
BA40-30-61623 analog, C12V power, B24V power, and the B12V
power for partial radiators.
24V power supply
board
BA40-30-61625
Power supply
conversion board
BA40-30-61627
5-7
5.4 Locations of the PCBAs
The figure below shows the locations of the PCBAs in the whole unit.
Wash
temperature
control board
Main control board

Analog power supply DC power supply 5-probe/mixer Clog detection
conversion board conversion board conversion board board
Figure 5.1 Front left view
5-8
Figure 5.2 Front right view
Figure 5.3 Rear view
5-9
5.5 Removing PCBAs
To remove a PCBA, unplug the connectors on it and then loosen the retaining
screws.
5-10
5.6 Functions of PCBAs
5.6.1 Main Control Board
Functions and principles
The main control board (051-000203-00) is used to fulfil the following functions:
Communicating with a computer through the serial port to transmit data and
instructions and to update the application programs of the PCBAs.
Communicating with the smart modules, including the ISE module, through the
extended serial ports to transmit data and instructions.
Controlling digital potentiometer adjustment and photoelectric data collection
of the AD collection board and receiving the photoelectric data.
Providing the BDM/JTAG interface for debugging software and downloading
application programs.
Providing the network interface for reservation.
Checking the PCBAs voltage and giving an alarm in certain conditions.
The figure below shows the relation between the main control board and other
PCBAs.
DC power Sample Reagent Wash

AD Reagent
supply control control temperature ISE
conversion
collection refrigeration
drive drive control board module
board board
board board board
Main control board
PC
The functional diagram of the main control board is as shown below.
5-11
Description
PCB layout
The PCB layout of the main control board is as shown below.
5-12
Power
LED
Network
LED
FPGA
LED
Connectors
The main control board includes the following connectors.
Power supply:
Power supply input (J1): 6-pin, providing +/-12V analog and +5V digital for the
PCBAs.
Pin No. Signal Reference Value
1 +12V 11.4~12.6V
2 -12V -11.4~-12.6V
5-13
3 +5V 4.75~5.25V
4 12VGND /
5 12VGND /
6 GND /
Connectors for sending/receiving communication signals:

Connector (J2) for PC: 10-pin, RS232, used for communication with a computer.
1# connector (J3) for smart module: 40-pin, RS422, used for communication
with the sample control drive board.
with the reagent control drive board.
3# connector (J10) for smart module: 40-pin, RS422, used for reservation.
with the wash temperature control board.
5# connector (J6) for smart module: 40-pin, RS422, used for reservation.
Connector (J5) for reagent refrigeration board: 8-pin, RS422, used for
communication with the reagent refrigeration board.
Connector (J7) for AD collection board: DB25, used for communication with
the AD collection board and providing power supply for it.
Connector (J8) for ISE module: 8-pin, used for communication with the ISE
module.
Connector (J9) for ISE bar code reader: 8-pin, used for reservation.
Ethernet connector (J12): 6-pin, used for reservation.
Connectors for debugging:
BDM connector (J13): 26-pin, used for debugging the CPU software.
JTAG connector (J14): 14-pin, used for debugging the FPGA.
Switches and jumpers

The main control board contains the following switches and jumpers.
RST key (S1): used to reset the CPU of the PCBA.
Indicators
The main control board contains the following indicators.
Indicators to indicate power supply:
+12V power supply indicator (D4): green. It is lit when the analyzing unit power
switch is turned on, indicating that the +12V power supply has been connected.
-12V power supply indicator (D17): green. It is lit when the analyzing unit power
switch is turned on, indicating that the -12V power supply has been connected.
5-14
+5V power supply indicator (D16): green. It is lit when the analyzing unit power
switch is turned on, indicating that the +5V power supply has been connected.
+3.3V power supply indicator (D3): green. It is lit when the analyzing unit power
switch is turned on, indicating that the +3.3V power supply has been connected.
Indicators to indicate PCBA functions:
FPGA configuration indicator (D29): orange. It is lit in normal conditions,
which means that the FPGA has been configured successfully.
FPGA function indicator 1 (D25): green. It flashes continuously in normal
conditions, which means that the FPGA is working.
FPGA function indicator 2 (D18): green. It flashes in normal conditions when
the PCBA communicates with a smart module.
FPGA function indicator 3 (D15): green. It flashes in normal conditions when
the PCBA collects AD signals.
FPGA function indicator 4 (D12): green. This indicator has not been defined.
CPU function indicator 1 (D27): green. This indicator has not been defined.
CPU function indicator 2 (D28): green. This indicator has not been defined.
Indicators to indicate network interface:
Network interface Link indicator (D10): green. When it is lit, it indicates the
Ethernet has been connected; when it flashes, it means that the PCBA is
communicating with the Ethernet.
Network interface Full-duplex indicator (D7): green. When it is lit, it indicates
that the Ethernet is working in full-duplex mode.
Network interface 10-T indicator (D11): green. When it is lit, it indicates that the
connection rate of the Ethernet is 10Mbps.
Network interface 100-T indicator (D9): green. When it is lit, it indicates that the
connection rate of the Ethernet is 100Mbps.
Network interface Collision indicator (D8): green. When it is lit, it indicates that
a conflict is detected on Ethernet communication.
Test points
In the following positions of the main control board can signal tests be performed.
J1.1: +12V power supply input. Normal range: 11.4 - 12.6V.
J1.2: -12V power supply input. Normal range: -11.4 - -12.6V.
J1.3: +5V power supply input. Normal range: 4.75 - 5.25V.
C304.1: +3.3V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the
major digital circuits of the PCBA. Normal range: 2.97 - 3.63V.
DDR memory. Normal range: 2.25 - 2.75V.
CPU core. Normal range: 1.35 - 1.65V.
5-15
end joint of the DDR memory . Normal range: 1.13 - 1.38V.
U65.4: +1.2V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the
FPGA core. Normal range: 1.08 - 1.32V.
Installation methods and precautions

Prior to removing the PCBA, disconnect the instrument from the power supply
and wear a pair of antistatic gloves or wrist straps.
Make sure that the connectors are inserted properly into the PCBA.
Check the connectors with clamps and ensure that the clamps have been locked
properly.
Check other connectors and ensure that they are inserted into the end of the
slots.
It requires relatively great force to plug/unplug connectors J3, J4, J6, J10 and J11.
Hold the PCBA by its edge while plugging/unplugging these connectors to
prevent it from being deformed or damaged.
After connecting J7 connector (DB25), tighten the retaining screws on two sides
of it.
5.6.2 Wash Temperature Control Board

The wash temperature control board (051-000206-00) receives commands from the
main control board and then analyzes them; detects execution signals of the cuvette
wash unit, reaction carousel unit and reagent mixer unit and drives these units;
detects the temperature of the temperature sensors and controls the heaters. The
major functions of the PCBA include:
Communicating with the main control unit via serial ports to receive/analyze
instructions, execute relevant operations and return the execution results.
Outputting control signals for relevant execution units.
Receiving position sensor signals of relevant execution units, auto wash bump
prevention signals, and other status signals.
Detecting the temperature of reaction carousel solid heat, cleaning fluid preheat
and the environment, and controlling the heaters.
Receiving fluid level sensor signals from the hydropneumatic system and
pressure signals from the pressure detection board, and controlling/driving
fluidic pumps and valves.
Turning on/off the lamp and detecting the voltage.
The figure below shows the relation between the wash temperature control board
and other PCBAs.
5-16
Communication Power supply assembly
PC
conversion board Adapter board
24V board
12V board
Main control DC power supply

board conversion board
Wash temperature control board
Slip ring
Reaction Cleaning fluid

Pressure 5-probe/mixer
AC drive carousel temperature Air pump
detection conversion
board temperature collection drive board
board board
collection board board
The functional diagram of the wash temperature control board is as shown below.
CUP
Home position and coder sensors of reaction carousel
AD_START Reaction carousel rotary step motor
Main
Mixer vertical step motor
control Serial port
unit D[7:0] Mixer horizontal step motor
COM
RST_CTRL Reaction A[9:0] Mixer step motor
A OE
N RST carousel WE
Wash station vertical step motor
PRST
D unit CS[1:0]
EINT[3:1]
Vertical/horizontal home position and obstruct
detection sensors of mixer
Vertical home position and obstruct detection sensors
of cuvette wash station
Pumps/Valves (Cuvette: 20, probe: 2, pump: 3,
D[7:0] reserved: 7)
A[9:0]
COM
Reagent OE
WE Solid direct heater (1)
mixer unit CS[1:0]
RST EINT[3:1] Fluid level sensor (16+6 reserved)
FPGA
Panel button + Carousel cover sensor (2)
Panel indicator + Electromagnetic lock (2)
D[7:0]
Reac crsl temp
COM A[9:0] collection board
Sensor PT1000(3)
Cuvette OE
Cleaning fluid temp
wash unit WE
collection board
Sensor NTC(4)
CS[1:0]
EINT[3:1]
RST
AC drive AC pump (3)

D[7:0] board AC heater (3)
COM A[9:0]
OE
Temperature WE
control unit CS[1:0]
RST EINT[3:1]
Pressure detection serial port
Description
PCB layout
The PCB layout of the wash temperature control board is as shown below.
5-17
J17 J18 J19 J20 J21
J22
J16
Temp Temp Reac J23

Wash
LED Unit Crsl
Unit
Unit
J24
J15 Unit
LED
J25
FPGA 6 12
J14 LED Rgt 5
4
11
10
Mixer 3
2
9
8
1 7
Unit
J1
J13
J2
Power
LED
J12
J3
Pump J4
&
Valve
LED
J11
J10 J9 J8 J7 J6 J5
Connectors
The wash temperature control board includes the following connectors.
Power supply:
Power supply input (J1): 12-pin, providing +24V(B24V) power, +12V(C12V) power,
+5V(A5V) digital, +12V(D12V) analog, and -12V(E12V) analog for the PCBA.
5-18
1 +24V 23.5-26V
2 +24V 23.5-26V
3 +12V 11.4~12.6V
4 +12V 11.4~12.6V
5 +5V 4.85-5.25V
6 D12V 11.4-12.6V
7 GND /
8 GND /
9 GND /
10 GND /
11 GND /
12 E12V -11.4--12.6V

Connector (J17) for main control board: 20*2-pin RS422, used for serial port
communication with the main control board.
Connector (J18) for reaction carousel temperature collection board: 6*2-pin,
TTL, used for collecting the reaction carousel temperature.
Connector (J19) for cleaning fluid temperature collection board: 10*2-pin, TTL,
used for collecting the cleaning fluid temperature.
Connector (J21) for pressure detection board: 8*1-pin, TTL, used for serial port
communication with the pressure detection board.
Connectors for detecting sensor signals:
Floater signal detection connector (J15): 13*2-pin, TTL, used for checking the
fluid level status.
Moving position signal detection connector (J16): 20*2-pin, TTL, used for
checking moving positions.
Control connectors:
Lamp control connector (J25): 6*1-pin, used for controlling the lamp voltage
and hibernation of the whole unit.
AC load control connector (J10): 10*2-pin, used to control the AC load relay.
Air pump control connector (J8): 2*1-pin, used for controlling the external air
pump.
Drive connectors:
Valve drive connector 1 (J12): 25*2-pin, used for driving the wash valve.
Pump drive connector (J12): 7*2-pin, used for driving the DC pump.
Direct head drive connector (J2): 5*2-pin, used for driving the solid heater of
the reaction carousel.
Motor drive connectors (J2-J7): used for driving motors, J3 for the reaction
carousel stepper motor, J4 for the vertical motor of the reagent mixer assembly,
5-19
J5 for the horizontal motor of the reagent mixer assembly, J6 for the vertical
motor of the wash heads, and J7 for the reagent mixing motor.

The wash temperature control board contains the following switches and jumpers.
RST key (S1): used to reset the CPUs of the four units of the PCBA.
Indicators
The wash temperature control board contains the following indicators.
Power supply indicators:
It is normal that all of the power supply indicators are lit when the analyzing
unit power switch is turned on,
and they should indicate correctly when the system is hibernating.
When the operating software is shut down, indicators +24V(B24V),
+12V(C12V), +12V(D12V) analog, -12V(-12V) analog, and 5V analog are
extinguished, and indicators +5V(A5V) and +3.3V are lit.
+24V(B24V) indicator (D58): yellow-green. When it is lit, it indicates that the
+24V power supply works normally.
+12V(C12V) indicator (D62): yellow-green. When it is lit, it indicates that the
+12V power supply works normally.
+5V(A5V) indicator (D63): yellow-green. When it is lit, it indicates that the +5V
power supply works normally.
+3.3V indicator (D64): yellow-green. When it is lit, it indicates that the +3.3V
power supply works normally.
+12V(D12V) analog indicator (D59): yellow-green. When it is lit, it indicates
that the +12V analog power supply works normally.
-12V(E12V) analog indicator (D60): yellow-green. When it is lit, it indicates that
the -12V analog power supply works normally.
+5V(D12V) analog indicator (D61): yellow-green. When it is lit, it indicates that
the +5V analog power supply works normally.
Working indicators:
FPGA configuration indicator (D105): yellow-green. It is lit when FPGA
configuration is complete.
FPGA working indicator (D3): yellow-green. When it is lit and distinguished
once every second, it indicates that the FPGA is working normally.
Temperature control unit working indicator (D107): yellow-green. When it is lit
and distinguished once every second, it indicates that the temperature control
unit is working normally.
Wash unit working indicator (D108): yellow-green. It is not used and lit all the
time.
Reaction carousel unit working indicator (D106): yellow-green. It is not used and
lit all the time.
5-20
Reagent mixer unit working indicator (D109): yellow-green. It is not used and lit
all the time.
Reaction carousel temperature range indicator (D78): red. It is neither used nor
defined, and it is extinguished all the time.
Reaction carousel temperature range indicator (D79): yellow. It is neither used
nor defined, and it is extinguished all the time.
Reaction carousel temperature range indicator (D77): green. It is neither used
nor defined, and it is extinguished all the time.
Inlet valve (V01) working indicator (D83): yellow-green. When it is lit, it means
that the inlet valve is turned on; and vice versa.
Dilution valve (V06) working indicator (D81): yellow-green. When it is lit, it
means that the dilution valve is turned on; and vice versa.
Cuvette wash phase-1 valve (V14) working indicator (D80): yellow-green. When
it is lit, it means that the cuvette wash phase-1 valve is turned on; and vice versa.
Wipe block wash valve (V20) working indicator (D90): yellow-green. When it is
lit, it means that the wipe block wash valve is turned on; and vice versa.
High-concentration waste discharge valve (V21) working indicator (D89):
yellow-green. When it is lit, it means that the high-concentration waste discharge
valve is turned on; and vice versa.
Low-concentration waste discharge valve (V22) working indicator (D88):
yellow-green. When it is lit, it means that the low-concentration waste discharge
High-concentration waste suction valve (V23) working indicator (D101):
yellow-green. When it is lit, it means that the high-concentration waste suction
Low-concentration waste suction valve (V24) working indicator (D102):
yellow-green. When it is lit, it means that the low-concentration waste suction
High-concentration waste vacuum release valve (V25) working indicator (D103):
yellow-green. When it is lit, it means that the high-concentration waste vacuum
release valve is turned on; and vice versa.
Low-concentration waste vacuum release valve (V26) working indicator (D104):
yellow-green. When it is lit, it means that the low-concentration waste vacuum
release valve is turned on; and vice versa.
5-21
Vacuum container waste discharge valve (V27) working indicator (D97):
yellow-green. When it is lit, it means that the vacuum container waste discharge
Degassing vacuum pump control valve (V28) working indicator (D98):
yellow-green. When it is lit, it means that the degassing vacuum pump control
ISE degassing vacuum valve (V29) working indicator (D99): yellow-green. When
it is lit, it means that the ISE degassing vacuum valve is turned on; and vice
versa.
ISE degassing vacuum pump (P12) working indicator (D100): yellow-green.
When it is lit, it means that the ISE degassing vacuum pump is turned on; and
vice versa.
Dilution pump (P06) working indicator (D92): yellow-green. When it is lit, it
means that the dilution pump is turned on; and vice versa.
Concentrated wash solution pump (P05) working indicator (D50): yellow-green.
When it is lit, it means that the concentrated wash solution pump is turned on;
and vice versa.
Deionized water circulating pump (P03) working indicator (D49): yellow-green.
When it is lit, it means that the deionized water circulating pump is turned on;
and vice versa.
Mixer wash valve (V11) working indicator (D95): yellow-green. When it is lit, it
means that the mixer wash valve is turned on; and vice versa.
Mixer wash valve (V12) working indicator (D96): yellow-green. When it is lit, it
means that the mixer wash valve is turned on; and vice versa.
Indicators (D82, D93, D94, D51, D13, D46, D47, D48) for reserved valves:
yellow-green. When they are lit, it means that the valves are turned on; and vice
versa.
Test points
In the following positions of the wash temperature control board can signal tests be
performed.
+24V test point (TP72): input from J1.1 and J1.2. Normal range: 23.5 26V.
+12V test point (TP71): input from J1.3 and J1.4. Normal range: 11.4 12.6V.
+5V test point (TP70): input from J1.5. Normal range: 4.85 5.25V.
+12V analog test point (TP73): input from J1.6. Normal range: 11.4 12.6V.
-12V analog test point (TP74): input from J1.12. Normal range: -11.4 -12.6V.
+3.3V test point (TP69): input from J1. Normal range: 2.97 3.63V.
+1.2V test point (TP68): input from J1. Normal range: 1.08 1.32V.
+5V analog test point (TP75): input from J1. Normal range: 4.85 5.25V.
Ground test points (TP29, TP39, TP48, TP58, TP76- TP82): input from
J1.7-J11.
5-22
Table 5.1 Running voltage and sustaining voltage of the test points
Test Points Running Sustaining
Voltage Voltage
TP12 1.50 ~ 1.84 0.40 ~ 4.95V
TP39 0.58 ~ 0.72V 0.16 ~ 0.20V
TP9 1.50 ~ 1.84V 0.40 ~ 4.95V
MVREF5 0.64 ~ 0.78V 0.16 ~ 0.20V
MVREF6 0.64 ~ 0.78V 0.16 ~ 0.20V
MVREF7 1.50 ~ 1.84V 0.40 ~ 4.95V
MVREF8 1.50 ~ 1.84V 0.40 ~ 4.95V

properly.
slots.
There are gaps beside connectors J10, J11, J12 and J16. Exercise caution to
prevent bending the connector pins.
It requires relatively great force to plug/unplug connectors J12, J15, J16, and J17.
Hold the PCBA by its edge while plugging/unplugging these connectors to
prevent it from being deformed or damaged.
Motor connectors J2, J3, J4, J5 and J6 have no mistake-proof measures. Make
sure that the cable number corresponds to the connector number.
5.6.3 BA80 Sample Control Drive Board

The BA80 sample control drive board (051-000205-00) drives and controls the inner
and outer sample carousels, sample probe, and sample mixers.
Receiving position sensor signals and obstruct detection signals of relevant
execution units, and detecting the rotation speed of the sample mixer unit.
Connecting with the sample probe level sense board to detect the fluid level and
control the fluid level detection methods.
Connecting with the clog detection board to detect clogs in the sample probe
and give an alarm in certain conditions.
5-23
Controlling the interior/exterior wash valves of the sample probe unit and
sample mixer unit.
Connecting with the reagent control drive board and sending control signals to it,
and turning on/off the interior wash pump P04 and return valve V05.
The figure below shows the relation between the BA80 sample control drive board
and other PCBAs and control objects.
Outer sample carousel home position
optical coupler
Object of
outer crsl
Outer sample carousel coder optical
coupler
Outer sample carousel motor
Shared by
two crsls
Sample bar code reader
Inner sample carousel home position

optical coupler
Object of
inner crsl
Inner sample carousel coder optical
coupler
Inner sample carousel motor
Probe horizontal home position

optical coupler
Main control
Probe horizontal obstruct detection

optical coupler
board
Probe horizontal motor

Probe vertical home position optical
coupler
Probe vertical motor
sample probe
Sample control drive
Object of
Syringe home position optical coupler
board
control drive
Syringe motor
Reagent
board
Probe interior wash valve
Probe exterior wash valve
Fluid level sense board
Clog detection board

conversion board
DC power supply
Mixer horizontal home position

optical coupler
Mixer horizontal motor

Mixer vertical home position optical
sample mixers
coupler
Object of
Mixer vertical motor

Mixer rotation speed detection optical
coupler
Mixer motor
Mixer wash valve
The functional diagram of the control drive board is as shown below.
5-24
Description
PCB layout
The PCB layout of the BA80 sample control drive board is as shown below.
J12 J13 J14 J15 J16 J17

J11
J29 J28
J10
FPGA LED
J18
J9
Unit LED J19
J8
Power Key J20
Lid Press
LED Sensor
J7 Clot LED
Liquid LED Pump & Valve
LED
LED LED
1 2 3 4 5
J6 6 7 8 9 10
J5 J4 J3 J2 J26 J25 J24
J1 J21
J23 J22
Connectors
The BA80 sample control drive board contains the following connectors.
Power supply:
DC power supply input connector (J1)
5-25
Pin No. Signal Reference
Value
1 A+12V 11.4~12.6V
2 +5V 4.85-5.25V
3 +12V 11.4~12.6V
4 +24V 23.5-26V
5 +24V 23.5-26V
6 A-12V -11.4--12.6V
7 GND /
8 GND /
9 GND /
10 GND /

BA80 main control board connector (J10): 40-pin, used for four MCUs (outer
sample carousel, inner sample carousel, sample probe and sample mixers) to
communicate with the main control unit.
Sample bar code reader connector (J7): 10-pin, used for the two sample carousel
units to communicate with the sample bar code reader.
BA80 reagent control drive board connector (J5): 14-pin, used for the sample
probe unit to control the interior wash pump P04 and return valve V05.
BA80 level sense board connector (J2): 10-pin, used for communication between
the sample probe and the sample probe level sense board.
Detection and control connectors:
Optical coupler detection connector (J12): 50-pin, used to detect the position,
coder and mixer rotation speed signals of the four units (outer sample carousel,
inner sample carousel, sample probe unit and sample mixer unit).
Motor drive connectors (J13-J20): 4-pin, used for driving eight stepper motors,
J13 for the outer sample carousel motor, J14 for the inner sample carousel motor,
J15 for the sample probe horizontal motor, J16 for the sample probe vertical
motor, J17 for the sample syringe motor, J18 for the sample mixer horizontal
motor, J19 for the sample mixing motor, and J20 for the sample mixer vertical
motor.
Probe wash valve drive connector (J22): 8-pin, used for controlling the sample
probe interior/exterior wash valves and the sample mixer wash valve.
Sample load button and indicator connector (J23): 8-pin, used for detecting the
two sample load buttons and driving/controlling the two indicators.

The BA80 sample control drive board contains the following switches and jumpers.
Key S7: used to reset the smart modules during debugging of the PCBA. When the
instrument is powered on, parameters need to be configured and key S7 cannot be
used.
5-26
Indicators
The BA80 sample control drive board contains the following indicators.
They are lit when the analyzing unit power switch is turned off, which indicates
that the analyzing unit power switch works normally;
When the instrument is hibernating, all of the indicators are lit.
When the operating software is shut down, indicators +24V(B24V) power,
+12V(C12V) power, A+12V(D12V) analog, and A-12V(-12V) analog are
5V (A5V) power supply indicator (D3): green. It is lit when the instrument is
powered on and extinguished when the instrument is powered off.
3.3V power supply indicator (D1): green. It is lit when the instrument is powered
on and extinguished when the instrument is powered off.
A+12V (D12V) power supply indicator (D5): green. It is lit when the instrument
is powered on and extinguished when the instrument is powered off or
hibernating.
A-12V (E12V) power supply indicator (D6): green. It is lit when the instrument
hibernating.
+12V (C12V) power supply indicator (D4): green. It is lit when the instrument is
powered on and extinguished when the instrument is powered off or
hibernating.
+24V (B24V) power supply indicator (D2): green. It is lit when the instrument is
hibernating.
Function indicators:
Sample probe vertical obstruct indicator (D33): green. It is lit when the sample
probe is collided with an obstacle or disconnected from the level sense board;
and it is extinguished when the instrument is powered off, hibernating or
working normally.
Sample probe level sense indicator (D32): green. It is lit when the instrument
works normally and the sample probe detects the fluid level; and it is
extinguished when the instrument is powered off or hibernating, or when the
sample probe fails to detect the fluid level, or the level sense board is not
installed.
Interior wash pump P04 indicator (D21): green. It is lit when P04 is turned on,
and vice versa.
Interior wash return valve V05 indicator (D50): green. It is lit when V05 is
turned on, and vice versa.
Sample probe interior wash valve V02 indicator (D45): green. It is lit when V02
is turned on, and vice versa.
Sample probe exterior wash valve V07 indicator (D44): green. It is lit when V07
is turned on, and vice versa.
5-27
Sample mixer cleaning fluid wash valve V10 indicator (D46): green. It is lit when
V10 is turned on, and vice versa.
Sample mixer wash solution wash valve V12 indicator (D47): green. It is lit when
V12 is turned on, and vice versa.
Outer sample carousel control button indicator (D22): green. It is lit when the
outer sample carousel control button is pressed and extinguished when the
button is released.
Outer sample carousel control button indicator (D23): green. It is lit when the
outer sample carousel control button is pressed and extinguished when the
button is released.
Outer sample carousel running indicator (D16): green. It is lit when the outer
sample carousel is rotating and extinguished when the carousel stops rotating.
Outer sample carousel running indicator (D17): green. It is lit when the outer
sample carousel is rotating and extinguished when the carousel stops rotating.
Sample carousel cover indicator (D25): green. It is lit when the sample carousel
cover is closed; and it is extinguished when the sample carousel cover is closed
or the carousel cover sensor is disconnected.
Test points
In the following positions of the BA80 control drive board can signal tests be
performed.
+24V(B24V) power supply: test point of +24V. Normal voltage range: 21.6
26.4V DC.
+12V(C12V) power supply: test point of +12V. Normal voltage range: 11.4
12.6V DC.
A+12V(D12V) power supply: test point of A+12V. Normal voltage range: 11.4
12.6V DC.
A-12V(E12V) power supply: test point of A-12V. Normal voltage range: -11.4
-12.6V DC.
3.3V power supply: test point of +3V3. Normal voltage range: 3.24V 3.47V
DC.
DC.
Test points Running Voltage Sustaining Voltage
MVREF1 1.50 ~ 1.84 0.40 ~ 4.95V
MVREF2 1.50 ~ 1.84 0.40 ~ 4.95V
MVREF3 0.58 ~ 0.72V 0.16 ~ 0.20V
MVREF4 1.50 ~ 1.84V 0.40 ~ 4.95V
MVREF5 0.64 ~ 0.78V 0.16 ~ 0.20V
MVREF6 0.64 ~ 0.78V 0.16 ~ 0.20V
MVREF7 1.50 ~ 1.84V 0.40 ~ 4.95V
5-28
MVREF8 1.50 ~ 1.84V 0.40 ~ 4.95V

to prevent arcing and component damage due to hot swapping.
Before removing the PCBA, wear a pair of antistatic gloves or wrist straps to
prevent antistatic damage on it.
Make sure that the connectors are inserted properly into the PCBA, especially
when the PCBAs bracket is restored.
properly.
slots.
It requires relatively great force to plug/unplug connectors J10 and J12. Hold
the PCBA by its edge while plugging/unplugging these connectors to prevent it
from being deformed or damaged.
When plugging/unplugging motor cables, exercise caution to prevent damaging
the aluminum electrolytic capacitor near the connectors.
5.6.4 BA80 Reagent Control Drive Board

The BA80 reagent control drive board (051-000204-00) drives and controls the
reagent carousel inner and outer rings, and probes R1/R2.
Receiving position sensor signals and obstruct detection signals of relevant
execution units, and detecting the rotation speed of the sample mixer unit.
Connecting with the two reagent probe level sense boards to detect the fluid
level and control the fluid level detection methods.
Controlling the interior/exterior wash valves, interior wash pump P04, and
return valve V05 of the two reagent probe units.
Connecting with the sample control drive board and receiving sample probe
control signals from it, and turning on/off the interior wash pump P04 and
return valve V05.
The figure below shows the relation between the BA80 reagent control drive board
and other PCBAs and control objects.
5-29
Reagent carousel outer ring home
position optical couple
outer ring
Object of
Reagent carousel outer ring coder
optical coupler
Reagent carousel outer ring motor
Shared by
two rings
Regent bar code reader
Reagent carousel proximity sensor
Reagent carousel inner ring home

position optical couple
inner ring
Object of
Reagent carousel inner ring coder
optical coupler
Reagent carousel inner ring motor
Probe R1 horizontal home position

optical coupler
Probe R1 horizontal obstruct
detection optical coupler
Main control
Probe R1 horizontal motor

board
Probe R1 vertical home position

optical coupler
Object of
probe R1
Probe R1 vertical motor
R1 syringe home position optical
coupler
Reagent control drive R1 syringe motor
board Probe R1 interior wash valve

Sample control
drive board
Probe R1 exterior wash valve
Probe R1 fluid level sense board
AC drive board (P04 control
two probes
interface)
Shared by
Probe interior wash return valve
Probe R2 horizontal home position

DC power supply
conversion board
optical coupler
Probe R2 horizontal obstruct
detection optical coupler
Probe R2 horizontal motor
Probe R2 vertical home position
optical coupler
Object of
probe R2
Probe R2 vertical motor
R2 syringe home position optical
coupler
R2 syringe motor
Probe R2 interior wash valve
Probe R2 exterior wash valve
Probe R2 fluid level sense board
The functional diagram of the control drive board is as shown below.
5-30
Cuvette: serial port RS422 differential 6 extended serial
photoelectric collection starting signal ports
Serial port: RS422

differential Lamp control
Bus
Unit 1
2 panel buttons
Voltage and indicators
monitoring
Serial port: RS422
Main control board
2 electromagnetic
differential Bus locks
Unit 2 F
P 2 proximity
G sensors
Serial port: RS422 A

differential Bus
Unit 3 8 motor drives
34 position
sensors
Serial port: RS422
differential Bus
Unit 4 8 pumps/valves
2 DC motors
Description
PCB layout
The PCB layout of the BA80 reagent control drive board is as shown below.
Connectors
The BA80 reagent control drive board contains the following connectors.
Power supply:
DC power supply input connector (J1)
5-31
BA80 main control board connector (J10): 40-pin, used for four MCUs (reagent
carousel inner ring, reagent carousel outer ring, probe R1 unit, and probe R2
unit) to communicate with the main control unit.
Reagent bar code reader connector (J7): 10-pin, used for the two reagent
carousel units to communicate with the reagent bar code reader.
BA80 sample control drive board connector (J5): 14-pin, used to receive control
signals of the interior wash pump P04 and return valve V05 from the sample
probe unit.
BA80 400l reagent probe level sense board connectors (J2, J3): 10-pin. J2 is
used for communication between the probe R1 unit and the probe R1 level
sense board; and J3 is used for communication between the probe R2 unit and
the probe R2 level sense board. The communication signals include: serial port
signal, level sense signal, and probe vertical obstruction signal.
Detection and control connectors:
Optical coupler detection connector (J12): 50-pin, used to detect the position
and coder signals of the four units (two probe units and two carousel units).
Motor drive connectors (J13-J20): 4-pin, used for driving stepper motors, J13 for
the reagent carousel outer ring motor, J14 for the reagent carousel inner ring
motor, J15 for the probe R1 horizontal motor, J16 for the probe R1 vertical
motor, J17 for the R1 syringe motor, J18 for the probe R2 horizontal motor, J19
for the probe R2 vertical motor, and J20 for the R2 syringe motor.
Probe wash valve drive connector (J22): 8-pin, used for controlling the
interior/exterior wash valves of the two probe units.
Return valve drive connector (J21): 8-pin, used for controlling the interior wash
return valves of the three probe units.
DC pump control connector (J25): 6-pin, used for controlling the interior wash
pumps of the three probe units.
Reagent load button and indicator connector (J23): 8-pin, used for detecting the
two reagent load buttons and driving/controlling the two indicators.
Reagent carousel proximity sensor connector (J23): 8-pin, used for detecting
reagent carousel access to the sensor.
P04V05 cross control connector (J5): 14-pin, used for receiving sample probe
control signals and combining them with those of the two reagent probe units,
and for driving/controlling the interior wash pump P04 and interior wash return
valve V05.
Connectors for debugging:
MCU JTAG debugging connector (J9): used for debugging of the four MCUs.
FPGA JTAG debugging and downloading connector (J27): used for debugging
and downloading of the FPGA.
Pump/Valve fixture test connector (J30): 18-pin, used for connecting an external
LED board and testing the pumps and valves.

The BA80 reagent control drive board contains the following switches and jumpers.
5-32
Key S7: used to reset the smart modules during debugging of the PCBA. When the
instrument is powered on, parameters need to be configured and key S7 cannot be
used.
Indicators
The BA80 reagent control drive board contains the following indicators.
They are lit when the analyzing unit power switch is turned off, which indicates
that the analyzing unit power switch works normally;
When the instrument is hibernating, all of the indicators are lit.
When the operating software is shut down, indicators +24V(B24V) power,
+12V(C12V) power, A+12V(D12V) analog, and A-12V(-12V) analog are
5V power supply indicator (D3): green. It is lit when the instrument is powered
3.3V power supply indicator (D1): green. It is lit when the instrument is powered
A+12V (D12V) power supply indicator (D5): green. It is lit when the instrument
hibernating.
A-12V (-12V) power supply indicator (D6): green. It is lit when the instrument is
hibernating.
+12V (C12V) power supply indicator (D4): green. It is lit when the instrument is
hibernating.
+24V (B24V) power supply indicator (D2): green. It is lit when the instrument is
hibernating.
Function indicators:
Probe R1 vertical obstruct indicator (D33): green. It is lit when the probe R1 is
collided with an obstacle or disconnected from the level sense board; and it is
extinguished when the instrument is powered off, hibernating or working
normally.
Probe R1 level sense indicator (D32): green. It is lit when the instrument works
normally and the probe R1 detects the fluid level; and it is extinguished when the
instrument is powered off or hibernating, or when the probe R1 fails to detect
the fluid level, or the level sense board is not installed.
Probe R2 vertical obstruct indicator (D34): green. It is lit when the probe R2 is
collided with an obstacle or disconnected from the level sense board; and it is
extinguished when the instrument is powered off, hibernating or working
normally.
Probe R2 level sense indicator (D35): green. It is lit when the instrument works
normally and the probe R2 detects the fluid level; and it is extinguished when the
5-33
instrument is powered off or hibernating, or when the probe R2 fails to detect
the fluid level, or the level sense board is not installed.
Interior wash pump P04 indicator (D21): green. It is lit when P04 is turned on,
and vice versa.
Interior wash return valve V05 indicator (D50): green. It is lit when V05 is
Probe R1 interior wash valve V03 indicator (D45): green. It is lit when V03 is
turned on, and it is extinguished when V03 is turned off.
Probe R1 exterior wash valve indicator (D44): green. It is lit when V08 is turned
on, and vice versa.
Reagent carousel outer ring control button indicator (D22): green. It is lit when
the reagent carousel outer ring control button is pressed and extinguished when
the button is released.
Reagent carousel outer ring control button indicator (D23): green. It is lit when
the reagent carousel outer ring control button is pressed and extinguished when
the button is released.
Reagent carousel outer ring running indicator (D16): green. It is lit when the
reagent carousel outer ring is rotating and extinguished when the carousel stops
rotating.
Reagent carousel outer ring running indicator (D17): green. It is lit when the
reagent carousel outer ring is rotating and extinguished when the carousel stops
rotating.
Reagent carousel cover indicator (D25): green. It is lit when the reagent carousel
cover is closed; and it is extinguished when the reagent carousel cover is closed
or the carousel cover sensor is disconnected.
Test points
In the following positions of the BA80 control drive board can signal tests be
performed.
+24V(B24V) power supply: test point of +24V. Normal voltage range: 21.6
26.4V DC.
+12V(C12V) power supply: test point of +12V. Normal voltage range: 11.4
12.6V DC.
A+12V(D12V) power supply: test point of A+12V. Normal voltage range: 11.4
12.6V DC.
A-12V(E12V) power supply: test point of A-12V. Normal voltage range: -11.4
-12.6V DC.
DC.
5-34
DC.
MVREF1 1.80 ~ 2.20V 0. 45 ~ 0.55V
MVREF2 1.50 ~ 1.84V 0.40 ~ 4.95V
MVREF3 0.64 ~ 0.78V 0.16 ~ 0.20V
MVREF4 1.50 ~ 1.84V 0.40 ~ 4.95V
MVREF5 1.04 ~ 1.28V 0.25 ~ 0.31V
MVREF6 0.64 ~ 0.78V 0.16 ~ 0.20V
MVREF7 1.50 ~ 1.84V 0.40 ~ 4.95V
MVREF8 1.04 ~ 1.28V 0.25 ~ 0.31V

to prevent arcing and component damage due to hot swapping.
Before removing the PCBA, wear a pair of antistatic gloves or wrist straps to
prevent antistatic damage on it.
Make sure that the connectors are inserted properly into the PCBA, especially
when the PCBAs bracket is restored.
properly.
slots.
It requires relatively great force to plug/unplug connectors J10 and J12. Hold
the PCBA by its edge while plugging/unplugging these connectors to prevent it
When plugging/unplugging motor cables, exercise caution to prevent damaging
the aluminum electrolytic capacitor near the connectors.
5.6.5 AC Drive Board

The major functions of the PCBA include:
Receiving AC input from the main power supply, and then shifting it to the
BA40 power supply assembly, BA80 12V/30A power supply board and 24V/6A
power supply board.
Receiving control signals from the wash temperature control board to drive three
AC pumps (waste pump P07, cuvette wash vacuum pump P08, and degassing
vacuum pump P09) and three AC heaters (whole unit deionized water heater
HEA01, wash solution heater HEA02, and cleaning fluid heater HEA03).
5-35
Receiving signals and 24V power supply from the BA80 reagent control drive
board to output an adjustable voltage between 16V-23V and drive the interior
wash pump P04.
Receiving control signals from the BA80 reagent refrigeration board to drive the
refrigeration circulating AC pump P02. This function is reserved and only
applicable to an AC pump.
Converting the 110V AC into 220V AC, which is used to power AC pumps.
The figure below shows the relation between the AC drive board and other PCBAs
and control objects.
Description
PCB layout
The PCB layout of the AC drive board is as shown below.
5-36
D8
D19
D10 D9 D18
D15 D16 D7
Connectors
The AC drive board contains the following connectors. Refer to the whole unit
wiring diagram for definition of the connector pins.
Power supply:
AC input (J2): alternating current input to J2.
AC output (J1): alternating current output from J1 to power supply assembly.
AC output (J11): alternating current output from J11 to 24V/6A power supply
board.
AC output (J12): alternating current output from J12 to BA80 12V/30A power
supply board.
AC output (J3): alternating current output from J3 to three heaters.
AC output (J10): alternating current output from J10 to four AC pumps, P02 of
which is reserved.
AC output (J8): AC 110V output from J8 to a linear transformer on instruments
powered by 110V AC. This function is not applicable to instruments powered by
220V AC.
AC input (J9): AC 220V input through J9 to a linear transformer on instruments
powered by 110V AC. This function is not applicable to instruments powered by
220V AC.
Adjustable DC voltage output (J4): DC voltage output from J4 to interior wash
pump P04.
5-37
Reagent refrigeration circulating pump control connector (J7): 3-pin, 12V DC,
used for controlling current-limiting delay.
BA80 wash temperature control board connector (J6): 14-pin, 12V DC, used for
controlling the switches of the DC heaters and DC pumps.
BA80 reagent control drive board connector (J5): 6-pin, 24V DC and 6V DC,
used for controlling the P04s switch and input of the 24V power supply.

The AC drive board contains the following switches.
Voltage selection switch (S1): A transformer is used on instruments powered by
110V AC, and the S1 switch is placed to the 110V AC position; no transformer is
used on instruments powered by 220V AC, and the S1 switch is placed to the 220V
AC position.
Indicators
The AC drive board contains the following indicators.
Interior wash pump P04 (D8): green. It is lit during cleaning of probe interiors
and weak in other statuses.
Whole unit deionized water heater HEA01 (D15): green. It is lit during heating
of deionized water used for cleaning the whole unit, and it is extinguished in
other statuses.
Wash solution heater HEA02 (D16): green. It is lit during heating of wash
solution, and it is extinguished in other statuses.
Cleaning fluid heater HEA03 (D7): green. It is lit during heating of cleaning
fluid, and it is extinguished in other statuses.
Cuvette wash vacuum pump P03 (D9): green. It is lit when cuvette wash vacuum
is turned on, and it is extinguished when cuvette wash vacuum is turned off.
Waste pump P07 (D10): green. It is lit when the waste pump is turned on, and it
is extinguished when the waste pump is turned off.
Degassing vacuum pump P09 (D18): green. It is lit when the degassing vacuum
pump is turned on, and it is extinguished when the degassing vacuum pump is
turned off.
Current-limiting indicator (D19): green. It is lit when instruments powered by
110V AC are powered on, and it is extinguished when instruments powered by
220V AC are powered off.
Test points
In the following positions of the AC drive board can signal tests be performed.
N/A.
5-38
Please note that most parts of the PCBA are connected to an AC power supply.
Do not operate on the PCBA until disconnecting it from the power supply.
When fixing the AC input connector with a screw, make sure that the connector
is tightened properly in order to prevent it from dropping off during operation,
which may cause electric shock.
properly.
slots.
Pay attention to the position of switch S1. Do not move the switch randomly to
ensure that the AC pump can work normally.
When adjusting the fluidic flow, exercise caution to avoid touching the
high-voltage wires or the protection tube.
5.6.6 Reagent Refrigeration Board

The reagent refrigeration board is relatively independent from the entire hardware
system and has the following major functions:
Refrigeration control and drive: controlling the switch of the radiators and
refrigerating the reagent compartment and inner sample carousel to keep the
temperature within certain range.
Control of the refrigeration temperature indicator.
Control of cooling fans and demisting.
Monitoring working voltage of the PCBA.
Controlling and driving the refrigeration circulating pump.
Providing power supply for the ISE module.
The functional diagram of the reagent refrigeration board is as shown below.
5-39
Rgt
Refrigeration chamber Refrig temp Refrig temp
temp monitoring PC
drive monitoring indication
10
Main
radiators control
board
Reagent
Circulating
refrigeration Circulating
pump
control drive pump
MCU
ISE
Lamp fan 5V module
Fan
Air pump fan feedback 24V ISE
monitoring Voltage Voltage
transforming
monitoring
power
Refrigeration fan supply
Liquid pump
radiating fan Bar code
Power demisting
ISE radiating fan (reserved)
supply
Description
PCB layout
The PCB layout of the reagent refrigeration board is as shown below.
5-40
J17 J18 J19 J20 J21 J25 J22 J23
J16 D81 D91 D90 D89 D58
J15
Power LEDs
J14 S1
J13 J1
J10 J11
D88
J2
J24 D79
J9
D75 D74 D54 D55 D56
J8
J7 J6 J5 J4 J3
Connectors
The reagent refrigeration board includes the following connectors.
Power supply:
Power supply input connectors (J1, J2, J3): providing F12V refrigeration, B12V
refrigeration, C24V fan, and 24V ISE for the PCBAs.
Connector Pin No. Signal Reference Function
Value
J1 1, 2 F12V 11.4~12.6V Refrigeration power
3, 4 GND 0 supply input: used for
loading the
corresponding radiators
J5/J6/J7.
J2 1, 2 B12V 11.4~12.6V Refrigeration power
3, 4 GND 0 supply input: used for
loading the
corresponding radiators
J3/J4 and the PCBA.
J22 1 ISE24V 23.8~25.2V The A24V provided by the
5 ISE24V GND 0 power supply assembly is
converted by the
refrigeration board into
5V and 24V, which are
then used to power the
ISE module.
4 C24V 23.8~25.2V 24V power supply input
8 GND 0 for cooling fans.
5-41
Power supply output connector (J23): providing ISE24V and ISE5V for the ISE
module, among which ISE5V is converted from ISE24V by the refrigeration board.
Connector Pin No. Signal Reference
Value
J23 1 ISE5V 4.75~5.25V
4 GND 0
3 ISE24V 23.8~25.2V
6 GND 0
Radiator connectors (J3-J7): providing power supply for the radiators.

Connector Pin Signal Reference
No. Value
J3~J7 1 1 radiator 0V for ON
and 12V for
OFF.
3 12V
2 1 radiator 0V for ON
and 12V for
OFF.
4 12V
Demisting circuit connector (J9): providing power supply for the demisting heater.
No. Value
J9 1 1 demisting 12V
2 heater /
3 /
4 0
Temperature protection switch connector (J24): receiving signals of the temperature

protection switch.
No. Value
J24 1 1 temperature 0V
2 protection 0V
switch
3 1 temperature 0V
4 protection 0V
switch
Fan connector (J10): providing 12V power supply for the cooling fans and checking
the fan status.
No. Value
J10 1 F12V 12V
5-42
No. Value
2 ISE fans Below 0.5V
feedback signal
3 Gnd 0V
4 / 12V
5 / /
6 / 0V
7 F12V 12V
8 Light source Below 0.5V
fans feedback
signal
9 Gnd 0V
Temperature sensor connectors (J15, J16): checking temperature of the refrigeration

compartment and refrigeration board.
No. Value
J15 1 Shielding 0V
ground
2 GND 0V
3 Temperature /
sensor signal of
the
refrigeration
board
J16 1 Shielding 0V
ground
2 GND 0V
3 Temperature /
sensor signal of
the
refrigeration
compartment
Fan connector (J19): providing 24V power supply for the 1air pump fan and
checking the fan status.
No. Value
J19 1 / /
2 / /
3 / /
4 C24V 24V
5 Air pump Below 0.5V
radiating
feedback signal
6 Gnd 0V
5-43
the fan status.
No. Value
J20 1 / /
2 / /
3 / /
4 C24V 24V
5 Fluidic pump Below 0.5V
radiating
feedback signal
6 Gnd 0V
the fan status.
No. Value
J21 1 C24V 24V
2 Cooling fan 1s Below 0.5V
feedback signal
3 Gnd 0V
4 C24V 24V
5 Cooling fan 2s Below 0.5V
feedback signal
6 Gnd 0V
Refrigeration circulating pump connector (J25): providing power supply for the
refrigeration circulating pump and turning it on/off.
No. Value
J25 1 C24V 24V
2 GND Off: 24V
On: 0V

Main control board serial port (J17): 8-pin, used for communicating with the main
control board.
Switches
The reagent refrigeration board contains the following switches.
RST key (S1): used to reset the CPU of the PCBA.
Indicators
5-44
The main control board contains the following indicators.
Power supply:
Sequence Function Color Description
No.
D41 ISE5V Green When it is lit, it indicates
that the power supply
works normally.
D50 ISE24V Green When it is lit, it indicates
works normally.
D45 C24V Green When it is lit, it indicates
works normally.
D48 VCC Green When it is lit, it indicates
works normally.
D47 B12V Green When it is lit, it indicates
works normally.
D49 VDD Green When it is lit, it indicates
works normally.
D46 F12V Green When it is lit, it indicates
works normally.

No.
D58 Indicating status of Green When it is lit, it indicates that
the refrigeration the refrigeration circulating
circulating pump pump is working.
the radiator the radiator is working.
D79 Indicating status of Red When it is lit, it indicates that
the lamp fan the fan goes wrong.
the ISE fan the fan goes wrong.
5-45
No.
the air pump fan the fan goes wrong.
the fluidic pump the fan goes wrong.
fan
cooling fan 1 the fan goes wrong.
cooling fan 2 the fan goes wrong.

properly.
slots.
5.6.7 Five-Probe/Mixer Conversion Board

The five-probe/mixer conversion board is intended for the following functions:
Shifting signals between the reagent control drive board and the probe R1 level
sense board.
Shifting signals between the reagent control drive board and the probe R2 level
sense board.
Shifting signals between the sample control drive board and the sample probe
level sense board.
Shifting mixer motor drive signals between the sample control drive board and
the sample mixers.
Shifting mixer motor rotation speed signals between the sample control drive
board and the sample mixers.
Shifting mixer motor drive signals between the wash temperature control board
and the reagent mixers.
Shifting mixer motor rotation speed signals between the wash temperature
control board and the reagent mixers.
Description
The PCB layout of the five probe/mixer conversion board is as shown below.
5-46
Connectors
J1: probe R1 level sense connector for the reagent control drive board.
J2: probe R2 level sense connector for the reagent control drive board.
J3: sample probe level sense connector for the sample control drive board.
The signals of connectors J1, J2 and J3 are shown in the table below.
Pin No. Signal Name I/O Description Valid Level
and Type
1 AGND / Analog ground /
2 RAMn O Vertical obstruction signal TTL
3 LLSn O Level sense signal TTL
4 DVPP / Power supply D12V /
5 EVPP / Power supply E12V /
6 TXD-Ln I Serial port sending signal TTL
7 RST-Ln I Reset signal (reserved) TTL
8 RXD-Ln O Serial port received signal TTL
9 PSEN-Ln I Downloading enable signal TTL
(reserved)
10 / Shielding ground /
J4: sample mixer rotation speed sensor connector for the sample control drive board.
J6: reagent mixer rotation speed sensor connector for the reagent control drive
board.
The signals of connectors J4 and J6 are shown in the table below.
and Type
1 GND / Ground /
2 PHO I Mixer motor sensor TTL
3 VCC / Power supply A5V /
4 GND / Ground /
J5: sample mixer motor connector for the sample control drive board.
J7: reagent mixer motor connector for the reagent control drive board.
5-47
and Type
1 A+ I Winding A+ 0/24V
2 A- I Winding A- 0/24V
3 B+ I Winding B+ 0/24V
4 B- I Winding B- 0/24V
J8: connector for reagent mixer motor and reagent mixer rotation speed sensor.
J9: connector for sample mixer motor and sample mixer rotation speed sensor.
and Type
1 GND / Ground /
2 PHO I Mixer motor sensor TTL
3 VCC / Power supply A5V /
4 GND / Ground /
6 A+ I Winding A+ 0/24V
7 A- I Winding A- 0/24V
8 B+ I Winding B+ 0/24V
9 B- I Winding B- 0/24V
J10: connector for the sample probe level sense board.

J11: connector for the probe R2 level sense board.
J12: connector for the probe R1 level sense board.
The signals of connectors J10, J11 and J12 are shown in the table below.
and Type
2 RAMn O Vertical obstruction signal TTL
3 LLSn O Level sense signal TTL
4 DVPP / Power supply D12V /
5 EVPP / Power supply E12V /
6 TXD-Ln I Serial port sending signal TTL
7 RXD-Ln O Serial port received signal TTL
8 NC NC NC NC
5-48
The PCBA is narrow and fragile. Hold the PCBA by its edge while
plugging/unplugging the connectors to prevent it from being deformed or
damaged.
5.6.8 External Air Pump Drive Board

Function
The external air pump drive board is used to:
Receive the air pump control signals and drive/control the external AC air
pump.
Provide drive connectors for two AC fans.
Description
The functional diagram of the external air pump drive board is as shown below.
The PCB layout of the air pump drive board is as shown below.
Connectors
J1: connector for external AC 220V/110V input.
No. Description
1 220V/110V AC N
2 NC
5-49
No. Description
3 220V/110V AC L
J2/J3: connectors for AC fan power supply output.

No. Description
1 220V/110V AC N
2 NC
3 220V/110V AC L
J4: connectors for AC air pump power supply output.

No. Description
1 220V/110V AC N
2 NC
3 220V/110V AC L
J5: connector for AC air pump control signal input.

No. Description
1 OUT_PUMP_CTRL
2 NC
3 +12V
Indicators
Indicators for sending/receiving communication signals:
AC air pump control signal indicator (D2): red. When it is lit, it indicates that the AC
air pump control signal is valid and the air pump is working normally.
5.6.9 Communication Conversion Board

Function
The communication conversion board is intended for the following functions:
Providing connectors for the main control board: serial port, network interface,
and USB interface.
Providing connectors for the control console (computer): standard DB9 serial
port, RJ45 network interface, and standard USB interface.
Shifting, isolating and protecting the signals received at the connectors
connecting the main control board and the control console.
Description
The PCB layout of the communication conversion board is as shown below.
5-50
Top view:
Bottom view:
Connectors
J1: USB interface to connect a computer. (Reserved)
J2: DB9 serial port to connect a computer.
J3: serial port communication interface to connect the main control board.
J4: USB interface to connect the main control board.
J5: standard RJ45 network interface to connect a computer.
J6: Ethernet interface to connect the main control board.
Indicators
N/A
5.6.10 Reaction Carousel Temperature Collection Board

The instrument has one reaction carousel temperature collection board, which is
used to:
Collect/Convert the reaction carouse temperature sensor signals and output
them to the wash temperature control board.
Provide the SPI interface and reaction carousel heater power supply connector,
and connect the wash temperature control board via the slip ring to control the
heater.
The functional diagram of the reaction carousel temperature collection board is as

shown below.
5-51
Temp sensor 1
Reaction Temp sensor 2

Wash carousel
Slip ring
temperature Temp sensor 3
control
temperature
board collection
Temp protection
board switch
Heater
Description
PCB layout
The PCB layout of the reaction carousel temperature collection board is as shown
below.
J5 J4 J1 J2 J3
D2
D1
J6
Connectors
The reaction carousel temperature collection board contains the following
connectors.
Connectors 1-3 (J1-J3) for reaction carousel temperature sensor: 3-pin. Used to
connect the reaction carousel temperature sensor with the temperature detection
circuit.
Pin No. Signal I/O Description Valid Level and
Name Type
1 SHIELD / Shielded wire of /
sensor
2 REF I Signal cable of /
sensor
3 PT1000 I Signal cable of /
sensor
5-52
Heater connector (J4): 2-pin. Used to connect the heater with the temperature
detection circuit.
Name Type
1 +24V / Power supply of /
heater
2 SW / Connecting with the /
temperature
protection switch
Temperature protection switch connector (J5): 2-pin. Used to connect the

temperature protection switch with the temperature detection circuit.
Name Type
1 SW / Connecting with the /
temperature
protection switch
2 HEATER / Heater control signal /
Connector (J6) for connecting the reaction carousel temperature collection board and
the slip ring: 20-pin. Used to connect the sample probe (or reagent probe) with the
temperature detection circuit.
and Type
1 +24V / Positive pole of /
the heater
the heater
the heater
the heater
5 HEATER / Negative pole of /
the heater
the heater
the heater
the heater
9 SYNC_ADT_I I Synchronous 5V TTL
input signal of
AD
10 DIN_ADT_I I Data input signal 5V TTL
of AD
5-53
and Type
11 CLK_ADT_I I Clock input 5V TTL
signal of AD
12 DOUT_ADT_O O Data output 5V TTL
signal of AD
13 BUSY_ADT_O O Busy output 5V TTL
signal of AD
14 NC / / /
15 NC / / /
16 S2_B_I I Control signals of 5V TTL
multiplexer
switch
17 S2_A_I I Control signals of 5V TTL
multiplexer
switch
18 VPP / 12V power /
supply input
20 SHIELD / Shielding ground 5V TTL
Indicators
The reaction carousel temperature collection board contains the following indicators.
+12V power supply indicator (D1): green. When it is lit, it indicates that the
+12V power supply has been connected.
+5V power supply indicator (D2): green. When it is lit, it indicates that the +5V
power supply has been connected.
Test points
In the following positions of the reaction carousel temperature collection board can
signal tests be performed.
VPP1: +12V power supply input. Normal range: 12V5%, that is, 11.4-12.6V.
VCCA: +5V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the
analog parts of the PCBA. Normal range: 5V5%, that is, 4.75-5.25V.
VCCD: +5V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the
digital parts of the PCBA. Normal range: 5V5%, that is, 4.75-5.25V.
AGND: reaction carousel temperature collection board ground.
T1: converted analog input voltage of temperature sensor 1.
REF: reference voltage.

5-54
Make sure that the connectors are inserted properly into the end of the slots on
the PCBA.
It requires great force to plug/unplug the connectors. Hold the PCBA by its
edge while plugging/unplugging the connectors to prevent it from being
deformed or damaged.
5.6.11 Cleaning Fluid Temperature Collection Board

Function
The instrument has one cleaning fluid temperature collection board, which is mainly
used to:
Process, collect and AD-convert signals of three cleaning fluid temperature sensors
and of one environment temperature sensor. The cleaning fluid temperature
collection board is connected with the wash temperature control board.
The functional diagram of the cleaning fluid temperature collection board is as
shown below.
Description
The PCB layout of the cleaning fluid temperature collection board is as shown
below.
Connectors
The cleaning fluid temperature collection board contains the following connectors:
Temperature sensor connectors 1-4 (J1-J4): 3-pin, used to connect the temperature
sensor with the temperature detection circuit.
5-55
Name Type
1 SHIELD / Shielded wire of sensor /
2 AGND / Signal cable of sensor /
(analog ground)
3 NTC I Signal cable of sensor Analog
Connector J5 for wash temperature control board: 20-pin, used to power the PCBA
and transmit/control the signals.
Name Type
1 SGND / Enclosure ground /
2 SGND / Enclosure ground /
3 CS I AD chip selection input TTL, valid in the
case of low level.
4 NC / NC /
5 SDO O AD chip data output TTL
6 SCLK I AD chip clock input TTL
7 NC / NC /
8 NC / NC /
9 NC / NC /
10 MUX_A I Channel A TTL
11 VPP / 12V power supply input /
12 MUX_B I Channel B TTL
13 GND / Ground /
14 GND / Ground /
15 GND / Ground /
16 NC / NC /
17 NC / NC /
18 NC / NC /
19 NC / NC /
20 NC / NC /
Indicators
The cleaning fluid temperature collection board contains the following indicators.
Test points
5-56
In the following positions of the cleaning fluid temperature collection board can
signal tests be performed.
VPP: +12V power supply input. Normal range: 12V5%, that is, 11.4-12.6V.
AVCC: +5V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the
analog parts of the PCBA. Normal range: 5V5%, that is, 4.75-5.25V.
VCC: +5V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the digital
parts of the PCBA. Normal range: 5V5%, that is, 4.75-5.25V.
GND1 and GND2: grounding terminals of the cleaning fluid temperature
collection board.
AIN: AD collection signal test point.
REF: reference voltage.

the PCBA.
5.6.12 AD Collection Board

The AD collection board is intended to implement the following functions:
Adjusting gains of 12 photoelectric signals via a digital potentiometer.
Controlling the channel selection switch to switch among 12 channel signals at
different time.
Converting photoelectric analog signals into digital signals via an AD converter
and then outputting the signals.
The figure below shows the relation between the AD collection board and other
PCBAs.
Preamplifier
board
AD collection
board
Main control board
The functional diagram of the AD collection board is as shown below.
5-57
Preamplifier board
Gain adjustment for 12 analog signals
Main control board
Channel selection
ADC
switch
AD collection board
Description
PCB layout
The PCB layout of the AD collection board is as shown below.
VDD AGND J2 J4 J1 J3 D14 D13
VSS
VG1-VG12
AGND2
GND VCC RC P1
D15
Connectors
The AD collection board contains the following connectors.
Power supply:
Power supply output connector (J4): 4-pin, used to provide +12V and -12V power
supplies for the preamplifier board.
5-58
1 +12V 11.4~12.6V
2 AGND /
3 -12V -11.4~-12.6V
4 SGND /
Power supply output connector (J1): 3-pin, used to provide +12V and -12V power
supplies (compatible with the BA40/BA38) for the preamplifier board.
Value
1 +12V 11.4~12.6V
2 AGND /
3 -12V -11.4~-12.6V

Connector (J2) for preamplifier board signal input: 8-pin, used to receive
photoelectric analog signals of six channels.
1 AGND /
2 Signal1 0.25V-2.5V (water blank condition)
8 AGND_SHELD /
Connector (J3) for preamplifier board signal input: 8-pin, used to receive
1 AGND /
4 Signa6 0.25V-2.5V (water blank condition)
8 AGND_SHELD /
Main control board connector (P4): 25-pin, used for communication with the main
control board.
5-59
The AD collection board has no switches or jumpers.
Indicators
The AD collection board contains the following indicators.
Power supply:
-12V power supply indicator (D14): green. When it is lit, it indicates that the
-12V power supply has been connected.
Test points
In the following positions of the AD collection board can signal tests be performed.
VG1: signal output of channel 340nm. Normal range: varies with the signal
strength and lies between 0-5V.
VDD: +12V power supply input. Normal range: 12V5%, that is, 11.4-12.6V.
VSS: -12V power supply input. Normal range: -12V5%, that is, -11.4 - -12.6V.
VCC: +5V power supply input. Normal range: 5V5%, that is, 4.75 - 5.25V.
5-60
properly.
slots.
It requires relatively great force to plug/unplug connectors J2 and J3. Hold the
PCBA by its edge while plugging/unplugging these connectors to prevent it
After connecting P1 connector (DB25), tighten the retaining screws on two sides
of it.
5.6.13 Preamplifier Board

The preamplifier board is intended to implement the following functions:
Converting optical signals into electric signals via a photodiode array.
With the help of the back circuit, filtering signals and transmitting them to the
AD collection board after amplification.
The figure below shows the relation between the preamplifier board and other
PCBAs.
The functional diagram of the preamplifier board is as shown below.
5-61
Description
PCB layout
The PCB layout of the preamplifier board is as shown below.
5-62
Connectors
The preamplifier board includes the following connectors.
Power supply:
Power supply input connector (J1): 3-pin, used to provide +12V and -12V power
supplies for the preamplifier board.
Value
1 +12V 11.4~12.6V
2 AGND /
3 -12V -11.4~-12.6V

Connector (J2) for preamplifier board signal output: 8-pin, used to receive
1 AGND /
2 Signal1 Depending on the actual measuring light intensity.
5-63
8 AGND_SHELD /
Connector (J3) for preamplifier board signal output: 8-pin, used to receive
1 AGND /
2 Signal2 Depending on the actual
measuring light intensity.
4 Signa6 Depending on the actual
8 AGND_SHELD /

The preamplifier board has no switches or jumpers.
Indicators
The preamplifier board is encapsulated inside the photometer module and has no
indicators.
Test points
The preamplifier board is encapsulated inside the photometer module and does not
need maintenance, and it therefore, has no test points.

Since encapsulated inside the photometer module, the preamplifier board should be
maintained together with the photometer module rather than maintained
independently.
5.6.14 Level Sense Board

The instrument has three level sense boards, two of them used for detecting reagent
level and the other one used for detecting sample level. The three level sense boards
are intended for implement the following functions:
5-64
Sensing the reagent and sample levels. The three boards are identical in circuit
structure and interfaces and capable of detecting the fluid level steadily and
reliably, especially allowing the sample probe to correctly detecting the fluid level
inside reaction cuvettes.
Outputting level sense signals to the control drive board through the
five-probe/mixer conversion board when the probe contacts the fluid level. The
probe is controlled to insert into the fluid for about 2mm depth.
Providing vertical obstruction detection and outputting the detection signals to
the control drive board through the five-probe/mixer conversion board.
The functional diagram of the level sense board is as shown below.
Vertical obstruct
detection circuit
Oscillation
frequency Level sense board
division circuit
Obstruct signal
Amplification
filter circuit
Interface
Dual- Phase- 5-probe/mixer Control
circuit
Fluid level signal
tube locked A/D CPU conversion drive
probe loop Serial communication board board
signal
Description
PCB layout
The top view of the level sense board is as shown below.
J3 D5 J1
J2
D4 D2
D6
The bottom view of the level sense board is as shown below.
TP1 TP6
TP4 TP2 TP3 S2
Connectors
The level sense board contains the following connectors.
Probe connector (J1): 2-pin, used for connecting the sample probe or reagent probes
5-65
with related circuit.
Pin No. Signal
1 GND
2 Probe capacitor signal
input
Power supply and signal output connector (J2): 4-pin, used to provide power supply
for the level sense board and output the level sense signal and vertical obstruction
signal.
Pin Signal Reference Value
No.
1 GND /
2 Vertical High level (about 4V) is output when no vertical
obstruction signal obstruction occurs, and low level (about 0V) is output
output when vertical obstruction happens.
3 Level sense signal Low level (about 0V) is output when the probe fails to
output detect the fluid level, and high level (about 4V) is
output when the probe detects the fluid level.
4 +12V 11.4~12.6V
Serial port communication cable connector (J3): 3-pin, used for communication
between the level sense board and the control drive board.
Pin No. Signal
1 RXD
2 RST
3 TXD

The level sense board contains the following switches and jumpers.
PSEN enable jumper (S1): used for downloading application programs.
Calibrate key (S2): used for manual self-calibration of fluid level detection.
Jumper S1 must be disconnected in normal conditions.
Indicators
The level sense board contains the following indicators.
Level sense system calibration indicator (D2): yellow. It is extinguished when the
self-calibration of the level sense system is failed, and vice versa. If it is lit, it
indicates that the calibration is complete and the level sense system is ready for
measurement. When the calibration is complete, the indicator will be lit all the
time.
Sensitivity switch indicator (D4): red. It is extinguished when the default
sensitivity is being used, and vice versa, which means level sensing is performed
in special positions.
5-66
Level sense indicator (D5): green. It is extinguished when the probe fails to
detect the fluid level, and vice versa.
Vertical obstruction indicator (D6): green. It is extinguished when no vertical
obstruction occurs, and vice versa.
Test points
In the following positions of the level sense board can signal tests be performed.
TP1 (LEVEL): level sense signal output. Normal condition: Low level (about 0V)
is output when the probe fails to detect the fluid level, and high level (about 4V)
is output when the probe detects the fluid level.
TP2 (PLL): working point voltage of the level sense system. Normal range:
3.80.5V.
TP3 (ALEVEL): analog level sense signal, based on which whether the fluid
level is detected or not is determined.
TP4 (GND): grounding terminal of the level sense board.
TP5 (VCO): reserved.
TP6 (RAM): vertical obstruction signal output. Normal condition: High level
(about 4V) is output when no vertical obstruction occurs, and low level (about
0V) is output when vertical obstruction happens.
TP7 (PLL1): reserved.
TP8: voltage monitoring signal for self-calibration of the level sense system.
TP9 (CLK): reserved.
TP10: +9V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the
internal phase-locked loop and some operational amplifiers of the PCBA.
Normal range: 9V5%, that is, 8.55-9.45V.
TP11: +5V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power most
components inside the PCBA, such as micro control unit (MCU). Normal range:
5V5%, that is, 4.75 - 5.25V.

the PCBA.
5.6.15 Pressure Detection Board

The pressure detection board is intended to implement the following functions:
5-67
Detecting pressure of three gas circuits, converting the detection results into
digital signals, and then sending them to the cuvette wash unit via the serial port.
Providing 12V power supply for the water quality sensor, receiving the water
quality detection signal, converting it into digital signal, and then sending it to
the cuvette wash station via the serial port.
The figure below shows the location of the pressure detection board in the hardware
system.
The functional diagram of the pressure detection board is as shown below.
5-68
Description
PCB layout
Reserved
channel
Auto wash
pressure sensor
Whole unit ISE degassing

degassing pressure pressure sensor
sensor
Connectors
Power supply and communication connector (J1): DB9 connector, used for
connecting the wash temperature control board, providing +12V and -12V power
supplies for the PCBA, and serial port communication with the upper-level PCBA.
Pin Description Applicable Test Methods
No.
1 +12V power supply The voltage at this point lies between
11.4-12.6V when the PCBA is working
normally.
2 Serial port input The voltage at this point is greater than
signal 2.4V when the system status is Standby.
3 Serial port output The voltage at this point is greater than
signal 2.4V when the system status is Standby.
5-69
Pin Description Applicable Test Methods
No.
4 Online-downloading The voltage at this point is greater than
enable signal 2.4V when the system status is Standby.
5 Ground /
6 -12V power supply The voltage at this point lies between -12.6
- -11.4V when the PCBA is working
normally.
7 Reset signal The voltage at this point is greater than
2.4V when the system status is Standby.
8 Ground /
9 Ground /
Water quality sensor connector (J2): 6-pin, providing power supply for the water
quality detection board and receiving water quality signal.
Pin Description Test Methods
No.
1 +12V power The voltage at this point lies between
supply 11.4-12.6V when the PCBA is working
normally.
2 -12V power The voltage at this point lies between
supply -11.6 - -11.4V when the PCBA is
working normally.
3 Water quality The voltage at this point lies between
sensor input 10-12.6V when there is no water inside
signal the water quality sensor base, and lies
between 0-5V when the water quality
sensor base is filled with deionized
water.
4 Power supply /
ground
5 Power supply /
ground
6 Shielded layer of /
cable, connected
with the
grounding
terminal of the
PCBA
Reserved pressure sensor connector (J3): reserved connector.

MCU downloading enable jumper (S2): When it is short-circuited, it indicates that
the MCU is downloading something. The jumper must be disconnected when the
PCBA is working normally.
Indicators and test points
5-70
Indicators:
+12V power supply indicator (VPP): green. It is lit when the +12V power
supply is working normally.
-12V power supply indicator (VEE): green. It is lit when the -12V power supply
is working normally.
+5V digital power supply indicator (VDD): green. It is lit when the +5V digital
power supply is working normally.
+5V analog power supply indicator (AVDD): green. It is lit when the +5V
analog power supply is working normally.
Test points:
+12V power supply (VPP): with normal range of 11.4 - 12.6V.
-12V power supply (VEE): with normal range of -12.6 - -11.4V.
+5V digital power supply (VDD): with normal range of 4.8 - 5.2V.
+5V analog power supply (AVDD): with normal range of 4.8 - 5.2V.
Whole unit degassing negative pressure test point (PRESSURE01): The voltage
at this point lies between 3.9-4.4V when the pressure sensor is connected to the
air.
ISE degassing negative pressure test point (PRESSURE02): The voltage at this
point lies between 0.05-0.4V when the pressure sensor is connected to the air.
Whole unit cleaning negative pressure test point (PRESSURE03): The voltage at
this point lies between 0.1-0.3V when the pressure sensor is connected to the air.
Reserved pressure detection channel test point (PRESSURE04): reserved
channel.
Water quality detection channel test point (WATER): When the water quality
sensor cable (J2) is disconnected, the voltage at this point lies between 4.8-5.2V;
when the J2 cable is connected, the voltage varies with the status of the water
quality.

Tighten the two retaining screws on two sides of connector J1, and insert
connector J2 properly into the PCBA.
When connecting the pressure sensors (U1, U2 and U4) to the gas circuit, press
them slightly and connect them with proper force to avoid breaking the
connectors.
Install the shielded cover after installing or repairing the PCBA.
5.6.16 Clog Detection Board

The clog detection board possesses the following functions:
Collecting pressure by connecting with the pressure sensor.
5-71
Checking for clogs and empty aspirate under the control of the sample control
drive board.
Sending debugging information to the debugging computer.
The figure below shows the location of the clog detection board in the hardware
system.
The function diagram of the clog detection board is as shown below.
Constant current drive Clog detection board Power supply Sample

control
Compen IO drive
Differential and Differential Secondary ADC Serial port
Analog Analog Single-end board
Sensor signal
primary
signal
amplificati
analog signal
and
amplificat -on
MCU Debugging
-ion Serial port
PC
Description
PCB layout
Connectors
Pressure sensor connector (J1): connected with the pressure sensor.
5-72
Pin No. Description Test Methods
1 Positive end input of /
pressure sensor
2 Positive end of power /
supply
3 Negative end of /
power supply
4 Negative end input of /
pressure sensor
5 Gain adjustment /
resistance
6 Gain adjustment
resistance
Clog detection board control connector (J2): connected with the sample control drive
board and used for communicating control signals during clog detection process.
Pin Description Test Methods
No.
1 +12V power supply The voltage lies between 11.4-12.6V
when the PCBA is working normally.
2 -12V power supply /
(reserved)
3 Confirmed clog signal The voltage at this point is less than 0.4V
when no clog signal is detected.
4 Possible clog signal /
(reserved)
5 Empty aspirate signal The voltage at this point is less than 0.4V
when no empty aspirate signal is
detected.
6 Interruption control The voltage at this point is less than 0.4V
signal when the system status is Standby.
7 Interruption enable The voltage at this point is less than 0.4V
signal when the system status is Standby.
8 Ground /
9 Reserved input /
10 Reserved output /
Clog detection board communication connector (J3): connected with the sample
control drive board and used for serial port communication between the clog
detection board and the sample probe unit.
1 +12V power supply The voltage lies between
11.4-12.6V when the PCBA is
working normally.
5-73
2 -12V power supply /
(reserved)
3 Serial port input signal The voltage at this point is
greater than 2.4V when the
system status is Standby.
4 Serial port output The voltage at this point is
signal greater than 2.4V when the
5 Online-downloading The voltage at this point is less
enable signal than 0.4V when the system
status is Standby.
6 Reset signal The voltage at this point is
greater than 2.4V when the
7 Ground /
8 Ground /
Clog detection board debugging connector (J4): connected with the serial port of a
computer and used for debugging the clog detection system. This connector is
temporarily not used.
Pin No. Description Test
Methods
1 +12V power supply /
2 -12V power supply (reserved) /
3 Serial port input signal /
4 Serial port output signal /
5 Ground /

MCU downloading enable jumper (S2): When it is short-circuited, it indicates that
the MCU is downloading something. The jumper must be disconnected when the
Indicators and test points
Indicators
Clog signal indicator (D3): red. It is lit when the PCBA outputs a clog signal.
Empty aspirate signal indicator (D4): It is lit when the PCBA outputs an empty
aspirate signal.
Possible clog signal indicator (D5): It is lit when the PCBA outputs a possible
clog signal.
+5V power supply indicator (D6): green. It is lit when the +5V power supply is
working normally.
5-74
+12V power supply indicator (D7): green. It is lit when the +12V power supply
is working normally.
Test points
+12V power supply (VPP): The voltage at this point lies between 11.4-12.6V
when the PCBA is working normally.
-12V power supply (VEE): reserved test point.
Ground (GND): This test point is connected with the grounding terminal of the
PCBA.
Pressure sensor output signal (ANALOG): It is an analog signal amplified by the
pressure sensor. When the pressure sensor is connected to the air, the voltage at
this point lies between 0.8-1.3V.
Clog signal (CLOG_Y): It is a test point of clog signal output. When the PCBA
outputs a clog signal, indicator D3 will be lit and the voltage at this point greater
than 2.4V; when the PCBA outputs no clog signal, indicator D3 will be
extinguished and the voltage at this point less than 0.4V.
Empty aspirate signal (NO_SAM): It is a test point of empty aspirate signal
output. When the PCBA outputs an empty aspirate signal, indicator D4 will be
lit and the voltage at this point greater than 2.4V; when the PCBA outputs no
empty aspirate signal, indicator D4 will be extinguished and the voltage at this
point less than 0.4V.
Possible clog signal (CLOG_M): reserved test point.
Debugging test point (TEST): used for test during debugging.

Insert connectors J2 and J3 tightly into the PCBA. When inserting connector J1,
you will hear a click, which means that the connector is inserted in place into its
slot.
5.6.17 Water Quality Detection Board

The water quality detection board converts the status of water quality into changes
of output analog voltage.
The figure below shows the location of the water quality detection board in the
hardware system.
Water Wash
Pressure temperature Main
quality
detection control control
detection board (wash
board board
board station)
5-75
Description
PCB layout
Connectors
Power supply and output signal connector (J1): used for providing the 12V power
supply for the PCBA and outputting water quality signals.
1 Sensor output signal The voltage at this point lies
between 10-12.6V when there is no
water inside the water quality
sensor base, and lies between 0-5V
when the water quality sensor base
is filled with deionized water.
2 Power supply ground /
3 -12V power supply The voltage at this point lies

between 11.4 - 12.6V when the
4 Power supply ground /
5 +12V power supply The voltage at this point lies

between -11.6 -11.4V when the
6 Corresponding to the shielded /
layer, which is connected with
the pressure detection board.

The water quality detection board exists in the form of water quality sensor assembly,
and needs not to be removed once installed.
The water quality sensor can be removed from its base. The electrode wire of the
water quality sensor is a type of precious metal and should not be touched when you
remove the sensor.
5-76
5.7 Power Supply System
5.7.1 Description of Power Supply System
As shown in the figure below, the AC power supply passes through the main power
switch and then comes to the AC drive board, which then divides the power supply
into three parts and provides them for the BA40 power supply assembly, 24V/6A
power supply board and 12V/30A power supply board. The 110V/220V
transformer circuit is only used on instruments powered by 110V power supply. In
this circuit, the 110V AC power supply is transformed to 220V and then used to
power the AC pumps on the instrument.
BA40 power supply assembly

The BA40 power supply assembly, as the major part of the entire power supply
system, consists of three boards, which are 24V power supply board, 12V power
supply board and power supply conversion board. It provides power supply for the
lamp, DC power supply for major control boards, and power supply for refrigeration
modules. After passing through an analog power supply conversion board, the 5V
power is converted into +/-12V and then provided for the AD collection board and
preamplifier board. The A5V, C12V, B24V, D12V and E12V power goes through a
DC power supply conversion board and then is provided for the wash temperature
control board, sample control drive board and reagent control drive board. The
B12V and A24V power are input to the reagent refrigeration board for powering the
radiators and ISE module. Other boards, such as reaction carousel collection board,
cleaning fluid temperature collection board, pressure detection board, clog detection
board and level sense board, are powered by those boards connected to them. See
the figure below.
The 24V power supply board converts the AC input into A24V and B24V and into
24VFAN for the cooling fans of radiators.
The 12V power supply board converts the AC input into B12V, A5V, 14V, and
24VLAMP. The 24VLAMP power supply is transformed to A12V through the power
supply conversion board and used for powering the lamp.
The power supply conversion board is used to shift the AC voltage, control the
vacuum pump AC voltage, convert the 14V power into 12V, control the C12V
5-77
power, and shift various output voltages.
A12V/1.7A Lamp
5V/analog+/-12V 5V/analog+/-12V +/-12V analog
A5V/8A 5V Analog power

Main control AD collection Preamplifier
supply conversion
board board board
board
DC power supply conversion board

C12V/7A Reac temp collection
D12V board D12V/E12V
Wash temperature Cleaning fluid temp
collection board Water
control board D12V/E12V Pressure detection quality
board detection
B24V board
5V/C12V/B24V D12V
/D12V/E12V Sample probe level sense board
Sample control
drive board D12V/E12V
D12V/0.3A Clog detection board
D12V
Reagent control
E12V/0.3A Probe R1 level sense board
drive board
Probe R2 level sense board
B12V/28A
Reagent A24V/5V
refrigeration ISE module
board
A24V/1.3A
12V/30A power supply board

The 12V/30A power supply board transforms the AC input into DC F12V, which is
used to power the radiators.

The 24V/6A power supply board transforms the AC input into DC C24V, which is
used to power the refrigeration fans.
5.7.2 Performance Indices

Power supply input
AC voltage input: 220-240V, 220/230V, and 110/115V.
AC voltage frequency: 50/603Hz
AC input power: 3KVA
5-78
Power supply output
No. Name Rated Lower-level Usage Controlled By
Output PCBA
1 A5V 5V/8A 5V digital Analyzing unit power switch
2 A12V 12V/4.2A Light source Operating software
3 B12V 12V/28A Reagent refrigeration Main power switch
4 C12V 12V/7A 12V drive Analyzing unit power switch
5 D12V 12V/0.3A +12V analog
6 E12V -12V/0.3A -12V analog
7 F12V 12V/30A Reagent refrigeration Main power switch
8 A24V 24V/1.3A ISE module Main power switch
9 B24V 24V/21A 24V drive and heater Analyzing unit power switch
10 24VFAN 24V/1A / Reserved Main power switch
11 C24V 24V/6A Reagent refrigeration Main power switch
fans
Notes:
Control by operating software means that the lamp voltage is controlled by the
operating software while the main power switch and analyzing unit power switch
are turned on.
Control by analyzing unit power switch means that the power supply is
controlled by the analyzing unit power switch with the prerequisite that the main
power switch is turned on.
Control by main power switch means that the power supply works normally
when the analyzing unit power switch is turned on, and vice versa.
5.7.3 Functional Diagram

The functional diagram of the power supply system is as shown below.
5-79
12V board 24V board

B12V Control Control
DC/
DC
24VLMP +14V -14V A24V 24VFAN
AC A5V 5VCRL AC B24V 24VCRL
Main switch Analyzing

AC unit switch
Timing
control
CTL-VMP B12V
A5V Lamp CTL-LMP
C12V C12V voltage AC 1
(Control) AC1
(Control) DC/DC
+12V -12V CTL-WTP
CTL-SLP AC 2
Power supply conversion board 24VFAN
C12V A5V D12V -12V A12V A24V B24V AC2
Note:
12V/30A power supply board CTL-SLP: Hibernate signal
F12V
CTL-LMP: Lamp control signal
CTL-WTP: AC1 control signal
CTL-VMP: AC2 control signal
5VCRL: 5V control signal
C24V 24VCRL: B24V control signal
5.7.4 BA40 Power Supply Assembly

The BA40 power supply assembly is composed of the 12V board, 24V board and
conversion board. Refer to the functional diagram of the power supply system for
the internal structure of the assembly. The functions and principles of the three
boards are described on the following pages.
12V board
The functional diagram of the 12V board is as shown below.
Isolated two-
transistor forward B12V
conversion
DC/DC
EMC Rectific PFC boost A5V
AC conversion
filter -ation conversion 390V
5VCRL
Isolated single- 24VLMP

transistor flyback +14V
conversion -14V
The 12V board converts the AC input into the following outputs:
B12V: used for powering the radiators.
5-80
A5V: used for powering the PCBA and controlled by the analyzing unit power
switch.
24VLMP: It is steady 24V output and then converted into lamp voltage A12V in
the way of DC/DC through the power supply conversion board.
14V: The two outputs are converted into 12V (D12V and -12V) through the
voltage stabilizer on the power supply conversion board and then used for
powering analog circuits.
The PCB layout of the 12V board is as shown below.
The 12V board is located inside the power supply box. Indicators D20, D21 and D34
are used to indicate voltage output during debugging and repairing of the PCBA and
cannot be seen from the outside of the instrument.
Indication of voltage outputs:
LED Output Indication Status Controlled By
Voltage
D20 A5V When it is lit, it indicates Analyzing unit power switch
that the PCBA outputs an
A5V power.
D21 B12V When it is lit, it indicates Main power switch
that the PCBA outputs a
B12V power.
D34 A24V When it is lit, it indicates Main power switch
A24V power.
5-81
Notes:
are turned on.
24V board
The functional diagram of the 24V board is as shown below.
Isolated two-
transistor forward B24V
conversion
24VCRL
EMC Rectific PFC boost
AC
filter -ation conversion 390V
Isolated single- A24V

transistor flyback
conversion 24VFAN
The 24V board converts the AC input into the following outputs:
A24V: used for powering the ISE module.
24VFAN: output voltage, not used temporarily.
B24V: used for powering the moving parts, motors and heaters, and controlled
by the analyzing unit power switch.
The PCB layout of the 24V board is as shown below.
5-82
LED1, LED2 and LED3 in the figure above are indicators of the A24V, 24VFAN
and B24V outputs. Since located inside the power supply box, the three indicators
cannot be seen from the outside of the instrument. They are used to indicate the
voltage output during debugging and repairing of the PCBA. There are three
indicators on the power supply conversion board, and they are used for indicating the
voltage outputs of the 24V board.
Indication of voltage outputs on the 24V board:
Voltage
LED1 A24V When it is lit, it indicates Main power switch
A24V power.
LED2 24VFAN When it is lit, it indicates Main power switch
24VFAN power.
LED3 B24V When it is lit, it indicates Analyzing unit power switch
B24V power.
Notes:
are turned on.
5-83
Power supply conversion board

The functional diagram of the power supply conversion board is as shown below.
This board is used to:

Providing the AC input for the 12V board and 24V board, and dividing it into
AC1 and AC2, which are reserved now and not used for the instrument.
Stabilize the 14V output by the 12V board into D12V and -12V.
Converting the 24VLMP output by the 12V board into controlled lamp voltage
A12V.
Dividing and shifting other DC inputs, and providing power supply interfaces
for other PCBAs.
The PCB layout of the power supply conversion board is as shown below.
5-84
Indicators
There are 9 voltage indicators on the power supply conversion board indicated by a
dotted frame. They are from left to right: D20, D11, D14, D10, D15, D12, D13, D9,
and D21, which are used to indicate the following voltage outputs.
Voltage
D20 D12V When it is lit, it indicates Analyzing unit power switch
D12V power.
D11 B12V When it is lit, it indicates Main power switch
B12V power.
D14 -12V When it is lit, it indicates Analyzing unit power switch
-12V power.

A12V power.
D15 A24V When it is lit, it indicates Main power switch
A24V power.
D12 C12V When it is lit, it indicates Analyzing unit power switch
C12V power.
A5V power.
5-85
Voltage
D9 B24V When it is lit, it indicates Analyzing unit power switch
B24V power.
D21 24VFAN When it is lit, it indicates Main power switch
24VFAN power.
Notes:
are turned on.
The table below shows the status of the indicators when the main power switch and
analyzing unit power switch are turned on or off.
LED Output Control Description Main Main Main
Voltage Power ON Power ON Power
Analyzing Analyzing OFF
Unit unit
Power Power ON
OFF
D11 B12V When the main power
D15 A24V switch is ON,
indicators D11, D15
D21 24VFAN and D21 are lit and
only controlled by the
main power switch
rather than the
analyzing unit power
switch.
D12 C12V The corresponding
D13 A5V indicator is
extinguished only
D14 -12V when the main power
D20 D12V switch is ON. When
the analyzing unit
D9 B24V
power switch is ON,
the corresponding
indicator is lit and
controlled by both
switches.
5-86
LED Output Control Description Main Main Main
Voltage Power ON Power ON Power
Analyzing Analyzing OFF
Unit unit
Power Power ON
OFF
D10 A12V Controlled by the
main power switch
and the operating
software
Turning on/off the lamp can be controlled through the
operating software.
Output connectors:
Jack Pins Symbol Output Description
No.
J3 Pin1 ISE A24V+
Pin2 A24V-
J4 Pin1, 3, 5, 7 VALVE DRV C12V positive output
Pin9, 11, 12 B24V positive output
Pin2, 4, 6, 8, 10 B24V and C12V output GND
J7 / N AC input N
J8 / L AC input L
J9 Pin1 24VFAN+ 24VFAN positive output
Pin2 24VFAN- 24VFAN negative output
Pin3 C12VOUT C12V positive output
Pin4 / C12V output GND

J12 Pin1 D12V D12V output
Pin2 -12V -12V output
Pin4, 5 / D12V and -12V output GND
Pin3 5VOUT A5V positive output
Pin6 / A5V output GND
J13 Pin1 AC PUMP AC1 output, not used for BA80

Pin3 AC2 output, not used for BA80
Pin6, 8 AC input
J14 Pin1 5VOUT A5V output
Pin2, 3 B24VOUT B24V output
Pin4 C12VOUT C12V output
Pin9 D12V D12V output
5-87
Jack Pins Symbol Output Description
No.
Pin6, 7, 8 / A5V, B24V and C12V output GND
Pin10 / D12V and -12V output GND
J15 Pin1, 2, 3 B24VOUT B24V output
Pin4 5VOUT A5V output
Pin5 D12V D12V output
Pin7, 8, 9, 10 GND2 A5V and B24V output GND
Pin11, 12 DGND D12V and -12V output GND
J16 Pin1 LAMP A12V output for lamp
Pin2 A12V output GND for lamp
Troubleshooting BA40 power supply assembly

Check the indicators on the power supply conversion board while the main power
switch is turned on and the analyzing unit power switch is off. In normal conditions,
indicators D11, D15 and D21 should be lit respectively indicating B12V, A24V and
24VFAN. If D11 is not lit, the B12V output may go wrong and perhaps the 12V
board is failed; if D15 and D21 are not lit, the A24V and 24VFAN outputs may go
wrong and perhaps the 24V board is failed; if all of the three indicators are not lit,
check if the AC input of the PCBA is normal, and troubleshoot the 12V board and
24V board.
While the main power switch is turned on and the voltage input is normal, turn on
the analyzing unit power switch. In normal conditions, all indicators on the
conversion board except for the A12V indicator should be lit. If the B24V indicator
is not lit, replug the load line; if the error remains, replace the 24V board and then
check if the B24V indicator is lit. If the A5V indicator is not lit, perhaps it is
short-circuited or the 12V board goes wrong. If the A5V indicator is lit but C12V or
D12V/-12V is extinguished, replug the load line; if the error remains, check the
conversion board or replace the power supply board; if the error disappears when a
new power supply board is installed, it indicates that the original power supply board
needs to be repaired.
If the A12V power cannot be enabled through the operating software while the main
power switch and analyzing unit power switch are turned on and working normally,
replug the power cord of the lamp; if the error remains, troubleshoot the power
supply conversion board by replacing it with a new one.
5.7.5 12V/30A Power Supply Board

Major functions
The 12V/30A power supply board is intended to implement the following functions:
Converting the AC input within the entire voltage range into DC 12V output.
Providing power supply for the reagent refrigeration board.
5-88
Performance Indices
Power supply input:
AC input voltage: 90-264V AC
Power supply output:
Rated output voltage: 11.4-12.6V.
Rated output current: 30A.
Description of PCBA
Connectors:
The 12V/30A power supply board contains four connectors, which are described in
the table below.
Jack No. PIN Symbol Description

J1 1 L Live wire of AC input
2 / NC
3 N Neutral wire of AC input
J2 1 12VDC+ AC 12V positive output
2 12VDC- DC 12V output GND

J3 1 FAN + 12V positive output for cooling fan of the PCBA
2 FAN- 12V GND for cooling fan of the PCBA
J4 1 FAN + 12V positive output for cooling fans
2 FAN- 12V GND for cooling fan of the PCBA
PCB layout:
5-89
The 12V/30A power supply board only has a green indicator labeled with D24 as
shown in the figure above. When D24 is lit, it indicates that the PCBA has been
connected to the power supply and connector J2 has voltage output; when D24 is
extinguished, it means that there is no voltage output at connector J2.
Troubleshooting the PCBA

Check the indicator D24 when the PCBA is connected to the power supply. If it is lit,
it means that there is voltage output on the PCBA. Use a multimeter to measure the
voltage between the two pins of connector J2, and then check if the voltage is within
the normal range of 12V5%.
If indicator D24 is lit but the output voltage is beyond the normal range, check if the
measuring methods are correct, the testing equipment is normal, and the PCBA has
been installed correctly, and then replug the load line and measure the voltage again.
If the voltage is normal, check the load end; if the voltage fails again, check if the
fuse on the power supply board is broken or if there are any other causes, and then
replace the power supply board. If the error disappears when a new power supply
board is installed, it indicates that the original power supply board needs to be
repaired.
If indicator D24 is extinguished, replug the load line of connector J2 and then use a
multimeter to measure the output voltage at J2. If the voltage is normal but D24 is
extinguished, it indicates that the D24 LED goes wrong; otherwise, open the power
supply box, replug the fan cables from connectors J3 and J4, and then try again. If
the error still remains, the power supply board may goes wrong and need to be
repaired. If the error disappears when a new power supply board is installed, it
indicates that the original power supply board is failed.
5.7.6 24V/6A Power Supply Board

The 24V/6A power supply board is intended to implement the following functions:
Converting the AC input within the entire voltage range into DC 24V output and
providing power supply for the cooling fan.
Performance Indices
Power supply input:
AC input voltage: 90-264V AC
Power supply output:
Rated output voltage: 24V.
Rated output current: 6A.
Description of PCBA
Connectors:
The 24V/6A power supply board contains two connectors, which are described in
the table below.
5-90
Jack No. PIN Symbol Description
J1 1 L Live wire of AC input
2 / NC
3 N Neutral wire of AC
input
J2 1 / DC 24V positive
output
2 / DC 24V output GND
Figure 5.4 PCB layout
Measuring output voltage

The 24V/6A power supply board has no indicators to indicate output voltage and
requires measurement of the output voltage to check if it is normal or not. Use a
multimeter to measure the voltage between the two pins of connector J2, and then
check if the voltage is within 24V5%.
Troubleshooting the PCBA

If the 24V/6A power supply is abnormal, measure the output voltage at connector
J2 and check if it is within the normal range. If the voltage is normal, check the
connection cables and load end.
If the voltage is abnormal, check if the wire of connector J1 and the PCBA have
been installed correctly, replug the load line of connector J2, and then measure the
voltage again. If the error still remains, check if the fuse on the power supply board
is broken or if there are any other causes, and if necessary, replace the power supply
board.
If the output voltage is normal while the board is connected to power supply
without any loads, but it becomes abnormal once a load line is inserted into J2, check
if the cable is correct and the load end is normal. If the load end is correct, replace
the 24V/6A power supply board. If the error disappears after a new power supply
board is used, it indicates that the original board goes wrong and needs to be
repaired; otherwise, check carefully each load connected to the output end of the
5-91
power supply board.
5.7.7 Analog Power Supply Conversion Board

Function
The instrument has one analog power supply conversion board, which is mainly used
to:
Convert the +5V digital into +/-12V in the way of DC/DC, and then provide it for
the main control board to use as analog power for the AD collection board and
preamplifier board.
Description
The PCB layout of the analog power supply conversion board is as shown below.
Connectors
The analog power supply conversion board contains the following connectors:
J1: connector for DC power supply conversion board input.
Pin No. Signal
1 GND
2 A5V
3 NC
4 NC
J2: connector for main control board power supply output.

Pin No. Signal
1 +12V analog
2 -12V analog
3 +5V digital
4, 5 Analog GND
6 Digital GND
5-92
Indicators
The analog power supply conversion board contains the following indicators:
-12V power supply indicator (D3): green. When it is lit, it indicates that the -12V
Test points
In the following positions of the analog power supply conversion board can signal
tests be performed.
P12V: +12V power supply. Normal range: 12V5%, that is, 11.4-12.6V.
N12V: -12V power supply. Normal range: -12V5%, that is, -11.4 - -12.6V.
+5V: +5V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the digital
parts of the PCBA. Normal range: 5V5%, that is, 4.75-5.25V.
GND: digital grounding terminal of the PCBA.
AGND and AGND1: analog grounding terminals of the PCBA.

the PCBA.
5.7.8 DC Power Supply Conversion Board

The DC power supply conversion board is intended for the following functions:
Inputting A5V digital, +/-12V (D12V/E12V) analog, C12V power, and B24V
power for the BA40 power supply assembly.
Outputting A5V digital to the analog power supply conversion board.
Outputting A5V digital, +/-12V (D12V/E12V) analog, C12V power, and B24V
power to the sample/reagent control drive boards.
Outputting A5V digital, +/-12V (D12V/E12V) analog, C12V power, and B24V
power to the sample/reagent control drive boards.
5-93
Description
Connectors
J1: connector for power supply output of the sample control drive board.
No. Signal Description
1, 2 B24V +24V power
3, 10 A5V +5V digital
4, 11 C12V +12V digital
7 D12V +12V analog
14 E12V -12V analog
8, 9, 5, and 12 GND Digital ground
6, 13 AGND Analog ground
J2, J3, J6, J7: connectors for power supply input of the power supply assembly.
J2:
2 D12V +12V analog
4 E12V -12V analog
J3:
4, 9 D12V +12V power
6 E12V -12V analog
5-94
5, 6, 7, 10 GND Digital ground
J7:
5, 6, 7 B24V +24V power
1, 2, 3 GND Digital ground
J6:
1, 2, 5, 6 C12V +12V power
3, 4, 7, 8 GND Digital ground
J5: connector for power supply output of the analog power supply conversion board.
1 A5V +5V digital
2 GND Digital ground
J4: connector for power supply output of the reagent control drive board.
7 D12V +12V analog
14 E12V -12V analog
J8: connector for power supply output of the wash temperature control board.
5-95
11 A5V +5V digital
12 D12V +12V analog
16 E12V -12V analog
5 AGND Analog ground
5.7.9 Tips for Troubleshooting Power Supply System

The following summary is about the control relations of the power supply system
and provided to help service engineers to troubleshoot various failures.
For corresponding relations between the main switch/analyzing unit power
switch/hibernating status and the power supply working status, refer to relevant
sections on the previous pages.
Voltage timing control:
When the analyzing unit power switch is turned on, the A5V, C12V (D12V/E12V)
and B24V are controlled successively in the order of A5V C12V (D12V/-12V)
B24V. That is, only when the A5V is connected will the C12V (D12V/-12V) be
provided, and this is the same for C12V and B24V; if the A5V is not output, the
C12V (D12V/-12V) and B24V will not be provided.
5-96
5.8 Wiring Diagrams
5-97
5-98
5-99
Air connection
Wash temperature control
board communication cable
AD collection board 009-000390-00
1 TXD1- 1
communication cable 2 TXD1+ 2
009-000392-00 3 RXD1+ 3
1 +12V 1 4 RXD1- 4
2 -12V 2 5 RST1 5
6 GND 6
3 VCC 3 7 CTL1 7
4 12GND 4 8 GND 8
5 GND 5 9 TXD2- 9
6 AD_DIN 6 10 TXD2+ 10
7 NC NC 7 11 RXD2+ 11
8 GND 8 12 RXD2- 12
13 RST2 13
9 DCP_EN 9
14 GND 14
10 DCP_CLK 10 15 CTL2 15
11 DCP_DIN 11 16 GND 16
12 NC NC 12 17 TXD3- 17
13 GND 13 18 TXD3+ 18
14 +12V 14 19 RXD3+ 19
20 RXD3- 20
15 -12V 15 21 RST3 21
16 VCC 16 22 GND 22
17 12GND 17 23 CTL3 23
18 AD_BUSY 18 24 GND 24
19 AD_CLK 19 25 TXD4- 25
26 TXD4+ 26
20 AD_RC 20 27 RXD4+ 27
21 CH_A3 21 28 RXD4- 28
22 CH_A2 22 29 RST4 29
23 CH_A1 23 30 GND 30
24 CH_A0 24 31 CTL4 31
25 GND 25 32 GND 32
33 TXD5- 33
34 TXD5+ 34
35 RXD5+ 35
36 RXD5- 36
37 IN1 37
38 GND 38
39 IN12 39
40 GND 40
Serial port tieline
009-000384-00
2 RXD 2
Reagent control drive board
3 TXD 3 communication cable
009-000389-00
5 GND 5 1 TXD1- 1
2 TXD1+ 2
7 RST 7 3 RXD1+ 3
8 RTS 8 4 RXD1- 4
5 RST1 5
9 RI 9 6 GND 6
7 CTL1 7
1,4,6,10 1,4,6,10 8 GND 8
NC NC 9 TXD2- 9
10 TXD2+ 10
11 RXD2+ 11
12 RXD2- 12
13 RST2 13
Ethernet tieline
14 GND 14
3 TX+ 1 (reserved) 15 CTL2 15
5-100
6 TX- 2 16 GND 16
1 TX+ Orange white 1 17 TXD3- 17
1 RX+ 3
2 TX- Orange 2 18 TXD3+ 18
4 NC 4
3 RX+ Green white 3 19 RXD3+ 19
5 NC 5 20 RXD3- 20
4 RX- Green 4
2 RX- 6 21 RST3 21
5 GND Blue white 5 22 GND 22
7 NC 7
8 NC 8 6 PWFB Blue 6 23 CTL3 23
24 GND 24
25 TXD4- 25
26 TXD4+ 26
Ethernet cable (reserved) 27 RXD4+ 27
28 RXD4- 28
29 RST4 29
30 GND 30
31 CTL4 31
32 GND 32
33 TXD5- 33
34 TXD5+ 34
35 RXD5+ 35
6 GND Black 6 36 RXD5- 36
37 IN1 37
4 1 4 1
3 GND Black 2 5 12VGND Blue 5
5 38 GND 38
2 4 12VGND Blue 4 5 2
39 IN12 39
1 1 A5V Red 6 3 3 +5V Red 3
6 3 40 GND 40
2 -12V White 2
1 +12V Yellow 1
Analog power supply Main control board

power cord Sample control drive board
conversion board communication cable
power cord 009-000387-00
009-000388-00
009-000455-00 1 TXD1- 1
2 TXD1+ 2
3 RXD1+ 3
4 RXD1- 4
5 RST1 5
6 GND 6
ISE module tieline
7 CTL1 7
009-000393-00 8 GND 8
9 TXD2- 9
1 ISE_RXD+ 1 10 TXD2+ 10
11 RXD2+ 11
2 ISE_RXD - 2 12 RXD2- 12
3 +5V 3 13 RST2 13
14 GND 14
4 TXD 4 15 CTL2 15
16 GND 16
5 5V 5 17 TXD3- 17
6 CTL 6 18 TXD3+ 18
19 RXD3+ 19
7 +5V 7 20 RXD3- 20
21 RST3 21
8 RESET 8
22 GND 22
23 CTL3 23
24 GND 24
25 TXD4- 25
26 TXD4+ 26
27 RXD4+ 27
28 RXD4- 28
29 RST4 29
Refrigeration board 30 GND 30
communication cable 31 CTL4 31
009-000391-00 32 GND 32
1 TXD- 1 33 TXD5- 33
34 TXD5+ 34
2 TXD + 2 35 RXD5+ 35
36 RXD5- 36
3 RXD+ 3 37 IN1 37
38 GND 38
4 RXD- 4
39 IN12 39
5 RST 5 40 GND 40
6 GND 6
7 CTL 7
8 GND 8
Photoelectric signal cable 1
009-000432-00
1 AGND 1
2 SIG1 2
3 SIG2 3
AD collection board
communication cable 4 SIG3 4
009-000392-00
5 SIG4 5
1 +12V 1 6 SIG5 6
2 -12V 2
3 VCC 3 7 SIG6 7
4 12GND 4
5 GND 5 8 SGND 8
6 AD_DIN 6
7 NC NC 7
8 GND 8
9 DCP_EN 9 Photoelectric signal cable 2
10 DCP_CLK 10 009-000433-00
5-101
11 DCP_DIN 11
12 NC NC 12 1 AGND Black 1
13 GND 13 2 SIG1 White 2
14 +12V 14
15 -12V 15 3 SIG2 Yellow 3
16 VCC 16
17 12GND 17 4 SIG3 Green 4
18 AD_BUSY 18 5 SIG4 Grey 5
19 AD_CLK 19
20 AD_RC 20 6 SIG5 Blue 6
21 CH_A3 21
22 CH_A2 22 7 SIG6 Orange 7
23 CH_A1 23
8 SGND Black 8
24 CH_A0 24
25 GND 25
1 VPP Red 1
2 AGND Black 2
3 VEE Green 3
4 Shielded layer White
Preamplifier board
power cord
009-000431-00
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Main control board

D D
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 35 37 39
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 36 38 40
J11
communication cable
39
22
24
26
34
37
40
10
32
Wash temperature
11
19
27
35
12
20
25
28
33
36
14
16
18
30
38
21
13
23
29
2
17
15
31
3
1
9
5
7
8
009-000390-00
control board
TXD3+
TXD2+
RXD1-
RXD2-
RXD3-
RXD4-
RXD5-
TXD1+
TXD4+
TXD5+
CTL2
CTL4
CTL1
RST2
CTL3
RST4
GND
RXD1+
RXD2+
RXD3+
RXD4+
RXD5+
TXD1-
TXD2-
TXD3-
TXD4-
TXD5-
RST1
RST3
GND
GND
IN12
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
IN1
15
31
13
17
29
7
23
40
5
21
18
6
14
16
30
38
9
10
12
20
25
28
33
36
3
11
19
27
35
32
37
2
26
34
39
22
24
position sensor tieline
009-000460-00
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 35 37 39
Reaction carousel rotary motor cable 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 36 38 40
J17 2
1 VCC Red
REAC_PHO White
1
4 +
009-000413-00
3 GND Black 2
C Reaction carousel home
- position sensor
1
A+ Red 1 4 GND Green 3 E
1
1
2 A- Yellow 2
3 2
2
Reaction carousel rotary motor 4 B+ Orange 3 J3 5 VCC Red 1
+
4 6 REACCPHO White 4
5 B- Brown 4 C Reaction carousel coder
C 5 7 GND Black 2 C
4
1 2 - sensor
8 GND Green 3 E
3 4
Reagent mixer rotary motor cable
009-000410-00 5 6 9 VCC Red 1
+
10 REAC_DB_PHO White 4
1 A+ Red 1 7 8 C Reaction carousel
1
1 11 GND Black 2 - debugging sensor
3 A- Yellow 2 12 GND Green 3 E
9 10
3 2
3
Reagent mixer rotary motor 4 B+ Orange 3 J5
4 11 12
6 B- Brown 4 13 VCC Red 1
6 +
4
13 14 14 RMR_PHO White 4
C Reagent mixer rotary
15 GND Black 2 -
15 16 sensor
Reagent mixer vertical motor cable 16 GND Green 3 E
009-000411-00
17 18
1 A+ Red 1 19 20 17 VCC Red 1
1
1 +
3 A- Yellow 2 18 RMU_PHO White 4
C Reagent mixer vertical
3 2
3 21 22
Reagent mixer vertical motor
4
6
4 B+ Orange 3
6 B- Brown 4
J4 Wash Temperature Control Board 23 24
19
20
GND Black
GND Green
2
3
-
E
sensor
4
25 26
27 28 Reagent mixer motor cable
1
Wash station vertical motor cable J6 009-000438-00
009-000412-00 29 30 29 VCC Red 3
2
3 Blue VCC
2
1
+
B 1 1
A+ Red 1 31 32
30 RMU_PHO White 2 4 Black GND C Reagent mixer B
J8
3
4
1 31 GND Black 4 1 Purple GND - rotation speed
3 A- Yellow 2
Wash station vertical motor 3 33 34 32 GND Green 1 E detection sensor
8
2 Green PHO
J6
3 2
4 B+ Orange 3
4 35 36 5-probe/mixer
9
6 B- Brown 4
6 conversion board
37 38
4
Wash temperature control board 39 40

Reagent mixer motor cable to reagent mixer motor tieline 33 VCC Red 1
009-000443-00 +
009-000438-00 34 AWH_RMA_PHO White 4 C Wash probe vertical
1 A+ Red 6 1 A+ Red 1 J16 35 GND Black 2 -
obstruct detection sensor
1
1
1
36 GND Green 3 E
2 A- Yellow 7 2 A- Yellow 2
2
3 2
2
3 2
Reagent mixer 4 B+ Orange 8 3 B+ Orange 3

motor 4 J8 J7 37 VCC Red 1
4 B- Brown 4
5 5 B- Brown 9 +
4
38 AWH_PHO White 4
4
C Wash probe vertical

8
39 GND Black 2 -
sensor
J7 E
9
40 GND Green 3
5-probe/mixer
conversion board
A
MINDRAY A
Wash Temperature Control Board
TITLE:
Diagram_1/3
File Bytes
DWG NO. BS-800 REV 2.0
Date Time
Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 SHEET 6 OF 17 SIZE A3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
5-102
5-103
Water quality detection board
1 2 3 4 5 6
DC power supply conversion
Power supply board
conversion board
1 3 5 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 2 4 6 8 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9
5-104
Cleaning fluid temperature
collection board
BX50-30-89639
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
Reagent control drive board

communication cable
009-000389-00
1 TXD1- 1
2 TXD1+ 2
3 RXD1+ 3
4 RXD1- 4
5 RST1 5
6 GND 6
7 CTL1 7
8 GND 8
5-105
9 TXD2- 9
10 TXD2+ 10
11 RXD2+ 11
12 RXD2- 12
13 RST2 13
14 GND 14
15 CTL2 15
16 GND 16
17 TXD3- 17
18 TXD3+ 18
19 RXD3+ 19
20 RXD3- 20
21 RST3 21
22 GND 22
23 CTL3 23
24 GND 24
25 TXD4- 25
26 TXD4+ 26
27 RXD4+ 27
28 RXD4- 28
29 RST4 29
30 GND 30
31 CTL4 31
32 GND 32
33 TXD5- 33
34 TXD5+ 34
35 RXD5+ 35
36 RXD5- 36
37 IN1 37
38 GND 38
39 IN12 39
40 GND 40
R1 level sense board R2 level sense board
BX50-30-89635 BX50-30-89635
J2 J3 J2 J3
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3
Reagent bar code module
BA40-30-61986
2 4 6 8 10
1 3 5 7 9
5-106
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
board conversion board
Sample control drive DC power supply
9 8 2 1
4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
Sample control drive board

communication cable
009-000388-00
1 TXD1- 1
2 TXD1+ 2
3 RXD1+ 3
4 RXD1- 4
5 RST1 5
6 GND 6
7 CTL1 7
8 GND 8
9 TXD2- 9
10 TXD2+ 10
11 RXD2+ 11
12 RXD2- 12
13 RST2 13
14 GND 14
15 CTL2 15
16 GND 16
17 TXD3- 17
18 TXD3+ 18
5-107
19 RXD3+ 19
20 RXD3- 20
21 RST3 21
22 GND 22
23 CTL3 23
24 GND 24
25 TXD4- 25
26 TXD4+ 26
27 RXD4+ 27
28 RXD4- 28
29 RST4 29
30 GND 30
31 CTL4 31
32 GND 32
33 TXD5- 33
34 TXD5+ 34
35 RXD5+ 35
36 RXD5- 36
37 IN1 37
38 GND 38
39 IN12 39
40 GND 40
3 1
4 2
9 8 2 1
Sample level sense board
BX50-30-89635
J2 J3
1 2 3 4 1 2 3
Sample bar code module
BA40-30-61994
2 4 6 8 10
1 3 5 7 9
5-108
1 3 5 7 9 11 13
1 2 3 4 5
2 4 6 8 10 12 14
6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 4 6 8 10 2 4 6 8
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
conversion board
Clog detection conversion board board
DC power supply
Reagent control drive
5-109

5-110
Slip ring cable

BA40-21-61675
Power supply
24V6A power conversion board
12V30A power supply
supply board
board BA40-30-61627
BX50-30-89627
Refrigeration temperature
sensor cable
009-000473-00
1 Black Shielded
2 GND White 1
Refrigeration fan tieline
3 SEN_RT Red 2
009-000476-00
1 FAN24V Red 1
2 DATA Yellow 2
3 GND Black 3 1 Black Shielded
1 FAN24V Red 1 2 GND White 1
2 DATA Yellow 2
3 GND Black 3
3 SEN_RT Red 2
radiator group cable 1
009-000489-00
1 Black 2
Lamp radiating fan tieline 3 Red 1
009-000472-00
1 F12V Red 7
4 Black 2
2 DATA Yellow 8 2 Red 1
3 GND Black 9 Reagent refrigeration
5-111
1 F12V Red 1 009-000490-00
2 DATA Yellow 2 1 Black 2
3 GND Black 3 3 Red 1
4 Black 2
2 Red 1
009-000491-00
1 Black 2
ISE module power cord
009-000478-00 3 Red 1
1 ISE5V Red 1
4 Black 2
2 GND Black 4
2 Red 1
3 Shieled
1 ISE24V Red 3 009-000492-00
1 Black 2
2 GND Black 6
3 Red 1
4 Black 2
2 Red 1
Demisting heater tieline radiator group cable 5
009-000471-00 009-000493-00
1 12V Red 1
1 Black 2
2 3 Red 1
4 Black 2
1
2 Red 1
2 GND Black 4
8 6 4 2
6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 1
7 5 3 1
7 5 3 1
8 6 4 2 fan
2100-20-08144 pump
radiating n circulating
radiating fan 1
pump
Air pump Refrigeratio
Liquid
Main control AC drive board
board Air connection Air connection Air connection
4 3
2 1
2 1
5-112
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6
6 7 8 9 10 6 7 8 9 10 7 8 9
Sample level sense board R1 level sense board R2 level sense board
BX50-30-89636 BX50-30-89635 BX50-30-89635
J2 J3 J2 J3 J2 J3
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3
5-113
1 3 2 4 1 3 2 4 1 3 2 4 1 3 2 4
1 3 2 4 1 3 2 4
1
2
3
5-114
6 Hydropneumatic System
6-1
6.1 Overview
The Hydropneumatic system of the instrument includes the pneumatic part and
hydraulic part.
The major function of the pneumatic part is:
To provide vacuum for the cuvette wash station, sampling unit and ISE unit.
The major function of the hydraulic part is:
To provide the whole unit with deionized water via the water supply unit.
To provide wash solution (water and detergent) for the cuvette wash station and
probe units.
To discharge waste fluid produced during measurements via the drainage
module.
This chapter describes the working principles and repairing methods of the
Hydropneumatic system.
6-2
6.2 Hydropneumatic Diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
REV ECN DESCRIPTION DESIGN CHECK CHECK/R&D APPR DATE
7.0 EDM023 Change of secondary vacuum release valve and relevant tubes Zhang Shaowei
A D08
Graphic legend
T011
PRE07 PRE06 PRE05

I03
Deionized water tube Refrigerant tube Restrictor ring
V29
Primary degasser T703 T704
PRE02 I02 M1004 I04 I05 P12 I06
Cleaning fluid tube Vacuum tube Conversion tube
vacuum T705 T706 T707 T708
ISE vacuum T702
T010 T014 Concentrated wash Filter
T013
Pressure
High-concentration waste tube
solution tube
detection
board T701 Diluted wash solution tube Low-concentration waste tube
T253
T012
T015
NC ZQX20
V04
Primary vacuum
PRE01 I01
T251 T252
COM NO ZQZ44
ZQZ45
ZQZ13
ISE vacuum ZQZ14
ZQZ15
T243 T254 T255
NC D31 1mL T557 T518
T555 T516 T520 T522
ZQZ16
V03
ZQX01
1 2 3 4 5 6 ZQX02
COM NO M1005
ZQX03
1 2 3 4 5 6 ZQX04
T241 T242
R2 ISE module T554 T515 T519 T521 ZQX05
ZQZ42 T556 T517 ZQX06
ZQZ43 ZQX08
ZQX07 Small sample compartment
T603
D21 1mL ISE buffer T551 T602 T604
T605
T606
T607 Reagent compartment
T553
B D30 T244 T245
T510 T608
V14
T508 T601
ISE waste
V15
D20
V16
T550 T552 T512
V17
T507 T514
1 8 2 3 4 56 7
V18
Clog detection T509
V19
NC D41
R1 D32 CAN04
T511 T513
T225 T226 T227 T228 T610 T620

V02
T224
D42 Buffer tank
COM PRE04 250uL D22 ZQZ40
ZQZ41
ZQZ10
D40 ZQZ12
T222 T223 ZQZ09
ZQZ11
T210
NO ZQZ37
High-conc Low-conc
S D43 secondary secondary
T250
T240 SM2 SM1 RM2 RM1 T549
T505 T506 vacuum vacuum container
T211 T221
M1006 D04
container CAN06
W50 W52
T207 T246 T256 RU12 RU05
T229 CAN05
S R1 R2 T915 T916
ZQZ07 ZQZ08
RU03
W10 W14
D51 W11 T918
W51 T917 W53 T909
W13
OUT T811 RU01

D06 T810
T206 T504
RU06
T840
T919
T830
P04
V05
W03 ZQX14
T212 T213 W02 W40
ZQZ06 ZQX10
W30
T842 IN
OUT IN T205 T802
T913 T912 RU09
IN
T832 V22 RU10
WQ21
W04 IN RU07
C J20 D23 WQ31
WQ41 T843 T910
WQ11 WQ51 T911
T801
D33 W01 V21 OUT
T501 T202 Refrigeration unit RU11 P02
D44 D03 M1001 T833
T203
OUT RU02 T914
RU08
D52 W20
RU07
V08
V26
COM
V10
T322 T342
IN
V11
V24
T341
OUTT624 OUT
V09
D53 T272 T621

V28
V07
T273 T623
D54 T312 T352 T622
NC T311 ZQX16
V23
D02 T271
T321
T332 WQ40
T351 T616 IN OUT ZQX15
OUT IN T331
P09 ZQX18 ZQX11 T612 W41 ZQX19 IN
V25
T275 T611 T617
T274 T123
WQ30
WQ50
ZQX12
OUT
D50 ZQX13
WQ20
WQ53
ZQZ39 T614
T613 IN
T281
WQ43 Reaction carousel waste
WQ10
W54
DGS
T283 T310 T330 T350

T320 T340 W12
T282
T401 ZQX17
M1002
T302 T851
T280 W31
W55 W53
W05
D07
D01 W56
Cleaning fluid T820 FL10 T853 T852
ZQX30
High-conc T831 T615 T625
T122 T117
J18
T502preheat 100WT503
FL11 T630 T631
ZQZ01 W60 waste collector High-concentration waste level

T116 ZX01 PRE05
V13
T279
T402 T547
Wash solutionT548
T353 CAN07 T860
Low-conc waste T812
T632
V12
T354
500W
D
WQ01 preheat T344 T343
T813 collector ZQX31 T865 T866
ZQX21
ZQZ38
100W W15
CAN08
V06
T119
J19
T404 WQS4 High-concentration waste
ZX02 ZX03
FL04 T403
ZX11 T008 T009
T803
T658
ZQX42
WQS3 T841 T640
T115
T007
IN OUT T870 Primary vacuum container
J17 T545 T543 ZQX43
T118
` T201
T544 T542 ZQX33 ZQX34
Vacuum pump ZQX51
T301 P05 M1005 W70 T650 ZQX40 ZQX50
M1003 T546 T541 IN IN control T648
W64
Water tank FIL02 T114
T113 FIL03 T006 W60
T651 T652 T636 ZQX44
T641
ZQX45
W70
ZX14 T821
CAN09 IN T642 T643 IN
CAN01 J14 T004 T005 J16 ZX10 ZQZ33 P08 T635
Vacuum pump
Inlet filter, maintained by user
T411 P10
FL09 T873
OU
T653
T654OU
FIL05 FL01
T861
T ZQX35T655 ZQX36
ZQZ31 T870 T T644
T645
T121 J13 T112 CAN02
W73 T871
OUT OUT
J12 ZQX46 T646 ZQX47
T002 T110
CAN03 ZX10
T647
W74 ZQX37
T001
T003 OUT FL06 W71 FIL04
ZQX48
W61 ZQX49
IN
J10 T874
T862
IN P03 FL05 T845
Diluted wash solution tankT540 ZQZ29
IN
T120 J15 T111 J11 IN Vacuum silencer
V27 T877 T878
Concentrated wash solution tank OUT
P07
OUT
W77
W72 T844
T539 ZQZ30
IN P06 Low-concentration waste
E
T538 OUT OUT FIL01
T863 T875
T876
W62 W75 W76
W63 T104
OUT1 OUT2 IN Water tank
V01
T864 Inlet
Water supply mdule T867
T103
J02
Water quality check FL13
Drain
outlet
FIL01
T106 T105 T108 T107 J03
J01
Water unit High-conc
J06 J04
T102
T101
waste tank
WQM1 CAN10
HV01
APPROVALS DATE
MINDRAY
DESIGN 2010-2-5
Zhong Zhigang
CHECK TITLE
Jiang Xueping BS800 Hydraulic System
File Bytes
F
CHECK Xie Chuanfen DWG NO.
Date Time
CONFIDENTIAL DISCLOSURE: This set of drawing(s) and all it's intellectual property rights (including copyright) subsisting herein are property of Shenzhen Mindray Bio-medical Electronics Co.,Ltd. No use, copies or reproductions should be made of this drawing or any part(s) thereof for whatever purpose nor shall any information, data, calculations, or other contents contained in this drawing be disseminated without prior written R&D P.CODE REV. 7.0
permission of Shenzhen Mindray Bio-medical Electronics Co.,Ltd. Zen Chao
PRE03
Software &Rev: Microsoft visio 2003 CHIEF ENG. SHEET SIZE
6-3
6.3 Principles of Hydropneumatic System
The Hydropneumatic system is composed of the sampling unit, cuvette wash station,
water supply unit, waste unit, and ISE Hydropneumatic unit. See the figure below.
6.3.1 Sampling Unit

The sampling unit consists of 1 sample probe, 2 reagent probes, 4 mixers, and 3
syringes. The sample syringe has a volume of 250l and the 2 reagent syringes have a
volume of 1ml.
This unit is mainly used for fixed-quantity sampling and probe/mixer cleaning.
Fixed-quantity sampling is realized through cooperation of the syringes, solenoid
valves and probes with the aim of delivering fixed-quantity reagent and sample.
Probe/mixer cleaning, driven by fluidic pumps, is to clean the interior/exterior
of the sample probe and reagent probes as well as the exterior of the mixers so
as to eliminate carryover among chemistries.
Wash mode of sample mixer and reagent mixer: The two mixers are washed with
diluted wash solution in a phase and then washed with deionized water in the
next phase.
To ensure accurate sampling, the deionized water used for cleaning the probe
interior needs to be degassed, that is, to be produced by passing through a
degasser.
The schematic diagram of the sampling unit is as shown below.
6-5
PRE06 PRE05
T253
NC
V04
T251 T252
COM NO
T243
NC D31 1mL
V03
COM NO
T241 T242
R2
D21 1mL
D30 T244 T245
D20
NC Clog detection R1 D32

D41
T225 T226 T227 T228
V02
T224
D42
COM PRE04 250uL D22
D40
T222 T223
T210
NO ZQZ37
S D43
T250
T240 SM2 SM1 RM2 RM1
T211 T221
M1006 D04
T207 T246 T256
T229
S R1 R2
OUT
D06
T206
P04
V05
T212 T213
OUT IN T205
IN
WQ21
J20 D23 WQ31 WQ41
WQ11 WQ51
D33
T501 T202
D44 D03 M1001
T203
D52
V08
N
COM
V10
T322 T342
V11
O
V09
D53 T272 T341
V28
V07
D54 T273
NC T311 T312
D02 T321
T271 T351
OUT IN T331 T332 WQ40
T275
P09
T274 WQ50
D50 WQ30
WQ53
WQ20
T281
WQ43
WQ10
DGS
T283 T310 T330 T350

T282 T320 T340
T401
M1002
T302
T280
D07
D01
J18
T122 T117
T116 ZX01
V13
Stop valve T279
T353
T402
V12
T354
500W
WQ01 T344 T343

V06
T119
J19
T404 WQS4
ZX02 ZX03
FL04 T403
ZX11 T008 T009
WQS3
T115
T007
IN OUT
J17 T545 T543
T118 T544 T542
` T201
T301 P05 M1005
M1003 T546 T541
Water tank FIL02 T114

T113 FIL03 T006
ZX14
CAN01 J14 T004 T005 J16 ZX10 ZQZ33
Inlet filter, maintained by user

T411
FL09
FIL05 FL01 ZQZ31
T121 J13 T112

J12 CAN02
T002 T110
CAN03 ZX10
T001
T003 OUT FL06
J10
IN P03 FL05
T120
Diluted wash solution tankT540 ZQZ29
J15 T111 J11
Concentrated wash solution tank OUT

T539 ZQZ30
IN P06
T538
Figure 6.1 Schematic diagram of sampling unit
6.3.2 Cuvette Wash Unit

The cuvette wash unit is divided into dispense module and aspirate module, which
cooperate with each other to clean the reaction cuvettes for 8 phases.
Fluidic pumps are employed to provide diluted wash solution (alkaline) for phase 1
and 2 and deionized water for phase 3-6. No fluid is dispensed or aspirated during
phase 7 and 8.
An air pump is used to discharge the waste fluid and wipe the cuvettes after cleaning.
High-concentration waste is generated during phase 1-8 and low-concentration waste
during phase 2-7. Wipe blocks are provided to absorb the remaining wash solution
inside cuvettes during phase 7 and 8.
The cuvette wash unit makes reuse of cuvettes possible by means of repeated
aspirate-dispense actions. The cuvette wash unit is composed of the following
6-6
secondary units:
Deionized water circulation unit
Cuvette wash unit
Predilution
Pneumatic unit
Preheating unit
The cuvette wash unit has the major aim of cleaning cuvettes. The deionized water
and diluted wash solution used for cleaning cuvettes, coming from the deionized
water circulation unit and auto predilution unit, are driven by the pneumatic unit and
preheated by the preheating unit.
The schematic diagram of the cuvette wash unit is as shown below.
Degassing
High-conc
Low-conc
waste
waste
Figure 6.2 Schematic diagram of cuvette wash unit
6.3.3 Water Supply Unit

The water supply unit supplies water automatically for the instrument, checking
water quality, and filtering the supplied water between the module itself and the
internal water tank of the instrument. Moreover, the water supply unit is capable of
checking fluid level and giving an alarm when the water tank contains insufficient
water. Also the water supply unit allows manual cutting off water supplying in
emergent situations.
The water supply unit is composed of the following components:
Water inlet filters: inside and outside the instrument
Inlet valve
Ball valve
Water quality detection device
6-7
Internal water tank
Level sense device
Tubes and connectors
6.3.4 Waste Unit

The waste unit is capable of:
Collecting all high-/low-concentration waste into corresponding containers and then
discharging them off via a waste pump.
Discharging high-/low-concentration waste separately.
Detecting fluid level inside the high-concentration waste tank.
All waste containers are equipped with an overflow alarm device.
The waste unit consists of the following components:
High-concentration waste collector
Low-concentration waste collector
Waste pump
External high-concentration waste tank
Level sense device
Tubes and connectors
The secondary vacuum container used for cuvette cleaning is one part of the waste
unit, because it is responsible for absorbing waste fluid from cuvettes during each
wash period and then discharging it to corresponding high-/low-concentration waste
collectors.
High-concentration waste includes the waste produced during cuvette cleaning in
phase 1-8 and the waste fluid of ISE measurements.
Low-concentration waste mainly comes from the following sources:
Cleaning interior/exterior of sample probe and reagent probes
Mixer cleaning
Auto cuvette cleaning in phase 2-7
Condensate water of the reagent carousel
Condensate water of the sample carousel (STAT sample positions)
Overflowed fluid of the reaction carousel
The first three are the major sources and account for over 99% of low-concentration
waste.
The schematic diagram of the cuvette wash unit is as shown below.
6-8
1 8 2 34 5 6 7
ISE measurement
waste T610 T620
High-conc Low-conc
waste waste
CAN05 CAN06
Mixer wash waste

T840
T830 W40
ZQX14
ZQX10 IN
W30
Probe wash waste IN
V22
V21 OUT
W20
OUT
V26
IN
V24
ZQX16OUT T623 T621 OUT
Reagent compartment
V23
IN OUT ZQX15 T622
T624
ZQX11 IN condensate water
V25
OUT T611 T612

T613
ZQX12 ZQX13 Small sample
T614 IN Reaction carousel waste
W41
W54
compartment waste
W12
ZQX17
T851
W31 W55 W53
W05 FL10 T852 W56
T820 High-conc waste T853
T831 T615 T625 T630 ZQX30
collector T631
CAN07 High-concentration waste level
FL11 T63
T860 T813 Low-conc T812 2
waste collector ZQX31
ZQX21
T865 T866 High-concentration waste level
CAN08
ZQX40
T803
T841 Primary vacuum
W15 T870
container ZQX33 ZQX34
T650
W70 IN IN W64
W60 T651 T652 T636
CAN09 P08
T821
T653 T654
T861 T873 W71 OUT
T87 ZQX35
T655 ZQX36OUT
W74 1
W75 ZQX37
W72
W61
IN
IN T862 T874 IN
V27 High-concentration waste
T877 T878
P07 W78
OUT
OUT OUT W73

T863 T875
T876
W62 W76 W77
Drain
W63 FL13 outlet
High-conc waste tank
CAN10
Figure 6.3 Schematic diagram of waste unit
6.3.5 ISE Hydropneumatic Unit

The ISE Hydropneumatic unit is capable of:
Pipetting sample via a sample probe.
Providing negative pressure for degassing of the ISE module.
Monitoring pressure.
Controlling pressure.
Giving an alarm for overpressure or low pressure.
The waste fluid produced by the ISE module is of high concentration.
This unit does not include the Hydropneumatic system that has been integrated with
the ISE module. The schematic diagram of the ISE Hydropneumatic unit is as
shown below.
6-9
I03
V29
I02 I04 I05 I06 P12 I07
ISE vacuum M1004
PRE02
Pressure
detection
board
I01
ISE Vacuum
ISE module
ISE Buffer
ISE Waste
Buffer
Figure 6.4 Schematic diagram of ISE Hydropneumatic unit
6.3.6 Other
The Hydropneumatic system of the instrument contains six external interfaces, as
shown in the figure below. Where,
Two fluidic outlets: used for discharging high-/low-concentration waste.
One fluidic inlet: used for supplying deionized water.
One pneumatic outlet: used for connecting the external air pump.
Two control cable connectors: used for connecting the external vacuum pump
and high-concentration waste level sense device.
Waste pump provided
Fluidic interfaces Vacuum pump for selection

High-conc waste tank provided
No. Name
1 Low-conc waste outlet
3 High-conc waste outlet 3 4
4 High-conc waste sensor
6 DI water inlet
7 Vacuum pump interface
8 Vacuum pump control
interface 7 8
Std Waste Water

Legend
1 6
Optional Vacuum Sensor
Figure 6.5 External fluidic interfaces of the instrument
6-10
6.4 Removing and Installation of Hydropneumatic
Components
This section describes removing and installation methods of the Hydropneumatic
components, and provides schematic diagrams and pictures of components for
service engineers to refer.
6.4.1 Overview
When an alarm is displayed on the operating software, service engineers can analyze
the instrument status and finally locate the failure source, and if necessary, replace
the failed part or component. Generally, service engineers are not recommended to
remove the electric devices, such as pumps, solenoid valves, clog detection device,
syringes, etc. Only when both hardware and software are confirmed normal but the
Hydropneumatic alarm still remains are service engineers suggested to remove the
relevant device and then analyze or replace it.
Prior to removing Hydropneumatic components, make sure that all pumps and
solenoid valves of the Hydropneumatic system have been turned off, and both the
analyzing unit power switch and main power switch have been placed to the OFF
position.
Table 6.1 Necessary tools for removing/installing Hydropneumatic components

Cross head screwdriver / 1
Socket head / 1
screwdriver
Cable strap / Several
Diagonal pliers / 1
Tube cutter / 1
6-11
6.4.2 Sampling Unit
(a) Front view
(b) Right rear view

Figure 6.6 Assembly drawing of whole unit Sampling unit
No. Name (Field FRU Code Remarks
Replaceable Unit,
FRU)
1 Syringe 250l 801-3101-00001-00
2 Syringe 1ml 801-BA80-00047-00
6-12
No. Name (Field FRU Code Remarks
Replaceable Unit,
FRU)
3 Pressure gauge 801-BA80-00077-00
assembly (with
connector)
4 Degasser assembly 801-BA80-00084-00
5 Degassing solenoid 801-BA80-00155-00
valve assembly
6 Degassing vacuum pump 801-BA80-00081-00
assembly
7 Interior wash pump 801-BA80-00080-00
assembly
8 Clog detection Y piece 801-BA40-00139-00
assembly 801-BX50-00088-00
9 Interior wash return 801-BA80-00089-00
valve assembly
10 Interior wash solenoid 801-BA80-00088-00
valve assembly
6.4.3 Cuvette Wash Unit
Figure 6.7 Assembly drawing of whole unit (rear view) Cuvette wash unit
No. Name (Field Replaceable Unit, FRU Code Remarks
FRU)
1 Auto wash solenoid valve assembly 801-BA80-00086-00
(with connector)
2 Wash solenoid valve assembly /
3 Concentrated wash solution pump 801-BA80-00096-00
6-13
FRU)
4 Whole unit preheating assembly 801-BA80-00003-00
(220V)
5 Deionized water circulating pump 801-BA80-00095-00
6 Diluted wash solution pump 801-BA80-00097-00
7 Refrigeration circulating pump 801-BA80-00154-00
PD-E051IT3
Figure 6.8 Auto wash tubes connection diagram

FRU)
1 Adapter tube (1.5mm-3mm) (Mould 801-BA80-00123-00
MR13339)
2 8-phase wash probe assembly 801-BA80-00038-00
Removing/Installing wash probe assembly

When to Do
When fluid overflows the cuvettes or the dispensed cleaning fluid is less than the
normal volume, probably a wash probe is clogged and needs to be removed and
unclogged.
Removing steps
Manually loosen the retaining screws on the wash probe bracket.
6-14
Remove the wash probe assembly and place it in a container.
Turn on the dispense valves and vacuum valves, and then locate the clogged
wash probe.
Use a needle to unclog the probe.
Installation steps
Align the locating holes on the wash probe assembly with the stop studs on the
bracket, and then slightly tighten the retaining screws.
Lower the wash probe assembly, use an alignment tool or eyes to check the
phase 7/8 wipe blocks corresponding to the cuvette wall, and then slightly adjust
the wash probe assembly to prevent the wash probes from colliding with the
cuvettes.
After finishing the second step, completely tighten the retaining screws on the
wash probe assembly.
NOTE
Operate carefully to prevent liquid from dropping into the reaction carousel and
cuvettes.
Removing/Installing a pump
When to Do
The pump does not work, that is, there is no flow or pressure.
The pump flow and pressure is low.
The pump has leaks.
Noise is produced when the pump is working.
Removing steps
Disconnect the pumps power cord connector.
Mark the connection mode of the inlet and outlet tubes and prevent them from
being confused.
Remove the tubes and apply straps on their openings to prevent liquid from
dropping entering the instrument.
Loosen the screws fixing the pump and then remove the pump.
Installation steps
Connect the inlet and outlet tubes according to the marks and then tighten the
tube clamps.
Tighten the retaining screws to fix the pump.
Make sure that the power cord of the DC pump is connected correctly.
In the case of an AC pump, ensure that the grounding wire has been connected
with the instrument frame.
6-15
NOTE
Exercise caution to avoid confusing the gas tube with the fluidic tube, and the inlet
tube with the outlet tube.
In the case of a DC pump, make sure that the power cord is connected to the correct
positive and negative ends; in the case of an AC pump, ensure that the grounding
wire has been connected correctly.
Reagent
DI water refrigeration
circulating circulating
pump
pump
Diluted wash
solution
Concentrated pump
wash solution
pump
Figure 6.9 Details of pump FRUs
Removing/Installing solenoid valve

When to Do
When a solenoid valve cannot be turned on or has leaks, it needs to be removed and
then analyzed or replaced.
Removing steps
Disconnect the solenoid valves power cord connector.
Mark the installation direction of the valve and the connection mode of the inlet
and outlet tubes to prevent them from being confused.
Remove the tubes and apply straps on their openings to prevent liquid spraying.
Loosen the screws fixing the solenoid valve and then remove the solenoid valve.
Installation steps
Check the installation direction according to the marks, connect the inlet and
outlet tubes, and then tighten the tube clamps or straps.
Tighten the retaining screws to fix the solenoid valve.
Make sure that the power cord is connected to the correct positive and negative
ends.
If the solenoid valve has a grounding wire, check if the grounding wire has been
connected with the instrument frame.
6-16
Figure 6.10 Details of auto wash solenoid valve assembly (with connector) FRUs
Figure 6.11 Details of wash solenoid valve assembly

Locations of the whole unit wash preheating assembly and cuvette wash preheating
assembly on the instrument are shown in the figure below.
FRU)
1 Whole unit preheating assembly 801-BA80-00003-00
(220V)
2 Cuvette wash preheating assembly 801-BA80-00002-00
(220V)
6-17
Figure 6.12 Locations of cuvette wash preheating assembly and whole unit wash
preheating assembly
Removing/Installing cuvette wash preheating assembly

When to Do
The heater is damaged.
The temperature sensor is damaged.
The temperature protection switch is damaged.
The canister has leaks.
The connectors are leaking.
Removing steps
Remove the rear panel.
Mark the connection modes of the following parts: inlet/outlet tubes, heater,
temperature protection switch and temperature sensor for wash solution, and
inlet/outlet tubes, heater, temperature protection switch and temperature sensor
for deionized water.
Disconnect the connectors of the heaters, sensors and protection switches.
Loosen the grounding screws.
Loosen the two hexagon socket head screws fixing the cuvette wash preheating
assembly.
Apply straps on the tube openings to prevent liquid from flowing out.
Disconnect the inlet and outlet tubes.
Installation steps
Prepare a new cuvette wash preheating assembly.
Connect the tubes according to the marks.
Use hexagon socket head screws to fix the preheating assembly.
Connect the connectors according to the marks.
Install the grounding wire.
6-18
Check if the preheating assembly is complete.
Restore the instrument.
NOTE
Operate carefully to prevent liquid from entering the instrument.
Connect the tubes and connectors correctly.
Exercise caution to distinguish the 110V preheating assembly with the 220V
preheating assembly.
Figure 6.13 Structure of cuvette wash preheating assembly
Removing/Installing whole unit wash preheating assembly

When to Do
The heater is damaged.
The temperature sensor is damaged.
The temperature protection switch is damaged.
The canister has leaks.
The connectors are leaking.
Removing steps
Remove the rear panel.
Disconnect the connectors of the heaters, sensors and protection switches.
Loosen the grounding screws.
Loosen the three screws fixing the whole unit preheating assembly.
Apply straps on the tube openings to prevent liquid from flowing out.
Disconnect the inlet and outlet tubes.
Installation steps
Prepare a new preheating assembly.
Connect the tubes.
Fix the preheating assembly.
Connect the connectors.
Install the grounding wire.
6-19
Check if the preheating assembly is complete.
Restore the instrument.
NOTE
Operate carefully to prevent liquid from entering the instrument.
Connect the tubes and connectors correctly.
Exercise caution to distinguish the 110V preheating assembly with the 220V
preheating assembly.
Heater/
Sensor
Protection
Outlet
switch
Inlet
Figure 6.14 Structure of whole unit wash preheating assembly
6.4.4 Water Supply Unit
(a) Front view
6-20
(b) Right rear view
Figure 6.15 Assembly drawing of whole unit Water supply unit
FRU)
1 Water tank fluid level sensor 801-BA80-00012-00
assembly
2 Water tank assembly 801-BA80-00011-00
3 Deionized water filter assembly 801-BA80-00019-00
4 Concentrated wash solution 801-BA80-00018-00
sensor assembly
5 Diluted wash solution fluid level 801-BA80-00017-00
sensor assembly
6 Diluted wash solution tank 801-BA80-00015-00
assembly
7 MR buffer solution /
8 Ball valve assembly (with bracket) 801-BA80-00079-00
9 Inlet solenoid valve assembly 801-BA80-00094-00
Removing/Installing water tank

When to Do
The water tank should be maintained regularly.
Removing steps
Turn off the ball valve.
Find the floater cable connector on the front panel of the instrument and then
unplug it. Remove the floater and keep it properly to prevent damage.
Disconnect the CPC quick connector at the bottom of the water tank, slightly
pull out the water tank, and then remove the tube from it.
Apply straps on the tubes opening or place the tube in a container to prevent
liquid from entering the instrument.
6-21
Remove the water tank from the instrument and then clean it.
Installation steps
Connect the floater to the water tank.
Insert the tube into the bottom of the water tank and adjust the tube to prevent
tangling.
Plug the floater connector into the front panel of the instrument.
Connect the CPC quick connector with the water tank.
Turn on the ball valve.
The deionized water filter assembly (115-005402-00) also includes the following two
FRUs.
FRU)
1 Stainless steel filter core 801-BA80-00020-00
2 Washer, O-shaped, 28*3.55, 801-BA80-00021-00
ternary ethylenepropylene
rubber, A70, black
Removing/Installing deionized water filter

When to Do
The deionized water filter should be maintained regularly.
Removing steps
Turn off the ball valve.
Disconnect the CPC quick connectors and then take out the filter.
Open the filter, and then clean it or replace the filter core.
Note: While removing the filter, exercise caution to prevent getting injured by the
filter bracket and prevent liquid inside the filter from spraying out.
Installation steps
Install the filter.
Fix the filter on the bracket according to the direction indicates on the
instrument panel.
Connect the CPC quick connectors at the top and bottom of the filter.
Turn on the ball valve.
The deionized water tube assembly (115-005412-00) contains another FRU as
described in the table below.
FRU)
1 Water tank filter assembly 801-BA80-00087-00
6-22
Figure 6.16 Water supply module
The external water supply module contains the following FRUs.
FRU)
1 Pressure switch 801-BA80-00145-00
PS41-30-4MNB-B-SP-V-10A-FS2.2BARR
2 Washer, O-shaped, 84*4, silicon gel, 801-BA80-00161-00
A65 semi-transparent, filter shell
accessory
3 Buffer tank assembly for water supply 801-BA80-00144-00
module
4 External water inlet filter for whole 801-BA80-00170-00
unit
6.4.5 Waste Unit
6-23
Figure 6.17 Assembly drawing of whole unit (rear view) Waste unit
No. Name (Field Replaceable FRU Code Remarks
Unit, FRU)
1 Low-concentration 801-BA80-00113-00
secondary vacuum waste
container assembly
2 High-concentration 801-BA80-00112-00
secondary vacuum waste
container assembly
3 Secondary vacuum suction 801-BA80-00085-00
valve assembly
4 Primary vacuum container 801-BA80-00013-00
assembly
5 Secondary vacuum release 801-BA80-00152-00
valve assembly
6 Waste discharge valve 801-BA80-00004-00
assembly
7 Low-concentration waste 801-BA80-00111-00
container assembly
8 High-concentration waste 801-BA80-00110-00
container assembly
9 Vacuum pump assembly 801-BA80-00082-00
10 Waste pump assembly 801-BA80-00083-00
Figure 6.18 Details of waste unit solenoid valve assembly
Removing/Installing primary/secondary vacuum containers

When to Do
When the containers have leaks or need to be maintained regularly.
Removing steps
Confirm and record all tubes connected with the container, and distinguish the
inlet tube from the outlet tube.
6-24
Remove the tubes, and then apply straps on the tube openings to prevent liquid
inside the tubes from spraying out.
Use a screwdriver to remove the container.
Replace or maintain the container.
Installation steps
Connect the inlet and outlet tubes according to the recorded connection mode,
and then tighten the tube clamps or straps.
Fix the container on the instrument.
When the instrument will be used at an altitude greater than 2000m, an external
air pump module is required to ensure the cuvette wash effects. The external air
pump assembly is as shown below.
Gas interface
Gas control interface
Power switch
Power socket
Silencing filter
Figure 6.19 External air pump

The external high-concentration waste tank assembly (115-005661-00) contains a
FRU.
6-25
FRU)
1 External high-concentration 801-BA80-00114-00
waste sensor assembly
6.4.6 ISE Hydropneumatic Unit
(a) Right view
(b) Front view

Figure 6.20 Assembly drawing of whole unit (right view) ISE Hydropneumatic unit

Unit, FRU)
1 Rotational diaphragm pump 801-BA34-00001-00
assembly
6-26
Unit, FRU)
2 ISE degassing solenoid valve 801-BA40-00214-00
3 Degassing membrane (FRU) 801-BA80-00213-00
4 ISE level detection sensor 801-BA80-00212-00
(FRU)
6-27
6.5 List of Hydropneumatic Materials
6.5.1 Pumps
No. Name Product Number
P03 Deionized water 801-BA80-00095-00

circulating pump
P04 Degassed water 801-BA80-00080-00
booster pump
P05 Concentrated wash 801-BA80-00096-00
solution pump
P06 Diluted wash solution 801-BA80-00097-00
pump
P07 Waste pump 801-BA80-00083-00
P08 Cuvette wash vacuum 801-BA80-00082-00
pump
P09 Degassing vacuum 801-BA80-00081-00
pump
P10 (Optional) external air 115-006146-00 (domestic)
pump 115-006144-00 (220V for overseas)
115-006296-00 (110V for overseas)
P11 (Optional) external 115-006145-00 (domestic)
water supply module 115-006142-00 (overseas)
P12 ISE degasser pump 801-BA34-00001-00
6.5.2 Solenoid Valves

V01 Water inlet valve 801-BA80-00094-00
V02 Sample probe interior 801-BA80-00088-00
wash valve
V03 Probe R1 interior 801-BA80-00088-00
wash valve
V04 Probe R2 interior 801-BA80-00088-00
wash valve
V05 Interior wash return 801-BA80-00089-00
valve
V06 Dilution valve 801-BA40-00214-00
V07 Sample probe 801-BA40-00214-00

exterior wash valve
V08 Probe R1 exterior 801-BA40-00214-00
wash valve
V09 Probe R2 exterior 801-BA40-00214-00
wash valve
6-28
V10 Sample mixer 1 wash 801-BA40-00214-00
valve
V11 Reagent mixer 1 wash 801-BA40-00214-00
valve
V12 Sample mixer 1 wash 801-BA40-00214-00
valve
V13 Reagent mixer 1 wash 801-BA40-00214-00
valve
V14 Cuvette wash phase-1 801-BA40-00214-00
dispense valve
dispense valve
dispense valve
dispense valve
dispense valve
dispense valve
V21 High-concentration 801-BA80-00004-00
waste discharge valve
V22 Low-concentration 801-BA80-00004-00
waste suction valve
waste suction valve
waste vacuum release
valve
waste vacuum release
valve
V27 Vacuum container 801-BA80-00004-00
V29 ISE degassing vacuum 801-BA40-00214-00
valve
6.5.3 Connectors
ID Product Number ID Product ID Product Number
Number
T006 T322 082-000317-00 T610 082-000342-00
T007 T331 082-000317-00 T620 082-000342-00
049-000213-00
T008 T332 082-000317-00 T830 043-000492-00
T009 T341 082-000317-00 T840 043-000492-00
6-29
Number
T105 043-000492-00 T342 082-000317-00 T611 082-000345-00
T106 043-000492-00 T351 082-000317-00 T621 082-000345-00
T107 043-000492-00 T352 082-000317-00 T613 0040-10-32302
T108 043-000492-00 T401 M90-100073--- T623 0040-10-32302
T120 M6Q-030067--- T402 M6Q-030061--- T614 0040-10-32302
T121 M6Q-030067--- T403 082-000317-00 T624 0040-10-32302
T110 082-000306-00 T404 082-000317-00 T612 082-000346-00
T003 082-000307-00 T547 082-000317-00 T622 082-000346-00
T111 041-001371-00 T548 082-000317-00 T615 082-000342-00
T112 041-001371-00 M6Q-030065--- T625 082-000342-00
T004 082-000307-00 T411 082-000319-00 T631 082-000342-00
T005 082-000307-00 Conical seal T630 M6Q-030102---
T113 043-000492-00 T538 082-000503-00 T820 043-000492-00
T301 M90-100073--- T539 082-000307-00 T831 043-000492-00
M6Q-030101---
T201 M90-100073--- T860 043-000492-00
T118 082-000343-00 T542 M6Q-030102--- T853 043-000492-00
T114 043-000492-00 T543 0040-10-32302 T852 043-000492-00
T115 / T544 0040-10-32302 T813 043-000492-00
T116 / T545 0040-10-32302 T812 043-000492-00
T117 043-000492-00 T801 M6Q-030101--- T803 043-000492-00
T122 043-000492-00 T802 M6Q-030096--- T841 043-000492-00
T123 M6Q-030064--- T810 M6Q-030096--- T870 043-000492-00
T279 041-002376-00 T811 M6Q-030096--- T820 M6Q-030067---
T271 M6Q-030015--- T343 082-000317-00 T821 M6Q-030067---
T273 M6Q-030015--- T353 082-000317-00 T848 M6Q-030067---
T274 082-000343-00 T010 M6Q-030059--- T849 M6Q-030067---
T275 082-000343-00 T011 M6Q-030059--- T850 M6Q-030101---
T202 043-000660-00 T012 M6Q-030059--- T870 M6Q-030101---
T203 M90-100073--- T701 M6Q-030068--- T871 043-000492-00
T501 082-000317-00 T702 M6Q-030109--- T861 082-000308-00
T502 082-000317-00 T703 M6Q-030109--- T873 082-000308-00
T503 082-000317-00 T704 082-000115-00 T864 082-000308-00
T205 082-000311-00 T705 082-000115-00 T876 082-000308-00
T206 082-000311-00 T706 082-000317-00 T862 041-001369-00
T207 082-000311-00 T555 M6Q-030065--- T863 041-001369-00
T221 M6Q-030065--- T557 M6Q-120021--- T874 041-001369-00
082-000319-00 Conical seal
T240 T516 T875 041-001369-00
Conical seal
T250 T518 T651 M6Q-030102---
6-30
Number
T211 T520 T652 M6Q-030102---
M6Q-030065--- T522 T653 M6Q-030102---
T212
082-000319-00 T554 082-000317-00 T654 M6Q-030102---
Conical seal
T213 T556 082-000317-00 T655 M6Q-030064---
T210 M6Q-030015--- T515 082-000317-00 T650 M6Q-030064---
T222 M6Q-030065--- T517 082-000317-00 T658 082-000340-00
T241 082-000319-00 T519 082-000317-00 T632 M6Q-030080---
T251 Conical seal T521 082-000317-00 T103 042-001262-00
0040-10-32304 T550 082-000317-00 T104 042-001262-00
T223 0040-10-32305 T551 082-000317-00 T877 042-002313-00
Conical seal
T552 082-000317-00 T635 082-000341-00
M6Q-030065--- T553 082-000317-00 T865 042-002313-00
T242
M6Q-120021--- T507 082-000317-00 T867 BA40-20-61345
T252 Conical seal T508 082-000317-00 T915 M6Q-030067---
M6Q-030065--- T509 082-000317-00 T916 M6Q-030067---
T224 M6Q-120021--- T510 082-000317-00
Conical seal T918 M6Q-030067---
M6Q-030065--- T511 082-000317-00 T919 M6Q-030067---

T243
082-000319-00 T512 082-000317-00 T917 043-000492-00
Conical seal
T253 T513 082-000317-00 T913 043-000492-00
T225 M6Q-030065--- T514 082-000317-00 T851 043-000492-00
T226 M6Q-120021--- T504 M6Q-030043--- T912 041-001371-00
Conical seal
T227 T505 M6Q-030043--- T911 041-001371-00
T506 M6Q-030043--- T909 082-000308-00
0040-10-32304
T228 0040-10-32305 T549 M6Q-030043--- T910 082-000308-00
Conical seal
T244 T601 T350 082-000317-00

T245 M6Q-030065--- T602 T320 082-000317-00
082-000319-00
T254 T603 T330 082-000317-00
Conical seal
T255 T604 M6Q-030065--- T340 082-000317-00
T229 BA30-20-06758 T605 M6Q-120021--- T311 082-000317-00
Conical seal
T246 082-000318-00 T606 T312 082-000317-00
T256 082-000318-00 T607 T321 082-000317-00
T310 082-000317-00 T608 T541 043-000492-00
082-000323-00
T344 082-000317-00 T354 082-000317-00 T546 082-000311-00
T616 M90-000025--- T617 M90-000025---
6-31
6.5.4 Tubes
No. Tube ID Product Number No. Tube ID Product Number No. Tube ID Product Number
1 J01 M6G-020028--- 59 ZX03 082-000314-00 117 ZQX20 M6G-020026---
2 J02 M6G-020028--- 60 ZX10 082-000316-00 118 ZQX21 M6G-020026---
3 J03 082-000313-00 61 ZX11 082-000316-00 119 ZQX22 M6G-020026---
4 J04 082-000313-00 62 ZX12 082-000316-00 120 ZQX30 082-000427-00
5 J05 082-000356-00 63 ZQZ01 082-000314-00 121 ZQX31 082-000427-00
6 J10 082-000356-00 64 ZQZ06 082-000314-00 122 ZQX32 M6G-020026---
7 J11 082-000356-00 65 ZQZ07 082-000314-00 123 ZQX33 M6G-020026---
8 J12 082-000315-00 66 ZQZ08 082-000314-00 124 ZQX34 M6G-020026---
9 J13 082-000315-00 67 ZQZ09 082-000314-00 125 ZQX35 M6G-020026---
10 J14 082-000356-00 68 ZQZ10 082-000314-00 126 ZQX36 M6G-020026---
11 J15 082-000356-00 69 ZQZ11 082-000314-00 127 ZQX37 M6G-020026---
12 J16 082-000356-00 70 ZQZ12 082-000314-00 128 ZQX40 082-000427-00
13 J17 082-000356-00 71 ZQZ13 082-000314-00 129 ZQX42 082-000427-00
14 J18 082-000356-00 72 ZQZ14 082-000314-00 130 W01 082-000305-00
15 J19 082-000356-00 73 ZQZ15 082-000314-00 131 W02 082-000305-00
16 J20 M6G-020026--- 74 ZQZ16 082-000314-00 132 W03 082-000305-00
17 D01 082-000357-00 75 ZQZ17 M6G-020049--- 133 W04 082-000305-00
18 D02 M6G-020047--- 76 ZQZ18 M6G-020049--- 134 W05 082-000305-00
19 D03 M6G-020047--- 77 ZQZ19 M6G-020049--- 135 W10 082-000305-00
20 D04 082-000312-00 78 ZQZ20 M6G-020049--- 136 W11 082-000305-00
21 D05 082-000312-00 79 ZQZ29 082-000356-00 137 W12 082-000305-00
22 D06 082-000316-00 80 ZQZ30 082-000356-00 138 W13 082-000305-00
23 D07 082-000316-00 81 ZQZ31 082-000356-00 139 W14 082-000305-00
24 D20 082-000316-00 82 ZQZ33 082-000357-00 140 W15 082-000305-00
25 D21 082-000316-00 83 ZQZ37 M6G-020026--- 141 W20 082-000305-00
26 D22 082-000316-00 84 ZQZ38 082-000314-00 142 W21 082-000305-00
6-32
27 D23 M6G-020049--- 85 ZQZ39 082-000314-00 143 W30 082-000305-00
28 D30 082-000316-00 86 ZQZ40 082-000314-00 144 W31 082-000305-00
29 D31 082-000316-00 87 ZQZ41 082-000314-00 145 W40 082-000305-00
30 D32 082-000316-00 88 ZQZ42 082-000314-00 146 W41 082-000305-00
31 D33 M6G-020049--- 89 ZQZ43 082-000314-00 147 W50 082-000305-00
32 D40 082-000316-00 90 ZQZ44 M6G-020049--- 148 W51 082-000305-00
33 D41 M6G-020049--- 91 ZQZ45 M6G-020049--- 149 W52 082-000305-00
34 D42 M6G-020049--- 92 I01 M6G-020046--- 150 W53 082-000305-00
35 D43 0040-10-32301 93 I02 M6G-020026--- 151 W54 082-000305-00
36 D44 M90-000026--- 94 I03 M6G-020026--- 152 W55 082-000305-00
37 D50 M6G-020026--- 95 I04 M6G-020026--- 153 W56 082-000305-00
38 D51 M6G-020026--- 96 I05 M6G-020009--- 154 W57 082-000305-00
39 D52 M6G-020026--- 97 I06 082-000314-00 155 W60 082-000305-00
40 D53 M6G-020026--- 98 I07 082-000314-00 156 W61 082-000357-00
41 D54 M6G-020026--- 99 ZQX01 M6G-020049--- 157 W62 082-000357-00
42 WQ01 082-000357-00 100 ZQX02 M6G-020049--- 158 W63 082-000305-00
43 WQ10 082-000314-00 101 ZQX03 M6G-020049--- 159 W64 M6G-020028---
44 WQ11 082-000314-00 102 ZQX04 M6G-020049--- 160 W70 082-000305-00
45 WQ20 082-000314-00 103 ZQX05 M6G-020049--- 161 W71 082-000305-00
46 WQ21 082-000314-00 104 ZQX06 M6G-020049--- 162 W72 082-000305-00
47 WQ30 082-000314-00 105 ZQX07 M6G-020049--- 163 W73 082-000305-00
48 WQ31 082-000314-00 106 ZQX08 M6G-020049--- 164 W74 082-000305-00
49 WQ40 082-000314-00 107 ZQX10 082-000427-00 165 W75 082-000357-00
50 WQ41 082-000314-00 108 ZQX11 082-000427-00 166 W76 082-000357-00
51 WQ42 082-000314-00 109 ZQX12 082-000427-00 167 W77 082-000305-00
52 WQ43 082-000314-00 110 ZQX13 082-000427-00 168 W78 M6G-020028---
53 WQ50 082-000314-00 111 ZQX14 082-000427-00 169 WQS3 082-000314-00
54 WQ51 082-000314-00 112 ZQX15 082-000427-00 170 WQS4 082-000314-00
6-33
55 WQ52 082-000314-00 113 ZQX16 082-000427-00
56 WQ53 082-000314-00 114 ZQX17 082-000427-00
57 ZX01 082-000357-00 115 ZQX18 M90-000025---
58 ZX02 082-000314-00 116 ZQX19 M90-000025---
6-34
7 Alignment and Maintenance
7-1
7.1 Basic Operations
7.1.1 Overview
Screen description
Alignment can be performed by selecting Utility -> Maintenance. See the figure
below.
1 Maintenance: to perform daily maintenance for the instrument.

2 Diagnostics: to diagnose the sample system, reagent system, reaction system,
Hydropneumatic system and ISE system.
3 Alignment: to align the whole unit from various aspects, among which position,
Pyrology and Hydropneumatics are most-frequently used.
4. Parameters: to inquire and configure parameters of various units, and to view the
software version of middle-/lower-level units.
The Alignment window provides alignment options for the following units:
photoelectric unit, reaction unit, sample carousel, reagent carousel, probe R1 unit,
probe R2 unit, sample probe unit, sample mixer unit, reagent mixer unit, cuvette
wash station, bar code unit, Hydropneumatic unit, and Pyrology unit.
7-2
7-3
7.2 Alignment Procedure
NOTE
1) Before starting alignment, ensure that the moving parts can move normally
without being blocked by any objects and the cables are connected correctly.
2) Every alignment procedure must be finished; otherwise, the updated parameters
cannot be saved.
3) Perform alignment according to the instructions displayed on the software screen.
4) If you perform the alignment without using an alignment tool, make sure that the
probes and mixers are aligned with the center of the corresponding cuvettes; the
cuvette wash station is adjusted with its wipe blocks located at the center of
corresponding cuvettes; the reagent probes R1/R2 are at the center of the reagent
bottle opening; and the sample probe is at the center of a sample cup or Microtube.
The basic alignment commands of each smart module are summarized on the
corresponding tab page and described in the following sections.
7.2.1 Photoelectric Unit
The photometric unit contains the following alignment commands: 1. Light intensity
adjustment, 2. Photoelectricity collection position adjustment, 3. Photoelectric gain
adjustment, and 4. Photoelectric signal collection.
Choose the desired alignment command, and then operate as instructed by the
operating software.
Light intensity adjustment

The Light Intensity Adjustment command is used to adjust the light intensity. Select
Index Setup to display the following window.
7-4
Photoelectric collection position adjustment
The Photoelectric Collection Position Adjustment is used to adjust the photoelectric
collection positions and the photoelectric collection curves for each channel.
AD collection starting
signal, middle of flat area
Flat area of all

channels should be
normal.
1. Select Start, and then operate according to the instructions displayed on the
software screen.
2. When the lamp has been turned for over 10 minutes, select OK.
3. Adjust the reaction carousel position sensor till the photoelectric collection
7-5
position is in the middle of the flat area and the curves for each channel are almost
level. The left direction is clockwise and the right direction is counterclockwise.
Reaction carousel position sensor
Photoelectric gain adjustment

The Photoelectric Gain Adjustment command is used to check if the water blank
value and dark current exceed the indices.
1 Select 3 Photoelectric Gain Adjustment.
2 Operate according to the instructions displayed on the software screen.
3 Check if the photoelectric gain is greater than 65 for 340nm, 30 for 380nm, and
20 for other channels. Check if the water blank AD value is within 47000-50000,
and the dark current is less than 200.
4 If the water blank value exceeds 50000, decrease the target voltage by 0.1V for
every excessive 1000, and then readjust the light intensity and photoelectric gain.
Photoelectric Signal Collection

When to use:
Checking if the lamp is steady.
7-6
Troubleshooting the photometric system.
Measuring dark current.
Parameter requirements after alignment:
None
NOTE
This function is only used to measure the brightness and dark current of the
photometric system, and will not affect the parameters. If you remove a cuvette or
turn off the lamp during the test, restore them after the test and wait for a moment
till they get steady.
The operating procedure is as follows:

1 Select Utility - Maintenance - Alignment - Photometer Unit. Select 4
Photoelectric Signal Collection.
2 The Photoelectric Signal Collection window is displayed. Enter the

cuvette number and test time. To measure the dark current, click Light Off to
turn off the lamp. To measure the air blank AD of the photometer, you
should remove cuvettes from the reaction carousel. To measure the water
blank AD of cuvettes, add deionized water to corresponding cuvettes.
3 Select Start. The operating software starts photoelectric signal collection

according to the settings. At this moment, only the Stop button is available for
use.
7-7
4 After the test, the following window appears. Select OK to reset the reaction
carousel.
5 The test results are saved in the LampSignalGatherResults file of the

OperationSoft folder. The filename is LampSignalGatherRst_Test time.csv.
The test time, lamp brightness, gain of each channel, and concrete values and
statistic values of each channel are included in the file.
7.2.2 Reaction Carousel Unit

Only the Reaction Carousel Rotary procedure is performed based on the whole unit.
Reaction carousel rotary

1. Select 2 Reaction Carousel Rotary on the Reaction Unit tab page.
2. Place a cuvette alignment tool in the sample dispense position and diluting
position as well as dispense positions of probes R1/R2. When setting the cuvette
alignment tool, please note that the longer side should be taken as the alignment
direction, and an alignment tool should be laid in the sample dispense position and
diluting position as well as dispense positions of probes R1/R2.
3. Manually rotate the sample probe and reagent probes 1/2 to make them go to the
center of the alignment tool. If they failed, loosen the three alignment screws on the
probe arm, and then adjust the arm length and the reaction carouse rotation position
parameters.
7-8
4. Check the alignment effect of step 3.
5. The alignment procedure is complete.
7.2.3 Sample Carousel Unit

The sample carousel unit contains six alignment commands, which are: 1. Inner
sample carousel outer ring radial position, 2. Inner sample carousel inner ring radial
position, 3. Outer sample carousel outer ring radial position, 4. Outer carousel outer
ring reversed stop position compensation, 5. Outer sample carousel inner ring radial
position, and 6. Outer carouse inner ring reversed stop position compensation.
Alignment procedure:
1. Choose the desired alignment command.
2. Adjust the sample probe to make it align with the center of the sample carousel,
and then lay the alignment tool. See the figure below.
7-9
3. When the sample probe is powered off, manually rotate it to the sample carousel
by passing through the center of the alignment tool.
4. Select the left arrow to adjust the sample carousel radial position till the sample
probe is at the center of corresponding sample cup.
5. Confirm the sample carousel radial position.
6. The alignment procedure is complete. Note that the modified parameters can be
saved only after the alignment procedure is complete.
7.2.4 Reagent Carousel Unit

The reagent carousel unit contains four alignment commands, which are Reagent
carousel 1 circumferential position adjustment, Reagent carousel 1 reversed rotary
compensation, Reagent carousel 2 circumferential position adjustment, and Reagent
carousel 2 reversed rotary compensation.
Choose the desired alignment command and then operate as instructed by the
software prompts.
7-10
Lay the alignment tool as shown in the figure below.
7.2.5 Probe and Mixer Units

The probes can be aligned in similar ways, and this section will take the reagent
probe as an example to describe alignment methods.
Alignment positions of probes and mixers:
rotary to: to alignhorizontally to.
height: to alignvertically to.
reversed rotary stop position adjustment: to alignreversed-horizontally to
stop position of.
Large step: set the number of steps for alignment.
Small step: a micro step.
Left arrow: to rotate clockwise; right arrow: to rotate counterclockwise.
Up/Down arrows: to move upward or downward for the specified steps.
7-11
Alignment of probe units
To align a reagent probe horizontally to the reaction carousel:
1. Select the desired alignment command. The reagent probe, reagent carouse, and
reaction carousel reset mechanically.
2. Select Continue to proceed to the next step.
3. Loosen the retaining screw of the probe arm and then adjust the radial position of
the arm. If you find that the reagent probe is not aligned to the radial position of the
probe arm, readjust the arm clockwise or counterclockwise.
4. Confirm the adjustment effect of step 3 and then close the window.
You should perform other steps as instructed by the software screens.
Note: When performing an alignment command containing probeheight,
use a 0.15mm clearance gauge to measure a gap.
When aligning a probe to the vertical extreme position of a carousel, adjust four
positions and then take the average of the four to configure the parameters.
When aligning a probe to the wash well, refer to the figure below, and make sure that
the alignment tool is locked on the wash well edge and the nozzle.
7-12
Note: The alignment tool used for aligning the sample probe with the ISE module is
as shown below. Lay the alignment tool on the ISE sample inject cup and then
tighten the alignment tool.
Alignment of mixer units

This section takes the Sample mixer rotary to cuvette as an example.
7-13
1. Select the desired alignment command. The reaction carousel and sample mixer
reset mechanically.
2. Loosen the retaining screws of the probe arm and mixer motor, and then adjust
the mixer assembly to make the mixer go to the center of the alignment tool. The
alignment tool for adjusting the mixer assembly is as shown below. Please note that
the smaller hole should face upwards during horizontal position adjustment and the
bigger hole should face upwards during vertical position adjustment.
3. Select the left or right arrows to tune the radial position of the sample mixer till
requests are met.
4. Check and confirm the alignment effect.
To align the mixer 2 and 3, adjust the parameters.
When adjusting the vertical position of the mixer, lower it to the middle of the
alignment tool to make the Go Gauge pass instead of the No-go Gauge.
7-14
The reagent mixers can be aligned in the same way as the sample mixers.
Alignment of cuvette wash unit

To adjust the cuvette wash unit, place alignment tools with square openings for the
wipe blocks and the one with breached opening for the first phase.
Wipe phase
Phase 1
To adjust the vertical position of the wash unit, load cuvettes to the corresponding
8-phase wash positions. If the stop blocks are lifted for at least 0.5mm when the
wash unit lowers down, it means that the wash unit position is correct.
7.2.6 Bar Code Units

The bar code units include sample bar code unit and reagent bar code unit.
The sample bar code unit contains Outer sample carousel scanning position
adjustment, Inner sample carousel scanning position adjustment, and Sample bar
code stability test.
Only the first two commands are needed for ordinary alignment.
7-15
Outer sample carousel scanning position adjustment
1. Open the bar code alignment window. Lay the alignment tool according to the
figure below.
7-16
2. Loosen the retaining screws fixing the bar code reader and bracket, and then adjust
the light beam transmitted from the bar code reader to make it pass through the
center of the bar code scanning window.
3. If the previous step is not satisfied, tune the light beam again.
4. Scan a bar-coded sample cups or reagent bottles and check if the bar code
information is correct.
Inner sample carousel scanning position adjustment

Open the alignment window and then operate as instructed by the software screen.
Note: The bar code reader will be initialized during the alignment procedure, and this
is the same for both the reagent bar code reader and sample bar code reader. Lay the
alignment tool according to the figure below.
The reagent bar code unit can be aligned in the same way as the sample bar code unit.
Lay the alignment tools according to the figure below.
7-17
7.2.7 Hydropneumatic Unit
The Hydropneumatic unit contains alignment commands to test the pumps/valve, to
inquire the current status of fluidic containers, to prime the fluidic path, to
check/adjust the probe interior wash pressure, and to adjust the probe exterior wash
pressure.
Valve and floater test
Prerequisites to test the valves in batch:

You have completely understood the functions and relations of all valves.
The probes and mixers that may be affected by the alignment are currently at their
7-18
wash wells.
Pump check
The Pump Check option is used to align the fluidic/air pumps and inquire the
vacuum pressure.
Time: pressure data sampling period.

Range: Y-axis display range of the pressure curve.
Start: select this button to start receiving pressure data and displaying it on the
screen. To pause, stop or resume the sampling, select Pause, Stop and Resume.
Select the down arrow on the right of the pull-down list box, and then choose an
option to display the curve.
Fluidic prime
The Fluidic Prime option is used to prime the interior/exterior of probes and
cuvette wash station. Operate according to the instructions displayed on the screen.
7-19
When the system is priming the cuvette wash station, place an opening container
below the wash probes to prevent overflow.
Probe interior wash pressure adjustment

When the probe interior wash pressure decreases beyond the valid range, align the
pressure as instructed by the software screen. Remove the right rear panel, and then
spin the blue knob on the AC drive board. The knob has been marked with a red dot,
which means that the pressure has been adjusted to an appropriate value before the
instrument leaves the factory.
7-20
AC drive board
Probe interior wash pressure check
The Check Probe Interior Wash Pressure option is used to inquire the probe interior
wash pressure. Select Check Probe Interior Wash Pressure to display the
window as shown above. If the probe interior wash pump is off, turn it on. The
interior wash valve will be turned on automatically, and the three probes will then be
washed. Homing mechanical parts is forbidden during the cleaning process. To
inquire the interior wash pressure, select Start on the upper-right corner of the
window to start inquiring the probe interior wash pressure.
7.2.8 Pyrology Unit

This section provides a summary of the alignment procedures of the Pyrology unit.
7-21
Sensor configuration
The Sensor Configuration option is used to calculate, configure and inquire the
temperature sensor parameters, AD values and sensor lead length of the reaction
carousel. The alignment window is as shown below.
To check and configure the temperature sensor parameters of the reaction carousel,
1) Select Search in the Length area to inquire the length of the sensor cable.
2) Choose a sensor in the left part of the alignment window.
3) Enter the resistance values for three temperature points of the sensor.
4) Select Calculate to calculate the parameters and then check if the sensor is
qualified.
5) Select Config to configure the sensor parameters.
7-22
Reaction carousel heater control
The following alignment options are provided: 2. Turn on reaction carousel heater, 3.
Turn off reaction carousel heater,
4. Reaction carousel temperature test.
Open the alignment window and then operate according to the instructions displayed
on the screen.
Temperature curves
Options 5-7 allow you to view the temperature curves of the reaction carousel, wash
solution and reagent refrigeration. See the figure below:
7-23
The operation method is similar to that of the pressure check. The system allows
turning on/off the heater, collecting real-time data, and selecting sensors.
To inquire the heater power and sensor temperature of the reaction carousel,
1) Set the sampling times and the interval between two sampling.
2) Set the Y-axis display range of the temperature curve.
3) Select Start to collect the heater power and sensor temperature. For the collected
data, you are allowed to:
adjust the Y-axis display range of the temperature curve during data
collecting.
zoom in the temperature curve.
To turn on or off the reaction carousel heater,
Click the Turn on Heater or Turn off Heater button on the alignment window.
If it does not work, click the two buttons again.
Fan status query

The Fan Status Query option is used to inquire the current status of each fan.
7-24
7-25
7-26
8 Alarms and Troubleshooting
Event ID Component Event Description Flag Probable Causes Corrective Actions

A00001 Instruction Instruction error / Equipment instruction execute error Switch off the analyzing unit power and
error due to software switch on it again. Recover failure by
logic error during performing the Home maintenance
controlling system procedure. If this message appears for
execution 3 times, contact our R&D department.
A00006 Instruction Main control unit / E2PROM read/write error Switch off the analyzing unit power and
error E2PROM switch on it again. Recover failure by
read/write error performing the Home maintenance
procedure. If this message appears for
3 times, contact our R&D department.
A01006 Sample probe Sample probe / Sample probe vertical movement error Sample probe vertical movement error
unit vertical movement 1. Sensor status error: 1. Sensor status error:
error Belt or belt pulley is loose. Check if belt or belt wheel is loose,
1. Sensor status 2. Failed to find the zero position: tighten them if so;
error 2. Failed to find the zero position:
1) The assembly is jammed;
2. Failed to find 1) Remove obstacle or replace with a
2) Driver circuit error;
8-1
the zero position 3) Vertical motor error; new assembly;
3. Collision occurs 4) Vertical sensor error; 2) Replace PCB;
during operation 5) Belt pulley is loose; 3) Replace motor;
other than 3. Collision occurs during operation 4) Replace sensor;
aspirating other than aspirating: 5) Tighten properly;
4. Collision error 1) Collision sensor or circuit or cable
3. Collision occurs during operation
remains failure; other than aspirating:
5. Vertical 2) Collision sensor is not blocked 1) Replace sensor or PCB or cable;
movement is not when assembling the sample probe;
allowed in current 2) Reassemble;
3) Incorrect sample probe
3) Rotate positioning sensor to
horizontal position
positioning; remove dust or adjust probe to be
4) Incorrect sample carousel
vertical; if problem remains, adjust
Sample probe positioning; positioning parameters;
horizontal
4. Collision error remains: 4) Adjust sample carousel positioning
movement error
1) Collision sensor or circuit or cable
parameters;
1. Sensor status
failure; 4. Collision error remains:
error
2) Collision sensor is not blocked 1) Replace sensor or PCB or cable;
2. Failed to find
when assembling the sample probe; 2) Reassemble;
the zero position
3) Collision sensor is not blocked due3) Mount the spring of blocking plate
3. Collision occurs
to deformation of blocking plates again;
during horizontal
driving spring;
movement 5. Vertical movement is not allowed in
5. Vertical movement is not allowed in
current horizontal position:
4. Horizontal
current horizontal position:
movement is not Home instrument or sample probe
allowed in current Software error unit.
vertical position Sample probe horizontal movement
Sample syringe Sample probe horizontal movement error
movement error error 1. Sensor status error:
1. Sensor status 1. Sensor status error: Check if belt or belt wheel is loose,
error Belt or belt pulley is loose. tighten them if so;
2. Failed to find 2. Failed to find the zero position: 2. Failed to find the zero position:
the zero position 1) Driving circuit error; 1) Replace PCB;
2) Motor error; 2) Replace motor;
3) Home position sensor error; 3) Replace sensor;
4) Belt pulley is loose;
8-2
3. Collision occurs during horizontal 4) Tighten properly;
movement: 3. Collision occurs during horizontal
1) Driving circuit error; movement:
2) Motor error; 1) Replace PCB;
3) Home position sensor error; 2) Replace motor;
4) Belt pulley is loose; 3) Replace sensor;
4. Horizontal movement is not allowed 4) Tighten properly;
in current vertical position: 4. Horizontal movement is not allowed
Software error in current vertical position:
Sample syringe movement error Home instrument or sample probe
1. Sensor status error: unit.
Belt or belt pulley is loose. Sample syringe movement error
2. Failed to find the zero position: 1. Sensor status error:
1) The assembly is jammed; Check if belt or belt wheel is loose,
2) Driving circuit error; tighten them if so;
3) Motor error; 2. Failed to find the zero position:
4) Sensor error; 1) Remove obstacle or replace with a
new assembly;
5) Belt pulley is loose.
2) Replace PCB;
3) Replace motor;
4) Replace sensor;
5) Tighten properly.
A01007 Sample probe Sample probe / Sample probe vertical movement error Sample probe vertical movement error
unit vertical movement 1. Collision occurs during aspirating: 1. Collision occurs during aspirating:
error 1) Collision sensor or circuit or cable 1) Replace sensor or PCB or cable;
1. Collision occurs failure; 2) Reassemble;
during aspirating: 2) Collision sensor is not blocked 3) Rotate positioning sensor to
when assembling the sample probe; remove dust or adjust probe to be
3) Incorrect sample probe vertical; if problem remains, adjust
positioning; positioning parameters;
4) Incorrect sample carousel 4) Adjust sample carousel positioning
positioning; parameters.
A01021 Sample probe Clog detection / 1. Connection error between clog 1. Check cable for any signs of fray or
8-3
unit board detection board and wash control driver loose cable, or disconnection, or short
communication board; circuit;
error. 2. Clog detection board malfunction 2. Check if the power indication light
for clog detection board is on properly;
check if clog detection board is working
correctly;
3. Replace clog detection board if
malfunction has been identified.
A01022 Sample probe Sample syringe / The aspirate volume is beyond the Define the aspirate volume correctly.
unit aspirates too much range of the syringe.
A01023 Sample probe Sample syringe / The dispense volume is beyond the Define the dispense volume correctly.
unit dispenses too much range of the syringe.
A01024 Sample probe Sample probe fails / 1. No sample is loaded on the 1. Check if there is sufficient sample,
unit to detect liquid designated position; and run the test again;
level when 2. Insufficient sample; 2. If there are level detection error,
aspirating 3. Sample probe level detection board check sample probe, level detection
1. Sample probe error. board and connecting cable; replace if
fails to detect any abnormity is identified.
liquid level when
aspirating on
sample carousel;
2. Sample probe
fails to detect
liquid level when
aspirating on
reaction carousel;
3. No liquid level is
detected when
aspirating diluted
wash solution
A01026 Sample probe Sample probe / 1. Sample probe is clogged when 1. Check if the sample meets
unit dispenses aspirating; requirement and is sufficient in
insufficient sample 2. Sample probe aspirates nothing; volume, and then run the test again;
3. Syringe assembly error. 2. Check if there is any abnormity of
syringe assembly.
8-4
A01027 Sample probe Sample probe / 1. No sample is loaded on the 1. Check if there is sufficient sample,
unit aspirates nothing designated position; and run the test again;
2. Insufficient sample; 2. If level detection error is identified,
3. Sample probe level detection error; check sample probe, level detection
4. Clog detection error. board and connecting cable; replace if
any abnormity is identified;
3. If clog detection error is identified,
check if there is loose connection or
liquid leakage in sample probe hydro
system.
A01028 Sample probe Sample probe fails / 1. No DI water or hydro error; 1. Check if hydro is normal;
unit to detect liquid 2. Sample probe level detection error. troubleshoot if there is any abnormity;
level during 2. If level detection error is identified,
cleaning check sample probe, level detection
1. No liquid level is board and connecting cable; replace if
detected in wash any abnormity is identified.
well during unit
homing procedure;
detected in wash
well during
cleaning procedure
A01029 Sample probe Sample probe is / 1. Sample contains clots or insufficient 1. Check if sample has been
unit clogged when sample; pre-processed properly; check if
aspirating 2. Sample probe hydro error; sample contains foreign matters such as
3. Clog detection system error. clot; check if there is sufficient sample;
2. Clean the sample probe with diluted
wash solution. If the problem remains,
remove the sample probe and unclog it.
3. Check if hyro is normal, especially if
there is any air bubbles in clog
detection pressure sensor;
4. Check clog detection board and clog
detection pressure sensor, if previous
two possible causes have been
8-5
eliminated.
A01030 Sample probe Sample probe is / 1. Sample probe is clogged; 1. Clean the sample probe with diluted
unit clogged during 2. Sample probe hydro error. wash solution. Remove the sample
cleaning. probe and unclog it.
2. Check if sample probe tubing, pump
and valve for interior wash is normal;
3. Check clog detection board and clog
detection pressure sensor.
A01031 Sample probe Sample probe / Parameters of the control unit are Reset sample probe position
unit parameters are incorrect. parameters; if problem remains,
within critical contact our R&D department.
range
A01033 Sample probe Sample probe fails / 1. There is no reagent or insufficient 1. Check if R1 volume is sufficient and
unit to detect liquid reagent in the cuvette; the reagent bottle is free of air
level on reaction 2. Incorrect vertical extreme position bubbles, and then try again;
carousel when parameter for sample probe on reaction 2. Check if the vertical extreme
dispensing carousel; position parameter for sample probe on
3. Sample probe level detection error. reaction carousel is correct;
3. If level detection error is identified,
check sample probe, level detection
board and connecting cable; replace if
any abnormity is identified.
A01034 Sample probe Liquid level at ISE / The electrodes are blocked; the ISE 1. Check if liquid volume within ISE
unit sample injection tubes have leak or are clogged; injection port is correct, and run the
port is too high The sample probe is low in sample test again;
injection position of the ISE module; 2. Check if ISE module is leaking or
Sample probe level detection error. clogged;
3. Adjust the horizontal and vertical
position from sample probe to ISE
injection port;
4. If problem remains, contact our R&D
department.
A01035 Sample probe Liquid level at ISE / Tube is leaking or clogged. 1. Check if there is any leaking or
unit sample injection The sample probe is high in sample clogging, and troubleshoot if any.
8-6
port is too low injection position of the ISE module.
2. Adjust the horizontal and vertical
position from sample probe to ISE
Sample probe level detection error.
injection port.
A01036 Sample probe Sample probe level / 1. Error of communication cable Check relevant cable for any signs of
unit detection board between level detection board and fray or loose cable, or disconnection, or
data reception smart modules short circuit.
error
A01037 Sample probe Sample probe level / 1. Error of communication cable 1. Check relevant cable for any signs of
unit detection board between level detection board and fray or loose cable, or disconnection, or
self calibrating smart modules; short circuit;
failed 2. Sample probe error, or connection 2. Check if sample probe is installed
error between sample probe and level correctly; check if sample probe is
detection board; bent, cracked or loose;
3 Sample probe level detection board 3. Check if level detection board is
error. normal; replace it if not.
A01038 Sample probe Sample probe clog / 1. Check if connection between clog 1. Check relevant cable for any signs of
unit detection board detection board and wash control is fray or loose cable, or disconnection, or
working model normal; short circuit;
setting failed 2. Clog detection board error. 2. Check if the power indication light
for clog detection board is on properly;
check if clog detection board is working
correctly;
3. Replace clog detection board if
malfunction has been identified.
A02006 Probe R1 unit Probe R1 vertical / Reagent probe vertical movement error Reagent probe vertical movement error
movement error 1. Sensor status error: 1. Sensor status error:
1. Sensor status Belt or belt pulley is loose. Check if belt or belt wheel is loose,
error 2. Failed to find the zero position: tighten them if so;
2. Failed to find 1) The assembly is jammed; 2. Failed to find the zero position:
the zero position 1) Remove obstacle or replace with a
3. Collision occurs new assembly;
3) Vertical motor error;
during operation 2) Replace PCB;
other than 4) Vertical sensor error;
5) Belt pulley is loose; 3) Replace motor;
aspirating
3. Collision occurs during operation 4) Replace sensor;
4. Collision error
8-7
remains other than aspirating: 5) Tighten properly;
5. Vertical 1) Collision sensor or circuit or cable 3. Collision occurs during operation
movement is not failure; other than aspirating:
allowed in current 2) Collision sensor is not blocked 1) Replace sensor or PCB or cable;
horizontal position when assembling the reagent probe; 2) Reassemble;
3) Incorrect reagent probe 3) Rotate positioning sensor to
Probe R1 horizontal positioning; remove dust or adjust probe to be
movement error 4) Incorrect reagent carousel vertical; if problem remains, adjust
1. Sensor status positioning; positioning parameters;
error 4. Collision error remains: 4) Adjust sample carousel positioning
2. Failed to find 1) Collision sensor or circuit or cable parameters;
the zero position failure; 4. Collision error remains:
3. Collision occurs 2) Collision sensor is not blocked 1) Replace sensor or PCB or cable;
during horizontal when assembling the reagent probe; 2) Reassemble;
movement 3) Collision sensor is not blocked due 3) Mount the spring of blocking plate
4. Horizontal to deformation of blocking plates again;
movement is not driving spring; 5. Vertical movement is not allowed in
allowed in current 5. Vertical movement is not allowed in current horizontal position:
vertical position current horizontal position: Home instrument or reagent probe
Probe R1 syringe Software error unit.
movement error
Reagent probe horizontal movement Reagent probe horizontal movement
1. Sensor status error error
error
1. Sensor status error: 1. Sensor status error:
2. Failed to find
Belt or belt pulley is loose. Check if belt or belt wheel is loose,
the zero position
2. Failed to find the zero position: tighten them if so;
1) Driving circuit error; 2. Failed to find the zero position:
8-8
Home instrument or reagent probe
Reagent syringe movement error unit.
1. Sensor status error: Reagent syringe movement error
Belt or belt pulley is loose. 1. Sensor status error:
2. Failed to find the zero position: Check if belt or belt wheel is loose,
1) The assembly is jammed; tighten them if so;
3) Motor error; 1) Remove obstacle or replace with a
new assembly;
4) Sensor error;
2) Replace PCB;
3) Replace motor;
4) Replace sensor;
movement error 1. Collision occurs during aspirating: 1. Collision occurs during aspirating:
1. Collision occurs 1) Collision sensor or circuit or cable 1) Replace sensor or PCB or cable;
during aspirating failure; 2) Reassemble;
2) Collision sensor is not blocked 3) Rotate positioning sensor to
when assembling the reagent probe; remove dust or adjust probe to be
3) Incorrect reagent probe vertical; if problem remains, adjust
4) Incorrect reagent carousel 4) Adjust sample carousel positioning
positioning; parameters
A02021 Probe R1 unit R1 syringe / The aspirate volume is beyond the Define the aspirate volume correctly.
aspirates too much range of the syringe.
A02022 Probe R1 unit R1 syringe / The dispense volume is beyond the Define the dispense volume correctly.
dispenses too much range of the syringe.
A02023 Probe R1 unit Probe R1 fails to / 1. There is no reagent or insufficient 1. Check if the reagent is sufficient,
detect liquid level reagent on the designated position; and then try again.
on reagent
8-9
carousel 2. Probe R1 level detection error. 2. If there is level detection error,
check probe R1, level detection board
and connecting cable; replace if any
abnormity is identified.
A02025 Probe R1 unit Probe R1 dispenses / 1. The reagent probe aspirates nothing. 1. Check if the reagent meets the
insufficient 2. Syringe assembly error. requirement and is sufficient in
reagent volume, and then try again.
2. Check if there is any abnormity of
syringe assembly.
A02026 Probe R1 unit Probe R1 fails to / 1. No DI water or hydro error; 1. Check if tubing, pump and valve for
detect liquid level 2. Probe R1 level detection error. exterior wash of probe R1 is normal;
during cleaning. 2. If level detection error is identified,
1. No liquid level is check probe R1, level detection board
detected in wash and connecting cable; replace if any
well during unit abnormity is identified.
homing procedure;
detected in wash
well during
cleaning procedure
A02027 Probe R1 unit Probe R1 detects / DI water residual exists in cuvette Check if aspirating tubing and solenoid
liquid level in valves of wash station is normal; check
empty cuvette if system vacuum is normal.
A02028 Probe R1 unit Probe R1 / Parameters of the control unit are Reset position parameters. If problem
parameters are incorrect. remains, contact our R&D department.
within critical
range.
when checking 2. Probe R1 level detection error. 2. If level detection error is identified,
reagent inventory check probe R1, level detection board
A02030 Probe R1 unit Probe R1 level / 1. Cable error for communication Check relevant cable for any signs of
detection board between level detection board and fray or loose cable, or disconnection, or
8-10
error
A02031 Probe R1 unit Probe R1 level / 1. Cable error for communication 1. Check relevant cable for any signs of
failed 2. Probe R1 error or level detection 2. Check if probe R1 is installed
board connection error; correctly; check if probe R1 is bent,
3. Probe R1 level detection error. cracked or loose;
3. Check if level detection board is
normal; replace it if not.
A02032 Probe R1 unit Probe R1 aspirates / Air bubbles exist in the reagent bottle. 1. Check if the reagent bottle contains
nothing on reagent air bubbles, and then try again.
carousel 2. Check if the reagent bottle meets
requirements.
A02033 Probe R1 unit Probe R1 fails to / 1. Insufficient reagent, or air bubbles 1. Check if the reagent is sufficient and
detect liquid level exist in the reagent bottle. the reagent bottle contains air bubbles,
after dispensing 2. Probe R1 level detection error. and then try again.
2. If level detection error is identified,
check probe R1, level detection board
movement error 1. Sensor status error: 1. Sensor status error:
1. Sensor status Belt or belt pulley is loose. Check if belt or belt wheel is loose,
error 2. Failed to find the zero position: tighten them if so;
2. . Failed to find 1) The assembly is jammed; 2. Failed to find the zero position:
the zero position 1) Remove obstacle or replace with a
3. Collision occurs new assembly;
during operation 2) Replace PCB;
other than 4) Vertical sensor error;
aspirating
3. Collision occurs during operation 4) Replace sensor;
4. Collision error
remains other than aspirating: 5) Tighten properly;
5. Vertical 1) Collision sensor or circuit or cable 3. Collision occurs during operation
movement is not failure; other than aspirating:
8-11
allowed in current 2) Collision sensor is not blocked 1) Replace sensor or PCB or cable;
horizontal position when assembling the reagent probe; 2) Reassemble;
Probe R2 horizontal 3) Incorrect reagent probe 3) Rotate positioning sensor to
movement error positioning; remove dust or adjust probe to be
1. Sensor status 4) Incorrect reagent carousel vertical; if problem remains, adjust
error positioning; positioning parameters;
2. Failed to find 4. Collision error remains: 4) Adjust sample carousel positioning
the zero position 1) Collision sensor or circuit or cable parameters;
3. Collision occurs failure; 4. Collision error remains:
during horizontal 2) Collision sensor is not blocked 1) Replace sensor or PCB or cable;
movement when assembling the reagent probe; 2) Reassemble;
4. Horizontal 3) Collision sensor is not blocked due 3) Mount the spring of blocking plate
movement is not to deformation of blocking plates again;
allowed in current driving spring; 5. Vertical movement is not allowed in
vertical position 5. Vertical movement is not allowed in current horizontal position:
Probe R2 syringe current horizontal position: Home instrument or reagent probe
movement error Software error unit.
1. Sensor status Reagent probe horizontal movement Reagent probe horizontal movement
error error error
2. Failed to find 1. Sensor status error: 1. Sensor status error:
the zero position
Belt or belt pulley is loose. Check if belt or belt wheel is loose,
2. Failed to find the zero position: tighten them if so;
8-12
Reagent syringe movement error Home instrument or reagent probe
1. Sensor status error: unit.
Belt or belt pulley is loose. Reagent syringe movement error
2. Failed to find the zero position: 1. Sensor status error:
1) The assembly is jammed; Check if belt or belt wheel is loose,
2) Driving circuit error; tighten them if so;
3) Motor error; 2. Failed to find the zero position:
4) Sensor error; 1) Remove obstacle or replace with a
new assembly;
2) Replace PCB;
3) Replace motor;
4) Replace sensor;
movement error 1. Collision occurs during aspirating: 1. Collision occurs during aspirating:
1. Collision occurs 1) Collision sensor or circuit or cable 1) Replace sensor or PCB or cable;
during aspirating failure; 2) Reassemble;
2) Collision sensor is not blocked 3) Rotate positioning sensor to
when assembling the reagent probe; remove dust or adjust probe to be
3) Incorrect reagent probe vertical; if problem remains, adjust
4) Incorrect reagent carousel 4) Adjust sample carousel positioning
positioning; parameters
A03021 Probe R2 unit R2 syringe / The aspirate volume is beyond the Define the aspirate volume correctly.
aspirates too much range of the syringe.
A03022 Probe R2 unit R2 syringe / The dispense volume is beyond the Define the dispense volume correctly.
dispenses too much range of the syringe.
on reagent 2. Probe R1 level detection error. 2. If there is level detection error,
carousel check probe R2, level detection board
8-13
A03025 Probe R2 unit Probe R2 dispenses / 1. The reagent probe aspirates nothing. 1. Check if the reagent meets the
insufficient 2. Syringe assembly error. requirement and is sufficient in
reagent volume, and then try again.
2. Check if there is any abnormity of
syringe assembly.
A03026 Probe R2 unit Probe R2 fails to / 1. No DI water or hydro error; 1. Check if pump and valve for exterior
detect liquid level 2. Probe R1 level detection error. wash of probe R2 is normal;
during cleaning. 2. If level detection error is identified,
1. No liquid level is check probe R2, level detection board
detected in wash and connecting cable; replace if any
well during unit abnormity is identified.
homing procedure;
detected in wash
well during
cleaning procedure
A03028 Probe R2 unit Probe R2 / Parameters of the control unit are Reset position parameters. If problem
parameters are incorrect. remains, contact our R&D department.
within critical
range.
when checking 2. Probe R2 level detection error. 2. If level detection error is identified,
reagent inventory check probe R2, level detection board
A03030 Probe R2 unit Probe R2 level / 1. Cable error for communication Check relevant cable for any signs of
error
A03031 Probe R2 unit Probe R2 level / 1. Cable error for communication 1. Check relevant cable for any signs of
failed 2. Probe R2 error or level detection 2. Check if probe R2is installed
board connection error; correctly; check if probe R2 is bent,
8-14
3. Probe R2 level detection error. cracked or loose;
3. Check if level detection board is
normal; replace it if not.
A03032 Probe R2 unit Probe R2 aspirates / Air bubbles exist in the reagent bottle. 1. Check if the reagent bottle contains
nothing on reagent air bubbles, and then try again.
carousel 2. Check if the reagent bottle meets
requirements.
A04006 Sample mixer Sample mixer / Sample mixer vertical movement error Sample mixer vertical movement error
unit vertical movement 1. Sensor status error: 1. Sensor status error:
the zero position new assembly;
3. Vertical 2) Replace PCB;
movement is not 4) Vertical sensor error;
allowed in current
horizontal position 3. Vertical movement is not allowed in 4) Replace sensor;
Sample mixer current horizontal position 5) Tighten properly;
horizontal Software error 3. Vertical movement is not allowed in
movement error current horizontal position
1. Sensor status Sample mixer horizontal movement Home instrument or unit.
error error Sample mixer horizontal movement
2. Failed to find 1. Sensor status error: error
the zero position Belt or belt pulley is loose. 1. Sensor status error:
3. Horizontal 2. Failed to find the zero position: Check if belt or belt wheel is loose,
movement is not tighten them if so;
1) Driving circuit error;
allowed in current 2. Failed to find the zero position:
vertical position 2) Motor error;
1) Replace PCB;
3) Home position sensor error;
2) Replace motor;
3) Replace sensor;
3. Horizontal movement is not allowed
in current vertical position 4) Tighten properly;
Software error 3. Horizontal movement is not allowed
in current vertical position
8-15
Home instrument or unit.
A04015 Sample mixer Sample mixer / 1. Mixer motor error; 1. Replace motor;
unit rotation error 2 Gear is jammed; 2. Adjust gear or replace assembly;
3. Mixer rotational speed sensor error 3. Replace sensor, or relevant cable, or
circuit
A04016 Sample mixer Sample mixer / Parameters of the control unit are Adjust parameters. If problem remains,
unit parameters are incorrect. contact our R&D department.
within critical
range
A05006 Reagent mixer Reagent mixer / Reagent mixer vertical movement error Reagent mixer vertical movement error
unit vertical movement 1. Sensor status error 1. Sensor status error:
the zero position new assembly;
3. Vertical 2) Replace PCB;
movement is not 4) Vertical sensor error;
allowed in current
horizontal position 4) Replace sensor;
Reagent mixer 3. Vertical movement is not allowed in 5) Tighten properly;
horizontal current horizontal position 3. Vertical movement is not allowed in
movement error Software error current horizontal position
1. Sensor status Reagent mixer horizontal movement Home instrument or unit.
error error Reagent mixer horizontal movement
2. Failed to find 1. Sensor status error: error
the zero position Belt or belt pulley is loose. 1. Sensor status error:
3. Horizontal 2. Failed to find the zero position: Check if belt or belt wheel is loose,
movement is not tighten them if so;
allowed in current 2. Failed to find the zero position:
vertical position 2) Motor error;
1) Replace PCB;
2) Replace motor;
3) Replace sensor;
3. Horizontal movement is not allowed
in current vertical position 4) Tighten properly;
8-16
Software error 3. Horizontal movement is not allowed
in current vertical position
Home instrument or unit.
A05016 Reagent mixer Reagent mixer / 1. Mixer motor error; 1. Replace motor;
unit rotation error 2 Gear is jammed; 2. Adjust gear or replace assembly;
3. Mixer rotational speed sensor error 3. Replace sensor, or relevant cable, or
circuit
A05017 Reagent mixer Reagent mixer / Parameters of the control unit are Adjust parameters. If problem remains,
within critical
range
A06006 Reaction Reaction carousel / Reaction carousel movement error Reaction carousel movement error
carousel unit movement error 1. Failed to find the home position 1. Failed to find the home position
1. Failed to find Home position sensor error; Replace sensor or cable;
the home position 2. The coder missed steps 2. The coder missed steps
2. The coder 1) Assembly is jammed; 1) Remove obstacle or replace with a
missed steps new assembly;
3. The reaction 2) Replace PCB;
3) Motor error;
carousel missed
4) Sensor error; 3) Replace motor;
steps when moving
to the home 5) Belt pulley is loose; 4) Replace sensor or cable;
position 3. The reaction carousel missed steps 5) Replace belt pulley and motor
when moving to the home position assembly;
Home position sensor error 3. The reaction carousel missed steps
when moving to the home position
Replace sensor or cable
Reaction Reaction carousel / Parameters of the control unit are Adjust parameters. If problem remains,
carousel unit parameters are incorrect. contact our R&D department.
within critical
range
A07006 Sample Sample carousel 1 / Sample carousel outer ring movement Sample carousel outer ring movement
carousel 1 unit movement error error error
1. Failed to find 1. Failed to find the home position 1. Failed to find the home position
the home position Home position sensor error; Replace sensor or cable;
2. The coder
8-17
missed steps 2. The coder missed steps 2. The coder missed steps
3. The sample 1) Assembly is jammed; 1) Remove obstacle or replace with a
carousel missed 2) Driving circuit error; new assembly;
steps when moving 3) Motor error; 2) Replace PCB;
to the home 3) Replace motor;
4) Sensor error;
position.
5) Belt pulley is loose; 4) Replace sensor or cable;
3. The sample carousel missed steps 5) Replace belt pulley and motor
A07009 Sample Sample bar code / Sample bar code reader connection Recover the failure. If the error
carousel 1 unit reader error error due to system failure. If this remains, initialize the sample bar code
occurs repeatedly, and failure recovery reader. If initialization cannot be
cannot be performed, bar code reader performed, check if bar code reader is
is not initialized correctly, or connected properly. If problem
communication cable is disconnected. remains, replace bar code reader or
If bar code reader is not available, control driver board.
please try again.
A07010 Sample Bar code data / Sample bar coder reader does not work Initialize the sample bar code reader
carousel 1 unit received has no normally due to communication error. and try again. If problem remains,
end mark check bar code reader connection,
replace bar code reader and control
driver board.
A07011 Sample Sample bar code / Sample bar coder sending buffer is full Recover the failure or reboot the
carousel 1 unit sending buffer is due to communication error. analyzing unit.
full
A07012 Sample Parameters of / Parameters of the control unit are Adjust position parameters. If problem
carousel 1 unit sample carousel 1 incorrect. remains, contact our R&D department.
are within critical
range
A08006 Sample Sample carousel 2 / Sample carousel inner ring movement Sample carousel inner ring movement
the home position
8-18
2. The coder Home position sensor error; Replace sensor or cable;
missed steps 2. The coder missed steps 2. The coder missed steps
3. The sample 1) Assembly is jammed; 1) Remove obstacle or replace with a
carousel missed 2) Driving circuit error; new assembly;
steps when moving 2) Replace PCB;
3) Motor error;
to the home
position.
3. The sample carousel missed steps 5) Replace belt pulley and motor
A08009 Sample Sample bar code / Sample bar code reader connection Recover the failure. If the error
please try again.
A08010 Sample Bar code data / Sample bar coder reader does not work Initialize the sample bar code reader
carousel 2 unit received has no normally due to communication error. and try again. If problem remains,
driver board.
A08011 Sample Sample bar code / Sample bar coder sending buffer is full Recover the failure or reboot the
full
A08012 Sample Parameters of / Parameters of the control unit are Adjust position parameters. If problem
carousel 2 unit sample carousel 2 incorrect. remains, contact our R&D department.
are within critical
range
A09006 Reagent Reagent carousel 1 / Reagent carousel outer ring movement Reagent carousel outer ring movement
carousel 1 unit failed to find the error error
home position
8-19
Reagent carousel 1 1. Failed to find the home position 1. Failed to find the home position
movement error Home position sensor error; Replace sensor or cable;
1. Failed to find 2. The coder missed steps 2. The coder missed steps
the home position 1) Assembly is jammed; 1) Remove obstacle or replace with a
2. The coder 2) Driving circuit error; new assembly;
missed steps 2) Replace PCB;
3) Motor error;
3. The reagent 3) Replace motor;
4) Sensor error;
carousel missed
steps when moving
to the home 3. The reagent carousel missed steps 5) Replace belt pulley and motor
position. when moving to the home position assembly;
Home position sensor error 3. The reagent carousel missed steps
A09009 Reagent Reagent carousel / The reagent carousel cover is removed. Restore the reagent carousel cover.
carousel 1 unit cover is opened
compulsively
during reagent
carousel 1 rotation
A09011 Reagent Reagent bar code / Reagent bar code reader connection Recover the failure. If the error
please try again.
A09012 Reagent Bar code data / Communication error. Reagent bar code Initialize the sample bar code reader
carousel 1 unit received has no instruction buffer is full. and try again. If problem remains,
driver board.
A09014 Reagent Reagent bar code / Reagent bar coder sending buffer is full Recover the failure or reboot the
full
8-20
A09015 Reagent Parameters of / Parameters of the control unit are Adjust position parameters. If problem
carousel 1 unit reagent carousel 1 incorrect. remains, contact our R&D department.
are within critical
range
A09016 Reagent Reagent carousel is / The reagent carousel stops rotating and Restore the reagent carousel cover and
carousel 1 unit opened scanning is terminated, because the recover the failure, and then try again.
compulsively reagent carousel cover is removed
during scanning during scanning.
A10006 Reagent Reagent carousel 2 / Reagent carousel inner ring movement Reagent carousel inner ring movement
the home position Home position sensor error; Replace sensor or cable;
2. The coder 2. The coder missed steps 2. The coder missed steps
missed steps 1) Assembly is jammed; 1) Remove obstacle or replace with a
3. The reagent 2) Driving circuit error; new assembly;
carousel missed 2) Replace PCB;
3) Motor error;
steps when moving
to the home
position. 5) Belt pulley is loose; 4) Replace sensor or cable;
3. The reagent carousel missed steps 5) Replace belt pulley and motor
Home position sensor error 3. The reagent carousel missed steps
A10009 Reagent Reagent carousel / The reagent carousel cover is removed. Restore the reagent carousel cover.
carousel 2 unit cover is opened
compulsively
during reagent
carousel 2 rotation
A10011 Reagent Reagent bar code / Reagent bar code reader connection Recover the failure. If the error
8-21
please try again.
A10012 Reagent Bar code data / Communication error. Reagent bar code Initialize the sample bar code reader
carousel 2 unit received has no instruction buffer is full. and try again. If problem remains,
driver board.
A10014 Reagent Reagent bar code / Reagent bar coder sending buffer is full Recover the failure or reboot the
full
A10015 Reagent Parameters of / Parameters of the control unit are Adjust position parameters. If problem
carousel 2 unit reagent carousel 2 incorrect. remains, contact our R&D department.
are within critical
range
A10016 Reagent Reagent carousel is / The reagent carousel stops rotating and Restore the reagent carousel cover and
carousel 2 unit opened scanning is terminated, because the recover the failure, and then try again.
compulsively reagent carousel cover is removed
during scanning during scanning.
A11005 Wash station Wash station / Wash station movement error Wash station movement error
movement error 1. Sensor status error 1. Sensor status error
1. Sensor status Belt pulley is loose; 1. Sensor status error:
error 2. Failed to find the home position Check if belt or belt wheel is loose,
2. Failed to find 1) Driving circuit error; tighten them if so;
the home position 2. Failed to find the home position
2) Motor error;
3. The wash station 1) Replace PCB;
collides with an
obstacle when
moving. 3. The wash station collides with an 3) Replace sensor;
obstacle when moving 4) Tighten properly;
1) Wash probes are not vertical; 3. The wash station collides with an
2) Reaction carousel positioning is obstacle when moving
deviated; 1) Align wash probes;
3) Collision sensor or circuit error 2) Align reaction carousel
positioning;
3) Replace sensor, cable or PCB
A11010 Wash station Releasing vacuum / 1. Solenoid valves V23-V27 go wrong. 1. Check if solenoid valves V23, V24,
8-22
failed 2. The vacuum pump goes wrong. V25, V26 or V27 can be on and off
3. The vacuum sensor goes wrong. normally;
2. Check if vacuum pump can be turned
off;
3. Check if vacuum sensor is normal.
A11012 Wash station Water supplying is / 1. The water unit goes wrong. 1. Check the water unit.
too slow 2. The water supply valve goes wrong. 2. Check if the water supply ball valve
3. The water supply ball valve is not is opened and the handle is horizontal.
opened. (The handle is horizontal when 3. Check if the water supply ball valve
it is opened) is blocked.
4. The water supply ball valve goes 4. Check if water supply valve can be
wrong. turned on and off normally.
5. The low-level floater of the water 5. Check if low-level floater signal is
tank goes wrong. correct.
6. The water supply tube is bent. 6. Check if water supply tube is
7. The outlet filter of the water supply smooth.
tube is clogged. 7. Check if outlet filter of water supply
tube is clogged.
A11013 Wash station Water tank is / 1. The water unit goes wrong. 1. Check the water unit.
empty 2. The water supply valve goes wrong. 2. Check if the water supply ball valve
3. The water supply ball valve is not is opened and the handle is horizontal.
opened. (The handle is horizontal when 3. Check if the water supply ball valve
it is opened) is blocked.
4. The water supply ball valve goes 4. Check if water supply valve can be
wrong. turned on and off normally.
5. The low-level floater of the water 5. Check if low-level floater signal is
tank goes wrong. correct.
6. The water supply tube is bent. 6. Check if water supply tube is
7. The outlet filter of the water supply smooth.
tube is clogged. 7. Check if outlet filter of water supply
tube is clogged.
A11014 Wash station Priming diluted / 1. The solenoid valve V06 goes wrong. 1. Check solenoid valve V06.
wash solution is 2. The restrictor ring is clogged. 2. Check restrictor ring.
slow 3. The inlet filter at the front panel is 3. Check if inlet filter at the front panel
8-23
clogged. is clogged.
4. The DI water circulating pump goes 4. Check if DI water pump is on and the
wrong. pressure gauge reads between
5. The water tank is empty. 40kPa-50kPa.
6. The concentrated wash solution tank 5. Check the floater of the deionized
is empty. water tank.
7. The concentrated wash solution 6. Check the floater of the
pump goes wrong. concentrated wash solution tank.
8. The low-level floater of the diluted 7. Check concentrated wash solution
wash solution tank goes wrong. pump.
8. Check diluted wash solution
low-level floater.
A11015 Wash station Diluted wash / 1. The solenoid valve V06 goes wrong. 1. Check solenoid valve V06.
solution tank is 2. The restrictor ring is clogged. 2. Check restrictor ring.
empty 3. The inlet filter at the front panel is 3. Check if inlet filter at the front panel
clogged. is clogged.
4. The DI water circulating pump P03 4. Check if DI water pump is on and the
goes wrong. pressure gauge reads between
5. The water tank is empty. 40kPa-50kPa.
6. The concentrated wash solution tank 5. Check the floater of the deionized
is empty. water tank.
7. The concentrated wash solution 6. Check the floater of the
pump P05 goes wrong. concentrated wash solution tank.
8. The low-level floater of the diluted 7. Check concentrated wash solution
wash solution tank goes wrong. pump.
8. Check diluted wash solution
low-level floater.
A11016 Wash station Concentrated wash / 1. Concentrated wash solution is 1. Check if the concentrated wash
solution tank is exhausted and the floater status is solution is exhausted and the floater
empty Empty. status is Empty. If yes, fill more
2. The low-level floater of the concentrated wash solution.
concentrated wash solution tank goes 2. Check if concentrated wash solution
wrong. tank floater goes wrong.
A11017 Wash station Liquid accumulates / 1. The solenoid valve V27 goes wrong. 1. Check solenoid valve V27.
in primary vacuum 2. Check if waste pump can be turned
8-24
container 2. The waste pump P07 goes wrong. on and off normally.
3. The low-concentration waste drain 3. Check if low-concentration waste
tube is bent. drain tube is smooth.
A11018 Wash station High concentration / 1. The waste pump P07 goes wrong. 1. Check if waste pump can be turned
waste collector is 2. The high-concentration waste drain on and off normally.
full tube is bent. 2. Check if high-concentration waste
drain tube is smooth.
A11019 Wash station Low concentration / 1. The waste pump P07 goes wrong. 1. Check if waste pump can be turned
waste collector is 2. The low-concentration waste drain on and off normally.
full tube is bent. 2. Check if high-concentration waste
drain tube is smooth.
A11020 Wash station High concentration / 1. The high concentration waste tank is 1. Check the high-concentration waste
waste tank is full full tank. If it is full, replace the waste
2. The floater of the high concentration tank, close the full tank and dispose of
waste tank goes wrong. the waste properly.
2. Check if high-concentration waste
goes wrong.
A11021 Wash station ISE pressure is low / 1. The solenoid valve V29 goes wrong. 1. Check if solenoid valve V29 can be
2. The ISE vacuum sensor goes wrong. turned off.
3. The ISE degasser goes wrong. 2. Check ISE vacuum sensor.
3. Check if ISE degasser is clogged.
A11022 Wash station ISE pressure is high / 1. The solenoid valve V29 goes wrong. 1. Check if solenoid valve V29 can be
2. The ISE degasser pump P12 goes turned on.
wrong. 2. Check if ISE degasser pump P12 can
3. The ISE vacuum sensor goes wrong. be turned on normally.
4. The ISE degasser goes wrong. 3. Check ISE vacuum sensor.
5. The connectors and tubes go wrong. 4. Check if ISE degasser is leaking air.
5. Check if connector and tubing are
leaking air.
A11023 Wash station Insufficient / 1. The primary vacuum pump P08 goes 1. Check if primary vacuum pump P08
vacuum wrong. can be turned on and off normally.
2. The primary vacuum sensor goes 2. Check primary vacuum sensor.
wrong. 3. Check if connectors and tubing
3. The connectors and tubes go wrong. related to primary vacuum are leaking
8-25
4. The primary vacuum container goes air.
wrong. 4. Check if primary vacuum container is
5. Solenoid valves V23, V24, V25 or V26 leaking air.
go wrong 5. Check if solenoid valves V23, V24,
V25 and V26 can be turned on and off
normally.
A11024 Wash station Degassing pump / 1. The solenoid valve V28 goes wrong. 1. Check if solenoid valves V28 can be
pressure is low 2. The degasser vacuum sensor goes turned off.
wrong. 2. Check degasser vacuum sensor.
3. The degasser goes wrong. 3. Check if degasser is clogged.
A11025 Wash station Degassing pump / 1. The solenoid valve V28 goes wrong. 1. Check if solenoid valves V28 can be
pressure is high 2. The degassing pump P09 goes wrong. turned on.
3. The degasser vacuum sensor goes 2. Check if degassing pump P09 can be
wrong. turned on normally.
4. The degasser goes wrong. 3. Check degasser vacuum sensor.
5. Connectors and tubing go wrong. 4. Check if degasser is leaking air.
5. Check if connectors and tubing are
leaking air.
A11026 Wash station Wash unit / Parameters of the control unit are Adjust parameters. If problem remains,
parameters are incorrect. contact our R&D department.
within critical
range.
A12005 Temperature Reaction carousel T1 1. The ambient temperature is out of 1. Reproduce failure.
unit temperature is out range. 2. Observe ambient temperature
of range 2. The temperature sensor goes wrong. through the Status screen, to check if
(component error, cable error) temperature is out of range.
3. The temperature protection switch 3. Temperature sensor error: check for
goes wrong. (component error, cable any signs of short circuit or broken
error) circuit; check if connections are
4. The heater goes wrong. (component secure.
error, cable error) 4. Temperature protection switch
5. PCB error error: check if protection switch is shut
6. Parameters are lost. and connections are secure.
7. Electromagnetic interference exists. 5. Heater error: check if resistance
under normal temperature is correct,
8-26
and connections are secure.
6. PCB failure.
7. Parameters are lost: check if
temperature control parameters are
correct.
8. Electromagnetic interference exists.
A12006 Temperature Temperature of / 1. The ambient temperature is out of 1. Reproduce failure.
unit wash solution for range. 2. Observe ambient temperature
cleaning cuvettes 2. The temperature sensor goes wrong. through the Status screen, to check if
is out of range (component error, cable error) temperature is out of range.
6. PCB failure.
correct.
A12007 Temperature Temperature of DI / 1. The ambient temperature is out of 1. Reproduce failure.
unit water for cleaning range. 2. Observe ambient temperature
cuvettes is out of 2. The temperature sensor goes wrong. through the Status screen, to check if
range (component error, cable error) temperature is out of range.
8-27
6. PCB failure.
correct.
A12008 Temperature Temperature of DI / 1. The ambient temperature is out of 1. Reproduce failure.
unit water for cleaning range. 2. Observe ambient temperature
the instrument is 2. The temperature sensor goes wrong. through the Status screen, to check if
out of range (component error, cable error) temperature is out of range.
6. PCB failure.
correct.
A12009 Temperature Internal / 1. The ambient temperature is out of 1. Reproduce failure.
unit temperature of the range. 2. Observe ambient temperature
instrument is out of 2. The cooling fan goes wrong. through the Status screen, to check if
range 3. The dust screen is blocked. temperature is out of range.
4. The air vent is blocked in the 3. Check if cooling fan is OK.
specified range. 4. Check if dust screen is blocked and
needs cleaning.
8-28
5. Check if air vent is blocked within
specified distance.
A12012 Temperature Temperature unit / Parameters of the control unit are Adjust parameters. If problem remains,
within critical
range.
A13006 ISE module reserved command / Software error Recover the failure and then reboot the
operating software.
A13007 ISE module no normal / Software error Recalibrate the ISE module.
calibration data
available
A13008 ISE module Abnormally / ISE module error Recover the failure and then reboot the
completed with operating software.
sending E
command
A13009 ISE module Parameter / The configured parameters exceed the Enter the ISE parameters again, or
abnormal allowable values. restore them to the default values.
A13010 ISE module No command is / ISE module error Recover the failure and then reboot the
acceptable operating software.
A13011 ISE module No identical / Software error Recover the failure and then reboot the
Specimen ID in operating software.
request
command(o) and
that in pipette
command(i)
A13012 ISE module Not enough data / The test data is insufficient for Perform the precision test again for at
for CV calculation calculating the CV value. least 2 times.
A13013 ISE module A/D converter / 1. The ISE electrodes, ground terminal 1. Check the connection of electrodes,
initialize error and temperature sensor are not ground terminal and temperature
connected correctly. sensor, and then recover the failure.
2. ISE module ADC error. 2. Switch off the main power and then
switch on it again after 10 seconds.
Perform the startup procedure.
3. Replace CPU board of ISE module.
8-29
A13014 ISE module Exceeding valid ADC 1. The ISE electrodes, ground terminal 1. Check the connection of electrodes
range of A/D and temperature sensor are not and ground terminal connection, and
converter connected correctly. then recover the failure.
2. Temperature sensor or electrodes 2. Switch off the main power and then
error. switch on it again after 10 seconds.
3. ISE temperature sensor and ISE CPU Perform the startup procedure.
board are disconnected. 3. Replace electrodes or temperature
4. ISE ADC error. sensor.
4. Replace CPU board of ISE module.
A13016 ISE module Exceeding valid T2 1. The ISE temperature sensor is not 1. Check the connection of
range of thermistor connected correctly. temperature sensor, and then recover
2. ISE temperature sensor error. the failure.
3. ISE temperature sensor and ISE CPU 2. Replace ISE temperature sensor.
board are disconnected. 3. Replace CPU board of ISE module.
A13018 ISE module dilution ratio out of DILO The calibrator is stored for too long 1. Replace the calibrator and
range error time, or the electrode is degenerated. recalibrate.
The electrode is not installed correctly. 2. Reinstall the electrode. Make sure
that an O-shape washer is mounted
correctly. There should be only one
O-shaped washer existing between
every two electrodes, and between the
electrode and the module.
3. Replace the electrode.
4. Check if volume of ISE buffer being
aspirated back is normal.
A13019 ISE module dilution ratio DILE The calibrator is stored for too long 1. Replace the calibrator and
calculation error time, or the electrode is degenerated. recalibrate.
The electrode is not installed correctly. 2. Reinstall the electrode. Make sure
that an O-shape washer is mounted
A13020 ISE module slope out of range SLO The calibrator is stored for too long Replace the calibrator and recalibrate.
8-30
time, or the electrode is degenerated. If the electrode is new, activate it and
The electrode is not installed correctly. then recalibrate.
Reinstall the electrode. Make sure that
an O-shape washer is mounted
Replace the electrode.
A13021 ISE module slope calculation SLE The calibrator is stored for too long Replace the calibrator and recalibrate.
error time, or the electrode is degenerated. If the electrode is new, activate it and
The electrode is not installed correctly. then recalibrate.
Reinstall the electrode. Make sure that
an O-shape washer is mounted
Replace the electrode.
A13022 ISE module Cl-ISE bias value BIAS The Cl electrode is dirty. 1. Clean the electrode repeatedly and
over range The Cl electrode is degenerated. then recalibrate.
2. Replace the Cl electrode.
A13023 ISE module Calibration over REPL The dispensing repeatability of the 1. Replace the calibrator and
times sample probe is poor. recalibrate.
ISE electrodes performance is 2. If the electrode is new, activate it
abnormal. and then recalibrate.
3. Check ISE tubing connection.
4. Check sample probe dispensing
performance.
A13024 ISE module STD output over SEN 1. The calibrator is placed in an 1. Check the calibrator position and
the preset value incorrect position. replace the calibrator, check if the
(D instruction S 2. The electrode is degenerated. electrode is connected correctly, and
Parameter) 3. The sample probe aspirates or then recalibrate.
dispenses incorrectly. (The error occurs 2. If the electrode is new, activate it
8-31
for several ISE chemistries.) and then recalibrate.
4. Check sample probe tubing.
A13025 ISE module STD output over SEN 1. The calibrator is placed in an 1. Check the calibrator position and
the preset value incorrect position. replace the calibrator, and then
(D instruction D 2. The electrode is degenerated. recalibrate.
Parameter) 3. The sample probe aspirates or 2. If the electrode is new, activate it
dispenses incorrectly. (The error occurs and then recalibrate.
for several ISE chemistries.) 3. Replace the electrode.
4. Check sample probe tubing.
A13026 ISE module calibration out of DUP If calibration fails, the probable causes If the calibration is succeeded, ignore
range are: the error; If the calibration is failed,
1. ISE tubing is leaking. take relevant actions according to the
2. Sample probe dispensing alarm.
repeatability is poor.
A13027 ISE module invalid analysis / Operating software error. Recover the failure.
sequence Reboot operating software.
Contact our R&D department.
A13028 ISE module Failure for / 1. ISE syringe missed steps. Recover the failure.
initializing buffer 2. ISE syringe home sensor error. Replace the assembly.
pump (home sense
timeout)
A13029 ISE module Failure for / 1. ISE syringe missed steps. Recover the failure.
initializing buffer 2. ISE syringe home sensor error. Replace the assembly.
pump (home
escape timeout)
A13030 ISE module No home sense / 1. ISE syringe missed steps. Recover the failure.
detected after 2. ISE syringe home sensor error. Replace the assembly.
operation of
moving buffer
pump to a home
position
A13031 ISE module No home escape / 1. ISE syringe missed steps. Recover the failure.
detected after 2. ISE syringe home sensor error. Replace the assembly.
8-32
operation of
removing buffer
pump from a home
position
A13032 ISE module buffer pump up / The syringe already reaches the top. Stop clicking on the Buffer Syringe Up
error button.
A13033 ISE module buffer pump down / The syringe already reaches the Stop clicking on the Buffer Syringe
error bottom. Down button.
A14005 Reagent Parameters of / Parameters of the control unit are Adjust parameters. If problem remains,
refrigeration reagent incorrect. contact our R&D department.
unit refrigeration unit
are within critical
range
A14006 Reagent Reagent / 1. The ambient temperature is out of 1c
refrigeration refrigeration range. 2. Observe ambient temperature
unit temperature is out 2. The temperature sensor goes wrong. through the Status screen, to check if
of range (component error, cable error) temperature is out of range.
4. The radiator goes wrong. secure.
(component error, cable error) 4. Temperature protection switch
5. The fan goes wrong. (component error: check if protection switch is shut
error, cable error) and connections are secure.
6. The circulating pump goes wrong. 5. Radiator error: check if radiator is
(component error, cable error) broken, and connections are secure.
7. The refrigerant goes wrong. 6. Fan error: check if fan is working
8. PCB error normally, and connections are secure.
9. Parameters are lost. 7. Circulating pump error: check if
circulating pump is working normally,
10. Electromagnetic interference
exists.
8. Refrigerant error: check if there is
sufficient refrigerant (check after
power off).
9. PCB error.
8-33
10. Parameters are lost: reconfigure
parameters.
11. Electromagnetic interference
exists.
A14007 Reagent Temperature of / 1. The ambient temperature is out of 1. Reproduce failure.
refrigeration refrigeration range. 2. Observe ambient temperature
unit module is low 2. The temperature sensor goes wrong. through the Status screen, to check if
(component error, cable error) temperature is out of range.
3. The circulating pump goes wrong. 3. Temperature sensor error: check for
(component error, cable error) any signs of short circuit or broken
4. The refrigerant goes wrong. circuit; check if connections are
5. PCB error secure.
6. Parameters are lost. 4. Circulating pump error: check if
circulating pump is working normally,
5. Refrigerant error: check if there is
sufficient refrigerant (check after
power off).
6. PCB error.
7. Parameters are lost: reconfigure
parameters.
A14008 Reagent Liquid pump fan is / 1. The fan is blocked. 1. Reproduce failure.
refrigeration abnormal 2. The fan is damaged. 2. Pull off and plug in fan socket.
unit 3. The power supply goes wrong. 3. Check if power supply for fan is
normal.
4. Clean dust off the fan.
5. Replace fan.
A14011 Reagent Reagent / 1. The fan is blocked. 1. Reproduce failure.
refrigeration refrigerating fan 1 2. The fan is damaged. 2. Pull off and plug in fan socket.
unit is abnormal 3. The power supply goes wrong. 3. Check if power supply for fan is
normal.
5. Replace fan.
8-34
A14012 Reagent Reagent / 1. The fan is blocked. 1. Reproduce failure.
refrigeration refrigerating fan 2 2. The fan is damaged. 2. Pull off and plug in fan socket.
unit is abnormal 3. The power supply goes wrong. 3. Check if power supply for fan is
normal.
5. Replace fan.
A14013 Reagent Light source fan is / 1. The fan is blocked. 1. Reproduce failure.
normal.
5. Replace fan.
A14014 Reagent Air pump fan is / 1. The fan is blocked. 1. Reproduce failure.
normal.
5. Replace fan.
A14015 Reagent ISE fan is abnormal / 1. The fan is blocked. 1. Reproduce failure.
refrigeration 2. The fan is damaged. 2. Pull off and plug in fan socket.
normal.
5. Replace fan.
C00001 Operating Operating system / The operating system is not Windows Reinstall Windows XP and the operating
system error XP. software.
C00002 Operating Insufficient / Memory is less than 2G Install a memory above 2G and then
system memory reboot the operating system.
C00003 Operating Resolution error / The screen resolution is not 1280*1024. Set the screen resolution to 1280*1024.
system
C00004 Operating Color error / The color is below 16 bit. Set the color to above 16 and then
system reboot the operating system.
8-35
C00005 Operating Insufficient disk / The remaining disk space is less than Rearrange the hard disk and delete the
system space 4G. useless files.
C00006 Operating Out of disk space / The remaining disk space is less than Rearrange the hard disk and delete the
system 1G. useless files.
C00007 Operating CPU performance / The CPU is too busy. Reboot the computer and operating
system low software. If this message appears for 3
times, contact our customer service
department or your local distributor.
C00008 Operating Printer cannot be / The printer is not powered on; the Check the printer connection; check if
system connected printer cable is not connected; or no the printer is powered on and if the
driver is installed. driver and default printer have been
installed.
C00009 Operating Printer failure / Paper jam. No paper. No ink Check for paper jam. Check if printer is
system busy, and print tasks are too many.
C00010 Operating Print paper running / Paper jam. No paper. No ink Check for paper jam. Check if printer is
system out busy, and print tasks are too many.
C00012 Operating Sound card failure / No sound card is installed. Sound card Reinstall the sound card or the sound
system failure. Incorrect sound card driver. card driver.
C01001 Instrument Instrument cannot / The serial cable is not connected; or Check the serial port connection.
communication be connected the analyzing unit power is switched Replug the cable. Check if the
off. analyzing unit is powered on. Start the
initialization again. Restart the
computer and analyzing unit. If three
continuous attempts are failed, contact
our customer service department or
your local distributor.
C01002 Instrument Instruction / Communication error Check the serial port cable and replug
communication execution error (no it. Switch off the analyzing unit power
response or and switch on it again. Recover failure
response error) by performing the Home maintenance
procedure. If this message appears for
3 times, contact our R&D department.
C02001 Database Database / Database software is not installed; Install database software; re-establish
initialization failed database is not established; database database; if problem remains, contact
system or database file is damaged or our R&D department
8-36
lost; database is opened exclusively
C02002 Database Database upgrade / Database is severely damaged; Install database software; re-establish
failed database does not exist; database is not database; if problem remains, contact
private for BS-800; database is opened our R&D department
exclusively
C02004 Database Database backup / Database record is under use; database Back up database again; if problem
failed is locked remains, contact our R&D department
C02005 Database Reading/Writing / Cannot read or write necessary Check if database has been damaged;
database failed information from or into database contact our R&D department
C03001 Result Response RCE Absorbance data for calculation is Investigate the cause of photoelectric
calculation calculation error incomplete, or the dividend is 0. data loss; contact our R&D department
C03002 Result Absorbance out of ABS The absorbance measured at the Check the sample for foreign matters or
calculation range primary and secondary wavelength is interferents; check if the reagent is
greater than 3.4A. qualified and placed in the correct
position; check if the cuvette is clean;
check if the photometric system is
working normally.
C03003 Result R1 blank RBK The reagent goes wrong; the cuvette is Check if cuvette is clean or overflowed;
calculation absorbance out of not clear; the reaction cuvette is check if reagent is sufficient, without
range overflowed; or insufficient reagent is air bubbles; check if chemistry
dispensed. parameters are reasonable; if previous
problems do not exist, replace reagent
and rerun the test.
C03004 Result Substrate BOE The sample concentration is too high, Check the reaction curve and the
calculation depletion and substrate depletion occurs during substrate depletion limit. Rerun the
fixed-time measurements. test with diluted sample.
C03005 Result Interval cannot be ENC The sample concentration is too high, Check the reaction curve and the
calculation calculated and substrate depletion occurs within substrate depletion limit. Rerun the
the lag time of rate check test with diluted sample.
measurements.
C03006 Result Non-linear LIN The measuring points for result Check the reaction curve and the
calculation calculation are nonlinear, because the substrate depletion limit. Rerun the
sample concentration is too high, or the test with diluted sample. If the alarm
substrate depletion limit is not occurs for more than one chemistry,
specified or unreasonable. The lamp is and the reaction curve fluctuates
8-37
aged. irregularly, replace the lamp.
C03007 Result Prozone check PRO Antigen excess occurs due to too high Check the reaction curve and the
calculation error sample concentration. prozone check parameters. Rerun the
test with diluted sample.
C03008 Result Sample RRN The sample concentration exceeds the Rerun the test with diluted sample.
calculation concentration is high limit of the calibrator
higher than that of concentration.
the highest-level
calibrator
C03009 Result Mixed blank MBK The reagent goes wrong; the cuvette is Check if cuvette is clean or overflowed;
calculation absorbance out of not clear; the reaction cuvette is check if reagent is sufficient, without
range overflowed; or insufficient reagent is air bubbles; check if chemistry
dispensed. parameters are reasonable; if previous
problems do not exist, replace reagent
and rerun the test.
C03010 Result Blank response out BLK The reagent goes wrong; insufficient Check if cuvette is overflowed; check if
calculation of range reagent is dispensed; the cuvette reagent is sufficient, without air
contains air bubbles; the light drifts; or bubbles; check if chemistry parameters
the cuvette is overflowed. are reasonable; check if light source is
drifted; if previous problems do not
exist, replace reagent and rerun the
test.
C03011 Result Calibration DUP The difference between the maximum Check if the acceptance limit is
calculation repeatability error and minimum response of the calibrator reasonable, troubleshoot the error, and
exceeds the specified limit. then recalibrate.
C03012 Result Calibration SEN The difference of final response of the Check if the acceptance limit is
calculation sensitivity error maximum and minimum concentration reasonable and the reagent and
calibrators exceeds the specified limit. calibrator are normal, and then
recalibrate.
C03013 Result Calibration curve CSD The calculated standard deviation of Check if the acceptance limit is
calculation standard deviation the calibration curve exceeds the reasonable and the reagent and
out of range specified limit. calibrator are normal, and then
recalibrate.
C03014 Result Calibration curve DET The calculated fit of the calibration Check if the acceptance limit is
calculation fitting out of range curve exceeds the specified limit. reasonable and the reagent and
8-38
calibrator are normal, and then
recalibrate.
C03015 Result Calibration slope FAC The slope difference is applicable to Check if the acceptance limit is
calculation different out of linear calibration only and refers to the reasonable and the reagent and
range K factor (slope) difference between two calibrator are normal, and then
adjacent calibrations. It exceeds the recalibrate.
specified limit.
C03016 Result Calibration curve MON The calibration data and calibration Check if the calibrator is defined and
calculation not monotonic curve are not monotonic. placed correctly, and then recalibrate.
C03017 Result Calibration curve COV For nonlinear calibration, a satisfying Check that the reagent and calibrator
calculation not convergent base cannot be calculated and no are normal, and then recalibrate. If
calibration curve is drawn. troubleshooting fails, choose other
calibration rules and recalibrate.
C03018 Result 12S 12S The QC result is between 2 and 3 No actions are required.
calculation standard deviations from the assigned
mean concentration.
C03019 Result 13s 13s The QC result is greater than 3 Check if the reagent is qualified and
calculation standard deviations from the assigned control is normal. Check if instrument
mean concentration. status is normal
C03020 Result 22s 22s Results of two controls or two results of Check if the reagent is qualified and
calculation one control within a run are control is normal. Check if instrument
simultaneously greater than +2 or -2 status is normal
standard deviations from the assigned
mean.
C03021 Result R4S R4S One result of a run is greater than +2 Check if the reagent is qualified and
calculation standard deviations from the assigned control is normal. Check if instrument
mean and the other greater than -2SDs. status is normal
C03022 Result 41s 41s Results of two runs in two-control Check if the reagent is qualified and
calculation evaluation or four continuous results of control is normal. Check if instrument
a control are greater than +1 or -1 status is normal
standard deviation from the assigned
mean concentration.
C03023 Result 10x 10x Results of five runs in two-control Check if the reagent is qualified and
calculation evaluation or ten continuous results of control is normal. Check if instrument
a control that are being compared are status is normal
8-39
on the same side.
C03024 Result CC test period time / 1. Software error Rerun the test. Reboot the operating
calculation out. Cannot 2. Operating system error software and analyzing unit. If problem
continue remains, contact our R&D department
C03025 Result ISE test period time / 1. Software error 1. Restore the system and rerun the
calculation out. Cannot 2. Calculation of ISE calibration factor test.
continue (It lasts is time out due to incorrect response. 2. Replace the calibrator and
more than 50s from recalibrate.
ISE test 3. Replace the electrode.
programming to
returning ISE test
result)
C03026 Result Photoelectric data / Communication error. If the error persists, contact our R&D
calculation is lost department
C03029 Result Photoelectric / / /
calculation measurement
period is out of
reasonable range
C03030 Result Photoelectric / 1. Software error 1. Reboot the operating software.
calculation measurement 2. Reboot the analyzing unit.
period is out of 3. If problem remains, contact our R&D
specified range department.
C03031 Result Multiple / 1. Software error 1. Reboot the operating software.
calculation photometric 2. Reboot the analyzing unit.
measurements are 3. If problem remains, contact our R&D
time out department.
C04001 Sample bar Sample bar code / Duplicate bar code is used. Replace the duplicate sample bar code
code already exists. label.
C04002 Sample bar Corresponding / The sample of the bar code has not Program the sample of the bar code.
code program been programmed.
information does
not exist
C04006 Sample bar Sample is expired / The sample is loaded after its shelf life The sample is expired. Replace the
code is exceeded. sample and program it again. Reject
8-40
the expired sample. If the sample shelf
life is too short, change it to a
reasonable one.
C04007 Sample bar Sample bar code / The bar code contains invalid Redefine the bar code with numbers
code contains invalid characters rather than number and and letters.
characters letter.
C04008 Sample bar Sample barcode is / The bar code length is greater than the Redefine the bar code with no more
code too long maximum value of 27 digits. than 27 digits.
C04009 Sample bar Sample bar code is / The bar code length is less than the Redefine the bar code with no less than
code shorter than 3 minimum value of 3 digits. 3 digits.
digits
C04010 Sample bar Sample bar code / Query result of configuration Reconfigure the bar code reader. If
code parameter parameters does not match the defined configuration error remains, perform
configuration error ones. The probable causes are: bar bar code reader diagnosis procedure to
code reader does not receive troubleshoot.
configuration instruction due to
communication error between bar code
reader and smart modules; or the
received instruction can not be
configured correctly due to
communication error; or other errors
occurred in bar code reader module.
C04011 Sample bar No bar code is / 1. No sample is loaded. 1. Load the samples.
code detected in sample 2. Sample bar code is too poor to be 2. Use clear and complete sample bar
position identified. code.
3. Sample bar code label is not applied 3. Adjust the sample bar code label to
correctly. make it face the gap on the sample cup
4. Sample bar code scanning window is adapter.
dirty. 4. Clean the sample bar code scanning
5. Symbology, digits and check digit of window.
sample bar code are not set correctly. 5. Check if the symbology, digits and
check digit of sample bar code are set
correctly.
6. If problem remains, troubleshoot
according to sample bar code diagnosis
8-41
feature.
C05001 Reagent bar Reagent / Incorrect reagent or reagent bar code is Reprint the reagent bar code, or
code corresponding to being used, or an invalid reagent bar replace the reagent bottle with an
the bar code has code is being used in a closed-reagent invalid bar code.
already been system. Closed-reagent bar code is
loaded aligned with closed reagents, and
cannot be used again for new reagent
when a reagent is exhausted.
C05002 Reagent bar Reagent bar code / Incorrect reagent bar code is being Print the new reagent bar code with
code information error used, or reagent bar code is not correct settings and check the bar code
configured reasonably. The reagent bar against the settings. In the case of a
code contains incomplete or incorrect closed-reagent system, replace the
reagent information, such as expiration reagent bottle, or contact the reagent
date, reagent volume, etc. supplier.
The reagent is placed in an incorrect If the reagent is placed incorrectly,
position, e.g. R1 on reagent carousel 2, adjust them to the correct positions,
or R2 on reagent carousel 1. that is, R1 to reagent carousel 1 and R2
to reagent carousel 2.
C05003 Reagent bar Reagent bar code / Incorrect reagent bar code is being Check the reagent bar code settings, or
code error, not meeting used, or reagent bar code settings are reprint the reagent bar code against
analysis rules incorrect. Non-closed reagent bar code the settings. In the case of a
is being used in a closed-reagent closed-reagent system, contact the
system. The system is failed to extract reagent supplier.
reagent information from the bar code.
C05004 Reagent bar Reagent has / Reagents in a closed-reagent system are Actions such as user using same reagent
code exceeded the used with maximum aspirate/dispense bottle repeatedly to add more reagent
maximum using volume and exhausted. Replace the should be discouraged. Replace the
times reagent bottle. User may have added closed reagent. If the error remains on
same reagent of other lot number or the new reagent, contact the reagent
bottle number into the reagent bottle, supplier. If the error remains on the
hoping to continue to use the same new reagent, contact the reagent
bottle. supplier to provide correct reagent bar
code.
C05005 Reagent bar Reagent has been / The reagent is expired and cannot be Replace the reagent.
code expired used for measurements.
C05006 Reagent bar Reserved reagent / Reagent rather than wash solution is Load the reagent again. Remove other
8-42
code position has been placed in the fixed wash solution reagent from the reserved position.
occupied by other position on reagent carousel 1.
reagents
C05007 Reagent bar Reserved reagent / Reagent rather than wash solution is Load the reagent again. Remove other
code position has been placed in the fixed wash solution reagent from the reserved position.
occupied by other position on reagent carousel 2.
reagents
C05008 Reagent bar Reserved reagent / Reagent rather than physiological saline Load the reagent again. Remove other
code position has been is placed in the fixed physiological reagent from the reserved position.
occupied by other saline position on reagent carousel 1.
reagents
C05009 Reagent bar Reagent bar code / Query result of configuration Reconfigure the bar code reader. If
code reader parameters does not match the defined configuration error remains, perform
configuration error ones. The probable causes are: bar bar code reader diagnosis procedure to
code reader does not receive troubleshoot.
configuration instruction due to
communication error between bar code
reader and smart modules; or the
received instruction can not be
configured correctly due to
communication error; or other errors
occurred in bar code reader module.
C06001 Host LIS initialization / Host file is damaged or does not exist. Reboot operating software; initialize
communication error LIS module
C06002 Host LIS communication / Host parameters error Check system configuration
communication parameter error parameters; re-connect LIS
C06003 Host LIS communication / Communication error If the error occurs accidentally, send or
communication error receive the instruction again. If the
error occurs for several times, contact
LIS vendor; if problem remain, contact
our R&D department.
C06004 Host LIS host cannot be / Abnormal network connection; LIS host Check LIS connection and network
communication connected is not started. cable. Check if LIS host and LIS station
is started normally.
C06005 Host Sending sample / Communication error If the error occurs accidentally, send or
8-43
communication results failed. receive again. If the error occurs for
several times, contact LIS vendor; if
problem remain, contact our R&D
department.
C06006 Host Sending sample / Communication error If the error occurs accidentally, send or
communication information failed receive again. If the error occurs for
several times, contact LIS vendor; if
problem remain, contact our R&D
department.
C06007 Host Inquiring sample / LIS host failure If the error occurs accidentally, neglect
communication information failed it. If the error occurs for several times,
contact LIS vendor; if problem remain,
contact our customer service
department or your local distributor.
C06008 Host Downloading / Incorrect channel settings; or Check and re-set the chemistry
communication sample failed insufficient or redundant chemistries on correspondence between the operating
the LIS host. software and the LIS host.
C07003 Light source Light intensity is / 1. The cuvette is contaminated. 1. Open the reaction carousel and
too weak 2. The wash station dispenses liquid check for overflow.
incorrectly. 2. Check if the wash station dispenses
3. The lamp is aging. liquid with correct volume to reaction
4. The lamp is not installed correctly. cuvettes.
3. Perform the diluted wash procedure
and then the lamp check procedure.
4. Replace the lamp.
5. Check if the lamp is installed
correctly.
department.
C07004 Light source Cuvette blank out / 1. Air bubbles are detected during 1. If the error occurs only on certain
of range washing. cuvette and does not happen again,
2. The wash station dispenses liquid ignore it.
incorrectly. 2. Check for cuvette overflow.
3. The cuvette is contaminated or 3. Check if the wash station dispenses
scratched. liquid with correct volume to reaction
8-44
4. The lamp is aging. cuvettes.
5. The lamp is not installed correctly. 4. Perform the diluted wash procedure
6. The photoelectric collection board and then the cuvette check procedure.
goes wrong. 5. Replace or wash the failed cuvette.
6. Replace the lamp.
7. Check if the lamp is installed
correctly.
department.
C07005 Light source Lamp is not turned / 1. The cuvette is contaminated. 1. Open the reaction carousel and
on 2. The lamp is damaged. check if the lamp is turned on. If it is
3. The lamp cable is not connected not, rerun the operating software.
properly. 2. If the lamp has been turned on,
4. The power board of the lamp is not check for cuvette overflow.
connected properly. 3. Check if the lamp cable is tightened.
5. The power supply of the analyzing 4. Replace the lamp.
unit is disconnected. 5. Check if the connect of the lamp
6. The photoelectric collection board power board is loose, and if necessary,
goes wrong. reinsert the connector.
6. Check if PCB works normally.
C07006 Light source Light intensity is / 1. A cuvette position has no cuvette 1. Check if all cuvette positions have
too strong installed. cuvettes installed.
2. The lamp is aging. 2. Check the using time of the lamp. If
3. The circuit gain is too high and necessary, replace the lamp.
beyond the measurement range. 3. Adjust gains.
C07007 Light source Dark current is too / 1. The circuit gain is too high and 1. Perform dark current fluctuation test
high beyond the measurement range. to identify failure.
2. The power board of the lamp is not 2. Check if abnormal channel is
connected properly. relevant with channel gains. Adjust
3. The photoelectric collection board gains if it is caused by gains being to
goes wrong. large.
3. Check if connect of lamp power
supply board is loose; pull off and plug
in the connector.
8-45
C07009 Light source Water blank out of L! 1. The cuvette is contaminated. 1. Check if the cuvette is overflowing.
range (10X) 2. The lamp has been replaced 2. Check if the Replace Lamp
incorrectly. command is executed during lamp
3. Cuvette check is not performed after replacement.
maintenance. 3. Execute the Cuvette Check
4. The cable connectors are not command again.
tightened. 4. Check if the lamp has been used for
5. The retaining screw is not tightened. over 6 month or 2000 hours. If yes,
6. Cleaning liquid inside the cuvette is replace it.
little. 5. Check if the cable connectors and
7. The lamp is aging. retaining screw of the lamp have been
tightened.
8. The photometer goes wrong.
6. Check if the cleaning liquid inside
the cuvette is no less than half of the
cuvette.
7. Execute the Photoelectric Signal
Collection command to test the lamp
stability.
8. Check if the reaction curve
fluctuates irregularly. If yes, replace
the lamp.
C07012 Other error of Storage device / No floppy disk or USB drive is inserted. Check if a USB drive or floppy disk is
operation unit error. Cannot No file is found in the floppy disk or USB inserted or full. Check if the storage
import data drive, or file error, or file is damaged. device is damaged.
The floppy disk or USB drive is locked or
damaged.
C07013 Other error of Storage device / No floppy disk or USB drive is inserted. Check if a USB drive or floppy disk is
operation unit error. Cannot Insufficient disk space. The floppy disk inserted or full. Check if the storage
export data or USB drive is locked or damaged. device is damaged.
C07014 Other error of CC reagent / All reagents of the reagent type for the Refill or replace the reagent.
operation unit exhausted chemistry are less than the minimum
limit. All reagents of the type are too
little to be detected.
C07015 Other error of ISE reagent / 1. The ISE buffer tank is empty. 1. Load the ISE buffer.
operation unit exhausted 2. The liquid level sensor of the ISE 2. Reconnect the liquid level sensor of
8-46
(Parameter A is 1 in module is not connected. the ISE module.
Instruction H) 3. The liquid level sensor of the ISE 3. Make sure that the liquid level sensor
module goes wrong. of ISE module is connected correctly.
4. Replace the liquid level sensor of ISE
module.
C07016 Other error of Insufficient / Insufficient wash solution on the Refill the wash solution on the reagent
operation unit reagent probe reagent carousel. carousel.
wash solution
C07017 Other error of Reagent probe / The wash solution on the reagent Refill the wash solution on the reagent
operation unit wash solution is carousel is exhausted. carousel.
exhausted
C07018 Other error of Insufficient sample / Insufficient sample probe wash solution Refill the wash solution.
operation unit probe wash
solution
C07019 Other error of Sample probe wash / Sample probe wash solution is Refill the wash solution.
operation unit solution is exhausted
exhausted
C07020 Other error of Software upgrading / Software upgrading failed Upgrade for 3 continuous times;
operation unit failed re-install operating system and
operating software; if problem
remains, contact our R&D department
C07022 Other error of Less than X tests / All reagents of the reagent type for the Refill or replace the reagent.
operation unit are left in cc chemistry are less than the minimum
reagent (X is limit. All reagents of the type are too
definable) little to be detected.
C07023 Other error of Calibration of one / The calibration factors are about to be Recalibrate the chemistries.
operation unit or more expired.
chemistries will be
expired
C07027 Other error of One or more / The calibrator is expired. Replace the calibrator.
operation unit calibrators will be
expired
C07028 Other error of One or more / The reagent is expired. Replace the reagent.
operation unit reagents will be
8-47
expired
C07029 Other error of Uncapping time of / The uncapping time of the reagent pack Replace the reagent.
operation unit one or more is too long.
reagents will be
exceeded
C07030 ISE module ISE reference REF Reference electrode performance is Replace the reference electrode
electrode degenerated
performance is
degenerated
C07033 Other error of ISE reagent / Inventory of the ISE buffer solution is Check the inventory, and refill ISE
operation unit inventory is less lower than the alarm limit. buffer solution if necessary.
than X% (X is
definable)
C07034 Other error of Insufficient / Insufficient physiological saline on Refill the physiological saline on the
operation unit physiological saline reagent carousel reagent carousel.
on reagent
carousel
C07035 Other error of Physiological saline / Physiological saline is exhausted Refill the physiological saline on the
operation unit is exhausted reagent carousel.
8-48
9 Scheduled Maintenance List
All the maintenance items below should be performed on the client by the
authorized customer servicing personnel every one year.
No. Item Material Material Code Qty Maintenance
Name Period
1 De-dusting the cooling fan None / / 12 months
and the cooling fin (fan of
the analyzer, fans of
ISE/refrigeration/lamp
module)
2 Maintain reagent None / / 12 months
refrigeration recycle filter
3 Check coolant in reagent Heat 801-BA80-00165-0 1 12 months
refrigeration recycle tube conductive 0
liquid
4 Clean lens in optical None / / 12 months
assembly
5 Replace consumables of APN-P085 801-BA80-00228-0 1 12 months or
waste pump (P07) Pump 0 running more
maintenance than 2000
package hours
6 Replace consumables of APN-P215 801-BA80-00227-0 1 24 months or
primary vacuum pump Pump 0 running more
(P08) maintenance than 5,000
package hours
7 Replace consumables of APN-P Pump New material. 1 12 months or
external vacuum pump maintenance Code is being running more
(P10) package requested than 2,000
hours
8 Replace interconnecting Interconnecti 0030-20-13339 16 12 months
tubes of auto wash tube ng tube
(1.5mm
3mm) (mould
MR13339)
9-1
No. Item Material Material Code Qty Maintenance
Name Period
9 Concentrated wash solution Plate-shape 801-BA40-00288-0 1 12 months
filter filter 0
10 Maintain water inlet filter None / / 12 months
9-2
9.1 Clean Cooling Fans and Radiators
9.1.1 When to do
The fans, dust screens and cooling fans of the analyzer may accumulate the dust;
therefore, their radiating performance will be affected. Clean them at least once a
year.
9.1.2 Tool
Table 9.1 Tool for cleaning the fan and radiating fin
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon socket
/ 1
head screwdriver
Hair brush / 1
Suction cleaner / 1
Figure 9.1 Air pump fan position and liquid pump fan position
9-3
Figure 9.2 Position of lamp Housing Fan and its radiator
Figure 9.3 ISE fan position
9-4
Figure 9.4 Fan and radiating fin number
Figure 9.5 Dust screen position
Table 9.2 Number of fans and radiators

No. Name Type
1 Air Pump Cooling Fan Fan
2 Liquid Pump Cooling Fan
Fan
3 Reagent refrigeration Fan
fan 1
9-5
No. Name Type
4 Reagent refrigeration Radiator
radiator
5 Lamp Housing Fan Fan
6 Lamp radiator Radiator
7 Radiating fan of ISE Fan
module
8 Dust screens 1 Dust screen
9 Dust screen 2 Dust screen
10 Dust screen 3 Dust screen
9.1.3 Maintenance steps

Air pump fan dedusting steps
1 Power off the analyzer;
2 Open the rear panel.
3 Unplug the air pump fan.
4 Remove the air pump fan.
5 Use a brush or suction cleaner to clean the dust of the fan.
6 Connect the plug of the air pump fan and reinstall the analyzer.
Liquid pump fan dedusting steps

1 Turn off the analyzer.
2 Open the rear panel.
3 Unplug the liquid pump fan.
4 Remove the liquid pump fan.
6 Connect the plug of the liquid pump fan and reinstall the analyzer.
Dedusting steps for reagent refrigerating fan and its radiator

1 Remove the refrigerating fan assembly according to the removing and
installation steps of refrigerating fan wiring in the manual.
3 Use a brush or suction cleaner to clean the dust of the radiator.
4 Reinstall the refrigerating fan assembly according to the removing and

installation steps of refrigerating fan wiring in the manual.
9-6
Dedusting steps for lamp housing fan and its radiator
1 Remove the lamp housing fan according to the removing steps of the lamp
housing fan in the manual.
3 Use a brush or suction cleaner to clean the dust of the radiator.
4 Reinstall the lamp housing fan according to the removing steps of the lamp
housing fan in the manual.
ISE fan dedusting steps

1 Turn off the analyzer.
2 Open the front panel and the cover of the ISE module.
3 Use a cross screwdriver to remove the ISE air lane.
4 Unplug the ISE cooling fan.
5 Remove the ISE fan.
7 Connect the plug of the ISE cooling fan and reinstall the analyzer.
Dedusting steps for the dust screens

Figure 9.6 Removing the dust screens
1 When removing dust screen 1, please push it in slightly according to the
9-7
direction of arrow"1-2-3" in the figure, lift it and pull it outward.
2 When removing dust screen 2, please follow the direction of arrow"7" and draw
it out.
3 When removing dust screen 3, please push it in slightly according to the

direction of "4-5-6" arrow in the figure, lift it and pull it outward.
4 Clean the removed dust screens with the water and then brush them clean with a
soft brush and dry them.
5 Reinstall all the dust screens.
9.1.4 Test and check

1 Check if the fans and dust screens are installed properly.
2 Check if the fan wiring is correct.
3 Check if the fans are working normally. Ensure there are no alarms.
4 Do not leave the screws inside the analyzer.
9-8
9.2 Maintain reagent refrigeration circulating filter
9.2.1 When to do
Clean the filter that is installed at the reagent compartment prime port at least once a
year.
9.2.2 Tool
Name Code Quantity
Slot-head
/ 1
screwdriver
Tweezers / 1
Flash light / 1
Figure 9.7 Refrigerating liquid filter structure

1 Remove the cover above the reagent compartment air vent.
2 Remove the screw choke plug at the air vent and injection port of the reagent
compartment with a flathead screw driver.
3 Use a pair of tweezers to remove the filter at the reagent injection port and wash
it with water.
4 Reinstall the filter at the reagent injection port.
5 Reinstall the screw choke plug at the air vent and injection port of the reagent
compartment.
6 Reinstall the instrument.
9.2.4 Test and confirmation

Turn on the analyzer. Turn on refrigeration. Access utilitymaintenancesystem
alignmentpyrology unitreagent refrigeration temperature curve screen. View the
9-9
Refr Temp temperature. The normal Refr Temp temperature should not lower than
-8. When the temperature is not lower than -8, the tube system works normally.
9-10
9.3 Check the refrigerant in the reagent circulation
system
9.3.1 When to do
The instrument is primed with the refrigerant by the manufacture. However, the
liquid level may become lower due to some reasons for example the vibration in
transit results in air bubble drift. Therefore, when installing the analyzer, check if the
analyzer is primed full with the refrigerant.
The service engineer checks the refrigerant in the circulation tube when performing
the yearly maintenance. If the refrigerant is found to be insufficient, the engineer will
add it. Meanwhile, the filter at the injection port of the reagent compartment needs
to be taken out. If necessary, wash it.
9.3.2 Maintenance tools and materials

Name Code Quantity
Slot-head
/ 1
screwdriver
Tweezers / 1
Flashlight / 1
Absorbent cotton
Cotton swabs a few
swab
Priming fixture BA80-J46 1
Refrigerant 801-BA80-00165-00 Six bottles

1 Remove the screw choke plug at the air vent and injection port of the reagent
compartment with a flathead screw driver.
2 Use a pair of tweezers to remove the filter at the reagent injection port and wash
it with water. (Refer to 9.2 for the structure of the filter)
3 Use a flash light to visually check the refrigerant level from the air vent and
prime port of the reagent compartment. If visual check is not allowed due to
the environment, use a cotton swab to sense the refrigerant level from the air
vent and prime port. Make sure that the refrigerant level is not lower than the
center line of the horizontal connector tube. The center line of the tube is about
15mm away from the top of the connector.
4 If the refrigerant level does not meet the requirements, fill more refrigerants
according to the steps for priming.
9-11
5 When the priming is completed, reinstall the filter at the injection port.
6 Reinstall the screw choke plug back at the air vent and injection port of the
reagent compartment.
Figure 9.8 Liquid level detection of the refrigerant system

Turn on the analyzer. Turn on refrigeration. Access utilitymaintenancesystem
alignmentpyrology unitreagent refrigeration temperature curve screen. View the
Refr Temp temperature. The normal Refr Temp temperature should not lower than
-8. When the temperature is not lower than -8, the pipeline system works
normally and refrigerant is sufficient.
9-12
9.4 Clean the lens of the optical module
9.4.1 When to do
The lens of the optical module have been used for 12 months.
9.4.2 Maintenance tools

Table 9.3 Required tools for cleaning the reagent refrigeration circulating filer
Name Code Quantity
Absorbent cotton / a few
swabs
Absolute ethyl / /
alcohol or medical
ethyl alcohol
Hexagon socket / 1
head tool

Requirements
No ethyl alcohol residue, water and stain on the lens of the photometer.
No alarm is given when the lamp is checked.
No alarm is given when the cuvette is checked.
NOTE
When removing the reaction carousel, pay attention to the relative position between
the probes and reaction carousel, and avoid breaking the cuvettes.
Use the absorbent cotton swabs to perform the operation in case the swab fibers
stick on the lens and affect the transmission of light.
When wiping the lens, do not dip too much ethanol on the cotton swab(No ethanol
drop is seen on the cotton swab ) in case redundant ethanol residue affects the
transmittance of the lens. If two much ethanol remains on the lens, please use
tissue paper to absorb it.
When wiping the lens, please follow the same direction (clockwise or anti-clockwise)
in case the dust or dirt may remain on the surface of the lens.
How to do
1 Close the software and power off the analyzing unit. Remove the reaction
carousel.
2 Use absorbent cotton swab to dip a little absolute ethyl alcohol or medical ethyl
alcohol and wipe the two lens of the optical module. When wiping the lens,
please follow the same direction (clockwise or anti-clockwise).
9-13
3 After wiping the lens, check if there is ethanol residue, stain, or fingerprinted. on
the surface. If yes, re-wipe them. If there is water or ethanol residue on the
surface of the lens, please use the dry absorbent cotton swab to absorb it.
4 Reinstall the reaction carousel and wash station. Power on the analyzing unit and
start up the operating software.
5 After the lamp is steady, access lamp check and cuvette check through the
following path: utility=>maintenance=>maintenance=>lamp check/cuvette
check. When the maintenance is complete, ensure that the energy of the
photometer and the light transmittance of the cuvette should meet the operation
requirements.
9-14
9.5 Replacement of the wearing parts of waste pump
(P07)
9.5.1 When to do
If the waste pump (P07) has been in service for 12 months or more than 2000 hours
or if such failures as leakage, insufficient flow, abnormal noise, etc. occur to the
waste pump, then replace its wearing parts.

Name Code Quantity
Medical rubber / a pair
gloves
FRU
9.5.3 Required material
ID FRU code and Material name(FRU) Remark
material code
1 801-BA80-00228-00 APN-P085 air pump 1 set
maintenance spare parts
pack

2 Open the rear panel. Disconnect the wire on the pump chassis of waste
pumpP07. The following figure shows the position of the pump chassis.
9-15
3 Disconnect the pipe of P07 and P08 at the smaller end (on the smaller pipe side)
of the transfer connector as shown in the figure:
4 Dismantle the upper cover of the pump box. Remove the waste pump together
with the conversion board. Place them in an open place away from the
instrument. Then remove the connecting conduct on the inlet-outlet connector
of the pump. Do not loosen the connector when removing the connecting
conduct. The following figure shows the waste pump and conversion board
assembly:
5 Remove the four screws on the pump head as shown in the following figure.
9-16
6 After the screws are removed, dismantle the upper and lower cover of the pump
head. Take out the two valve plates and lock rings. Dispose them as waste. See
the following figure:
7 Lift the rim of the iris diaphragm and pinch it with two hands. Rotate it
anti-clockwise and take it out as shown in the following figure: Note: The fixing
screws of the iris diaphragm have metal washers. Do not get them lost. If the
washers drop into the pump body, take them out by turning the pump upside
down. When installing the new iris diaphragm, use the dismantled washers again.
8 The parts that need to be replaced after dismantlement include: two valve plates,
two lock rings and one iris diaphragm as shown in the following figure:
9-17
9 Replace the old parts with the new ones. First install the diaphragm. When
installing it, install the metal washer on the screws. Then align the screws with
the mounting holes. Pinch the rim of the iris diaphragm with two hands. Turn it
clockwise until it is fastened.
Tips: You can put the pump upside down when installing the iris diaphragm .In
so doing, the installation will be easier and the washers are not easy to fall off.
10 When the iris diaphragm has been installed, install the two valve plates and two
lock rings to the corresponding positions.
11 Reinstall the upper and lower cover of the pump head. After the reassembly, the
gap at joint is even. If there is a big gap between the upper and lower cover or
the gap at joint is uneven, it indicates that the valve plate may be installed in a
wrong position. Readjust the position of the valve plates. After the pump head is
assembled, install the pump head on the pump body.
9-18
NOTE
Before installing the pump head on the pump body, ensure that the iris
diaphragm is placed at the center of the lower dead point. The lower dead point
refers to the lowest position of the iris diaphragm.
12 When tightening the screws, screw up any two diagonal screws first.
13 During installation, ensure that the inlet and outlet mark faces the inner side of
the pump body(toward the motor) The screwdriver's torque is 1.37Nm.
14 Replace another pump head following the same installation methods. After the
replacement is completed, connect the new conducts pipe to the pump
connector. Do not loosen the connector during this process otherwise the waste
leakage may occur.
15 Reinstall the P07 pump assembly into the pump chassis but do not install the
upper cover; Connect the inlet/outlet conduct pipe of P07 with the original
connector.
NOTE
The inlet on the pump head is connected to the outlet conduct pipe of the waste
collector; the outlet on the pump head is connected to the conduct pipe on the
hydropneumatic inlet/outlet panel.
L-IN is connected to the smaller end of the conduct pipe transfer connector at
the bottom of the low concentration waste collector; H-IN is connected to the
smaller end of the conduct pipe transfer connector at the bottom of the high
concentration waste collector.
L-OUT and H-OUT are respectively connected to the smaller end of the transfer
connector of the high concentration and low concentration conduct pipe on the
inlet / outlet panel.
16 When the guide pipes have been connected, check again if the guide pipes are
correctly connected to their corresponding IN or OUT port. If not, the liquid
waste may be primed back.
17 After the guide pipes have been correctly connected, reinstall the pump chassis
and the guide pipe of P08. Reconnect the cables of P07 and P08.
9-19
NOTE
Biohazardous danger! Please wear gloves and adopt other protective measures.
Dispose the removed parts appropriately. After the maintenance is completed,
clean the site thoroughly.

Switch on the analyzer. Request a test and observe if the waste discharge is normal.
If the waste can not be discharged or is pumped back, it indicates that the conduct
pipe of the pump may be connected incorrectly or replaced wrongly. Dismantle and
reinstall the assembly and then check again until the waste is discharged normally.
Install back the rear panel of the instrument.
9-20
9.6 Replacement of the wearing parts of primary vacuum
pump(P08)
9.6.1 When to do
If the primary vacuum pump (P08) has been in service for 24 months or more than
5000 hours or such failures as vacuum deficiency, abnormal noise, etc. occur to the
pump, replace the wearing parts of the pump.

Name Code Quantity
Medical rubber / 1
gloves
Adhesives. 222 A90-000069--- 1
50ml/EA(1)
9.6.3 Required Material(FRU)

No. FRU code and FRU
Material name Remark
material code
1 801-BA80-00227-00 APN-P215 air pump 1
maintenance spare parts kit

2 Open the rear panel. Disconnect the pipe on the primary vacuum pump P08 .
The following figure shows the position of the pump chassis.
9-21
3 Disconnect the pipe of P08 at the smaller end(on the smaller pipe side) of the
transfer connector as shown in the figure:
4 Lift the upper cover of the pump chassis. Remove primary vacuum pump P08
together with the conversion board. Place them outside the pump chassis.
Primary
vacuum
pump
pinboard
5 Remove the four screws on the pump head and remove the upper cover of the
pump head. During this process, do not remove the screw at the center of the
pump head as shown in the following figure:
9-22
6 After the pump head is removed, remove the two screws on the valve plate press
head inside the upper cover. Take out the valve plate and dispose it as waste. See
the following figure.
7 Remove the four screws on the press head of the diaphragm of the lower cover.
Lift the diaphragm with two hands and take it out gently. Dispose it as waste. See
the following figure.
8 Place the new diaphragm in the original position and align it with the four screw
holes. Place the diaphragm press head on the diaphragm. Screw up the four
screws diagonally. When installing the diaphragm, please face outward the side
of press head on which the screw mounting holes have bevels. Use the screw
adhesives 222 50ml/EA Part number:A90-000069---during installation. Torque:
0.8 Nm.
9-23
NOTE
When smearing the screw adhesive, smear a little on the screws and then put
the screws into the screw holes. Do not drop the screw adhesive on the parts
like diaphragm, crank, etc. (If the screw adhesive drops on the parts, wipe the
parts clean immediately. )
9 Install the new valve plate on the press head. Align the locating holes of the
valve plate with the locating posts on the press head. Ensure the mark point
faces outward.
10 Reinstall the valve plate and press head on the pump head upper cover. Align the
locating posts on the press head with the inner locating holes of the pump head
upper cover. Place the valve between the press head and the pump cover.
11 Reinstall the upper cover on the pump head. After the installation, the gap at
joint is even. If there is a big gap between the upper and lower cover or the gap
at joint is uneven, it indicates that the valve plate or the diaphragm may be
installed in a wrong position. Readjust the positions of the valve plate or the
diaphragm.
9-24
NOTE
Before the pump head is installed on the pump body, ensure that the diaphragm
is installed at the center of the lower dead point. The lower dead point refers to
the lowest position of the iris diaphragm.
When tightening the screws, screw up them diagonally.(Torque:0.8 Nm)
Make sure the inlet/outlet of the pump faces the inner side of the pump body
(on the motor side)
12 Replace another pump head by adopting the same methods. After the
replacement, check if the conduct pipes at the inlet/outlet connectors are
correctly connected. Ensure that the conduct pipes are not disconnected or not
connected loosely .Otherwise, leakage may occur and the required vacuum
degree can not be reached.
13 Install back the pump in the pump chassis Do not install the upper cover.
Connect the conduct pipe at the inlet of P08 with the corresponding connector.
Note: Do not connect the pipes incorrectly otherwise the system can not
establish the vacuum and the pump or the vacuum container may be damaged
due to high pressure.
14 Connect the cable of P08

1 Power on the instrument. Test the pressure of the primary vacuum pump
through the maintenance function. Establish the system vacuum. If the vacuum
is established normally, the replacement process is correct. If not, test the
vacuum another two times. If the vacuum can not be established for the third
time, it indicates that the replacement process is wrong or the leakage occurred
to the conduct pipes. Recheck the system until it works normally.
2 When the test is completed, install the pump upper cover and then the rear
panel of the instrument.
9-25
9.7 Replacement of the auto wash transfer pipe
9.7.1 When to do
When the auto wash transfer pipe has been in service for 12 months or such failures
as leakage, vacuum deficiency, clogging, etc. occurred to the pipe, replace it.

Name Code Quantity
Medical rubber / 1
glove
Intubation fixture BA80- J39-01 1

ID FRU code and Material name Remark
material code
1 801-BA80-00123-00 Transfer Required
pipe(1.5mm-3mm)(die quantity:14
MR1333)

1 Make sure the system is powered off. Remove the wash probe assembly from
the cuvette wash station.
2 Unplug the old transfer pipe on the phase 1 wash probe. Dispose it as waste.
9-26
3 Use the intubation fixture (BA80- J39-01) to insert the Teflon pipe into the new
transfer pipe (The Teflon pipe is inserted into the bigger end of the new transfer
pipe till the center position of the transfer pipe.) The intubation fixture is shown
in the following figure.
4 Insert the phase 1 wash probe into the smaller end of the transfer pipe till the
center position of the transfer pipe.
5 Follow step 2 to 4 and replace other phase's transfer pipes (14 in total)
Note: Do not unplug all the old transfer pipes at one time. Replace the pipes one
by one in case they are mixed up.

1 Switch on the instrument.
2 Perform the diluted wash cuvette procedure. Observe the cuvette auto wash
prime/aspirate system. Ensure that no leakage occurs to the transfer pipe joint
and that the liquid does not overflow the cuvettes.
3 If leakage occurs to the transfer pipe joint or the liquid overflows the cuvettes,
stop washing cuvette with diluted solution. Check the connection of the transfer
pipes in the cuvette auto wash prime/aspirate system. Find out the failure and
retest the system until it works normally.
9-27
9.8 Replacement of the concentrated wash solution
filter
9.8.1 When to do
When the concentrated wash solution filter has been in service for 12 months or
such failures as leakage, no assumption of the concentrate wash solution, clogging,
etc. occurred to the filter, replace it.

Name Code Quantity
Cutting pliers / 1
gloves
small cable tie / Several
Intubation fixture BA80-J87 1

ID FRU code and Material name Remark
material code
1 801-BA40-00288-00 Disk-like filter Required
quantity:1
2 049-000213-00 Transfer pipe(3mm-5mm) 2

2 Open the right front door. Take out the ISE buffer container, concentrated wash
solution container and diluted wash solution container. See the following figure.
9-28
NOTE
Before removing the containers, disconnect the corresponding float cable and
avoiding pulling it.
Disconnect the CPC connector at the outlet of the diluted wash solution
container. When removing the conduct pipe, make sure the solution does not
flow out in case it pollutes the panel.
3 Use a cross screwdriver to remove the small panel (as shown in the above figure)
to expose the disk-like filter.
4 Use the cutting pliers to cut the binder at the two ends of the filter. Do not
scratch the black transfer pipe (049-000213-00). If it is damaged, replace it.
5 Unplug the black transfer pipes at the two ends of the filter. If the Teflon pipe
slides out of the transfer pipe, use the fixture BA80-J87to insert the Teflon
pipe into the smaller end of the transfer pipe(3mm-5mm). See the following
figure.
6 Insert the bigger end of the transfer pipe into the fluke and fasten it with the
binder.
7 Reconnect the wire of the three containers' float in step 2. Place the three
9-29
containers in the original places. Put the float into the relevant container. Restore
the connection of CPC connector at the outlet of the diluted wash solution
container. Put the biggest conduct pipe in the pipe system of the diluted wash
solution container into the container. Extend the other two conduct pipes(one is
1/8 inch transparent pipe and one Teflon pipe ) outside the container to connect
an above 5 L container.

1 Check the priming of the concentrated wash solution pump
2 Follow above-mentioned step 7, take out the concentrated wash solution pipe
(Teflon pipe) and the water supply pipe (1/8 inch transparent pipe) from the
diluted wash solution container. Connect an above 5L container to the outlet in
case the laboratory is contaminated.
3 Power on the instrument.
4 Make the diluted wash solution container's low float OFF. Start auto dilution.
5 Wait for about five minutes or wait till the liquid flows out the Teflon pipe. It
indicates the priming of the concentrated pump is completed.
6 Lift the high float of the diluted wash solution container. Wait for 33.5 seconds
till the auto dilution stops.
7 Put the Teflon pipe,1/8 inch pipe and 1/4 inch pipe into the diluted wash
solution container.
8 Test the auto dilution parameter
The Teflon pipe does not deliver the liquid continuously but in a period of
33.5 seconds. In each period, the liquid flows out from the Teflon for six
seconds. Check specially if the liquid flow is normal.
If the liquid flow is abnormal, check if the parameters configured by
operating software are normal.
Select cuvette wash station in the maintenance -> Parameter Configuration.
Inquire P05 Turn-on Time(should be 6.0 ) and Dilute Period(should be
33.5 ) See the following figure:
Ensure the two parameters are correct. If so, the replacement is correct.
Otherwise check the filter pipe system till it works normally.
9 Install back the small panel.
9-30
9.9 Maintenance the water supply filter
9.9.1 When to do
When the water supply filter has been in service for 12 months or such failures as
clogging, too slow water supply, etc. occurred to the filter, replace it.

Name Code Quantity
Flathead / 1
screwdriver
Adjustable wrench / 1
gloves

1 Make sure the analyzer's power is off. Ensure the power of the water supply
equipment is off.
2 Loosen one of the pressure release bolt to release the remaining pressure in the
water supply system as shown in the following figure:
NOTE
Before loosening the pressure release bolt, put a 1L container at the pressure
outlet in case the DI water flows out.
3 Wait until no water flows out from the pressure outlet of the water supply filter.
Use an adjustable wrench to tighten the pressure release bolt. Use a slot-head
screwdriver to loosen the pipe hoop at the DI water inlet on the rear panel.
Unplug the inlet pipe. The position of the DI water inlet is marked by "6" in the
following figure.
9-31
4 Use the sharp nose pliers to take out the filter block and the filter core in the
water supply connector as shown in the figure.
5 Use a toothbrush to clean the filter core. Use the sharp nose pliers to install back
the filter core and the filter block into the water supply connector according to
the order shown in the above figure.
6 Insert the inlet pipe into the water supply connector and use a slot head
screwdriver to fasten the pipe hoop.

1 Switch on the instrument and the water supply instrument.
2 Check if leakage occurs at the pressure release bolt of the water supply filter. If
so, tighten the relevant pressure release bolt again.
3 Check if leakage occurs at the water supply connector. If so, tighten the pipe
9-32
hoop again.
4 Request a test and check if the water supply is normal. Ensure no alarm is given.
9-33
9-34
P/N: 046-001556-00(2.0)

BS 800

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BS 800

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BS-800/BS-820 Chemistry Analyzer

This warranty shall not extend to:

Fax: +86 755 26582934 26582500

Intellectual Property Statement............................................................................................................... ii

Figure 1.1 Overview of the instrument

Table 1.1 Main functions of each unit

2.1.2 Specifications for Sample System

2.1.3 Specifications for Reagent System

2.1.4 Specifications of Reaction System

2.1.5 Specifications of Operation

Figure 2.1 Analysis workflows

2.2.2 Workflow Descriptions

Sequential actions of probe R1 in each period

Sequential actions of probe R2 in each period

Sequential actions of reagent and sample mixers in each period

Sequential actions of reaction carousel

2.2.3 Measuring Points

8-phase washing About

Measuring points for single-/double-reagent

Figure 2.2 Measuring points for single-/double-reagent

Figure 2.3 Measuring points for triple-/quadruple-reagents

3.2.2 System Configuration

Min: 500 Unit: mm

Figure 3.1 System clearances

3.3.2 Power Supply and Noise

3.3.3 Water Supply and Drainage

3.4.3 Network Adapter

3.4.4 Serial Port

3.4.5 Hard Disk Defragment

3.4.6 Remove Screen Saver and System Standby

Disable automatic synchronization with Internet time server

3.4.8 Auto Awake Setup

Settings of Windows XP:

Select Power - Wake, and perform the following settings:

3 To disable the independent network adapter, select My Computer - Properties -

5 Select Utility- System Setup - Instrument F1 - Sleep/Awake, set up the auto

Figure 3.2 Before and after removing instrument package

Figure 3.4 Remove chemistry analyzer from package

Figure 3.6 Connect tubes, chemistry analyzer and computer

9 Perform the installation according to the figure below.

Figure 3.7 Installation of 3 probes

Figure 3.8 Install mixers

3.5.3 Fluidic Connection

Figure 3.9 Connect Chemistry Analyzer with Water Unit

Connect Chemistry Analyzer with Water Supply Module (optional)

DI water inlet 7 8 9 8: Air vent

Water supply module

Connect Chemistry Analyzer with Waste Drainage Facilities

High-conc waste sensor

High-conc waste tank

2 Connect the high-concentration waste tube and sensor to the high-concentration

6 Enclose the low-concentration waste outlet to eliminate noise and prevent

3.5.4 Connection of Chemistry Analyzer

ISE buffer Concentrated

2 If you are using an UPS, install it and make it properly grounded.

3.5.5 Installation of Hub (optional)

4 Select dynamic address.

3.5.6 Installation of Data Management Software

2 Install .Net Framework 3.5.

4 When the data management software installation window is displayed, select

5 The data management software is installed successfully.

6 Perform the Fluidic Prime procedure.

3.5.8 Fluidic Prime